Home

Movie Magic Screenwriter

1. 42 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 4 Scene Heading A Pop up list displays with Initial Scene Heading Text options FULL SHOT FADE IN Make this an Outline Element Mo Initial Text End of Act Start New Act Make this a Shot Make this a Transition Nevermind Type in the underlined QuickLetter of your selection and it s entered for you For example type e for EXT to enter EXT and the correct spacing following it Type v for Nevermind to Cancel or press ESC D MS le lees 4 INT Next enter a Location 1 8 5 Location To enter a Location that s already been used in this script press RETURN A Pop up list displays with your script s unique Location Text options e Scene Locations HALLWAY LIBER ES ee PARK Type the first letter of the Location or if more than one have the same first letter type enough letters of the location until the location you want is highlighted and press RETURN The Location is entered for you complete with correct spacing INT OFFICE Next enter a Time of Day Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 43 1 8 6 Time of Day 1 8 7 1 8 8 Enter a Time of Day by pressing RETURN after typing your Location A Pop up list displays with Time of Day options CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER Mever Mind Type in the underlined QuickLetter of your selection and it s entered for you For example type d for DAY
2. 184 Ioui rr 185 le mE 185 Weir lt a SCMOUS t PE 185 14 Producti n MTN 185 EEGEN ee 186 The PROGUGH OIC CIC c EE 186 NOONG OCI ei E 187 Peroni i oV ONS E 190 Lsu Revised PAg EN 190 Sart NEXT REVISION et 190 PROVISION MaERS pra E E 191 Manual TPR VSI NAI ac ETE TTE DT OS DE 191 Aulto Ievisloh Mal KS E 192 Enabling Auto Revision VIS E 192 Removing All Current Revision Marke uk 192 Locked Scripts ODUOFS xusisdsfuziividisiia rusas E od ux EU fuc udo as uu aio da clu a ma SU au RE ER U 192 Locked Scene FS GIGS ODER 193 Merito Page E EE 194 Gu MI M T e Hn 195 A Scene luet ele E eR MNT TOT TEM 195 hui E 3 GAMME M E 196 leen EE 196 Ee nesiteasidecinnrepssux A hada mA Guu m ES DI SEX ant EEN 197 EE Eege 197 Use Alternate Scene NUMBING DEE 198 L ked Leter Skip M EE 198 Advanced Locking Features susieina eegen 199 Changing the Level ge e EE 199 OVEMidInG Rn ET E 200 sre Te aE TU Mm 201 CORY SUING A Fage REPRE mmM vr 201 Contents 9 eil Un Unie SIGH AGS Seer AaS TOO T SN 202 DEE REVISION Dia Color rM 203 Production Bie AKO OWNS eut dE ENEE EENS 204 le ue Ee le E 204
3. 99 SUNN CONTO T ER m uu ER 99 r TE e e 99 cadi Ee te D 100 CUMING SPACING COMO P 100 IEN OBTOMS CONTO EE 100 Outline Panel ODUOLIS EE 101 Scene Heading Field View Control 102 VIG Control ON OM P 102 EE COM E 103 Current Element Drop Down LISE duoc doo atop degen ge td Sab Ra Emp ca quce Eed eege a pin adis 104 Outline Style Management Control 104 NaviDoc Outline Styles Format ee NEE 105 Delete Outline Style COMM e s cose rait pref S aC lt ut ea acr E Fa Rue Zu HOC RC AQ ORI E DA EN Eu LEN Ra uw e E RU daa 106 Add Outline Element COWL EE 107 OUTING Styles Formal de 108 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Move Outline Elements in the Bere eic EE 108 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Reassign Outline Element Styles in the Re et D ar m E 109 A Note About Copying Styles Between Documents 110 COUSINS FS AUS SE EA T E Deoa ADS xaT SE Ca o MORE E E E TA AE VCI MEM UR RUE T 111 Outline Tools in the Document View 112 Adding and Removing Outline Elements in the Document 112 Movie Magic Screenwriter Reassigning Outline Elements in the Document 112 Promoting and Demoting Outline Elements 113 11 Printing the Document
4. 48 scu HR 48 VOT FAG RR TE 48 B gor HP LT m 49 Nos NN cc 49 PRO Ez Te E 49 Wy E og HT A 50 Hide Show a Note E 50 PE NC e EE 50 ROT lee hM TTERI 51 SWIN zi HIR CERE TEE EDO ETE ETE 51 MOVING DETWEGI I MIR C EE EE E otn 52 Character Name IN DialoGs ACTON me 53 FOrced Page Brea srcane Ee 54 Remove a Forced Page EE 54 SOA el 7 EE 54 ubi dL rr 54 EENS ee 54 TT ga Mc cc M M 55 Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue llceeeeiiieeeee ei eeeeeesieeeene seen nennen nnn nnn EEN nnn nnn nnn nnn nn nnne 55 Movie Magic Screenwriter Eee tpi c 55 Dual Golamns MISTUCH ONS segiden eE aicut nuca XX tid Ricci apu eda Rd e xU RE d itd 55 Dal CLIN Ie n E 56 Ch atihg cc 57 En TTC
5. wo O w New Document choose Template suet ow n ow ER ER EELER SECH Sw ER ER EELER Cd EES we Cd ow s Gee ER ER EELER SECH EE ER ow SECH Pme ow or E mw ER ER Cd RES ew s Switches Between Open Documents covma Fe 1 15 2 4 Shortcut Keys for Formatting Short Gut KeystorFormating Tages EES ECH ES ESCH Toeris EES ECH ES SR KEE m EE Toese o SC CONTR Inserts Soft Hyphen OL CONTR Inserts Hard Dash SHIFT OL CONTR Capitalize Word OL CONTR Lowercase Word SHIFT OL CONTR Uppercase Word OL CONTR Add Forced Page Break OL RETURN Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 251 Add Hard Return Inserts a blank space RETURN SPACE SPACE Inserts a Hard Space 1 15 2 5 Shortcut Keys for NaviDoc uu DS Increases font size in NaviDoc Moves the NaviDoc to the top of the document CONTROL Moves the NaviDoc to the bottom of the document CONTROL Moves the NaviDoc up one Screen CONTROL PAGE UP Moves the NaviDoc Down one Screen CONTROL PAGE DOWN 1 15 2 6 Shortcut Keys for Navigation Short Cut keys for Navigation NM ERN Moves the caret to the beginning of the line qom 252 Movie Magic Screenwriter mmm om document CMD EE uS Feb 1 ae pue WE eg T vw Keeseren T me Kal 1 15 2 7 Shortcut Keys for Selection Sron cures torsen LIT seam S
6. NNNM Let Right starting F m g v Always put Right Number on Line 1 Scene Continued Text F Top of Pg CONTINUED DW Bottom of Pg CONTINUED Left Margin of Bottom Continued ee E Time of Day Dashes Lets you choose how many dashes should be placed between Location and Time of Day in Scene Headings when using QuickType popup lists Enter a number between 0 and 9 The number entered in Spaces determines how many spaces are placed before and after the Time of Day Dash es Number of Spaces after INT EXT Determines how many character spaces are placed between INT or EXT and the Location when using QuickType popup lists Enter a number between 0 and 9 NOTE The Time of Day Dashes and Number of Spaces after INT EXT settings do not update existing Scene Headings They only change the appearance of future Scene Headings you create after changing the settings To change existing Scene Headings use the Search amp Replace command Scene Numbers Allows you to choose how and when Scene Numbers are displayed onscreen and printed if you have Scene Numbers set to print e Left If checked displays left Scene Numbers e Right If checked displays right Scene Numbers e Starting Allows you to enter a Scene Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 179 e Always put Right Number on Line 1 If checked always pu
7. 1 5 10 7 Options for Loading Element Styles 1 5 11 1 5 11 1 Options for Loading Element Styles When loading element styles into an existing document you can choose to keep some existing formats or load new formatting from the layout This is done through the Format gt Load Styles from menu Select either e Template Loads styles from a Screenwriter template e From Screenwriter Document Loads styles from any Screenwriter document Saving a Document To save an open file display it onscreen If you have multiple scripts open select the file to display by clicking on its name at the bottom of the Window menu A checkmark appears next to its name and it becomes the currently displayed file Under the File menu select a save option Close Exits the script without exiting Screenwriter If you ve made changes without saving it prompts you to save the file only if you have added something to your script If you remove portions of your script and never add anything to it the program will never ask you to save Save Saves your script under its current name or asks for a new name if you haven t already named the file Save As Goes to the Save As menu You can change the script name its subdirectory or file format Save All Open Scripts Saves all files you have open if they have changes that need saving Prompts you for save options for each file if needed Exit Closes all scripts and exits
8. 1 5 9 2 1 5 9 3 1 5 9 4 e Format Menu 229 e Goto Menu 2 2 e NaviDoc Menu 233 e Tools Menu 235 e Production Menu 237 e Window Menu 217 e Help Menu 2471 Top Toolbar Beneath that is the Top Toolbar with Speed Buttons for frequently used tasks To see what any Speed Button does move the mouse cursor arrow over it A hint explaining its function appears immediately underneath the button Another explanation often giving the Quick Key command may also appear on the status bar at the bottom of the screen NOTE You can customize the Top Toolbar by going to View Display Options Toolbar gt Customize Toolbar You can also access the Customize Toolbar Panel by right clicking on the Top Toolbar to bring up it s Context menu Right Toolbar At the right of the main editing window is the C Right Toolbar A Right Toolbar icon button inserts an element at the cursor position p To Show or Hide the Right Toolbar go to View Display Options Toolbars Show Right Toolbars To change the way the Right Toolbar displays J go to Display Options under the View menu o Bottom Status Bar Across the bottom of the screen is the Bottom Status Bar On its left side is the View toolbar 21 To the right of that is the Insert Typeover Button which toggles between Insert and Typeover modes In Insert mode whatever you type is inserted before the cursor In Movie Magic S
9. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 85 1 10 8 Notes Panel The NaviDoc Notes Panel replaces the Note Commander feature in earlier versions of Movie Magic Screenwriter The Notes Panel is used to add remove modify and navigate to notes in your document It is also used to create and control note categories a new feature The Notes Panel can be displayed by clicking on the Notes tab in the NaviDoc The keyboard command for showing the Notes Panel is CTRL 3 ca m e fa A a S saiptNote ES X AC S Outline Scenes Notes Bookmarks 4 de de dE Ee eds PELE E E EE n EE es is reading a newspaper Uncle Billy has finished filling c 2 um lt out his slip and comes over to taunt Potter the envelope D B E containing the money in his hand P fen aen n H LR UNCLE BILLY CONT D Well good morning Mr Potter What s T the news Se J He grabs the paper from Potter s hand o UNCLE BILLY CONT D Well well well Harry Bailey wins Congressional Medal That couldn t be one of the Bailey boys You just i can t keep those Baileys down now MAKE SWAP OBVIOUS E geheie CONTINUED EE ale SS E 21 LER Script ais m Notes Panel Sync Frame When you select a note in the NaviDoc the script is scrolled to the note in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the note in the NaviDoc displays ONLY when the selection is within the note in the document The
10. White Blue Pink Yellow Green Goldenrod Salmon Cherry Buff Tan After you have locked this the White shooting script for the first time Blue will be set as the next revision color Click on OK to accept your changes or the defaults and Lock the Script A prompt displays telling you that you re ready to print the White draft and then start making Revisions that will appear in the Blue draft Click on OK to continue 190 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 2 2 1 14 2 3 1 14 2 4 Next update the Title Page Under the View menu select Title Page Publisher Create a text box and start the Running List with the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes Save the script under File Save T Print the White draft Shooting Script Under the File menu select Print Copy and distribute the script to all concerned parties Perform Revisions 1 o Save the script under File Save As Give it a different name to reflect the Date and its status as the next Revision Color draft e g MyScript BLUE Make changes to the script adding and deleting text as necessary that will appear in the next draft Save the file as you go Because the script is locked Screenwriter does the following e Automatically puts Revision Marks on lines you make changes to e Puts appropriate OMITTED text in the place of omitted Scenes and Pages e Keeps existing Page
11. If your script doesn t import successfully try again with different options checked You may have to experiment with these options to get the best results 1 15 4 4 Importing a Macintosh Word Processor script If the Cut and Paste method doesn t import satisfactorily try this method Also if the Mac Word Processor script you want to import is on a different computer than Screenwriter you can t use the Cut and Paste method Instead 1 Open the Mac Word Processor e g Microsoft Word or TextEdit and open the script file you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under the File menu choose Save As Save the script under a different name 3 In the Save As window there should be an option to save the script in a different format Typically it says something like Format or File Type or Save Type Change it to Rich Text Format or RTF If that s not available choose Text or ASCII Text If Text or ASCII options like With Line Breaks or With Formatting are available select them 4 Click on OK to save When the file s saved exit the Windows Word Processor If importing from a different computer transfer the saved file to your Screenwriter computer Now follow the Direct Import instructions above 1 15 4 5 Importing a Scriptware for Windows script First export the Scriptware script as a Scriptware Tagged file 1 Open Scriptware for Windows and open the script you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under the File menu select Expo
12. e WORDS ONE TWO THREE e Roman Numerals I Il Ill Print Headers On Determines on which pages you want the Header and Footer Text to print Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Not Page One Header Text will be printed on every page except Page One This is the accepted standard for Screenplays e Every Page Header Text will be printed on every page including Page One e Every Page Except first Page of Scene Header Text will not be printed on the first page of a new Scene or Act Used in some TV shows as the Act Break Scene Label is already displayed Align Headers Footers Items in Header and Footer Text can be aligned flush with the right margin flush with the left margin or a combination of the two Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Flush Left at Margin Aligns Header and Footer Text flush with the Left margin using the default Left margin selected in Page Layout Enter a new Left margin for Header and Footer Text only if desired Accepts values in 1 10 increments between 0 3 and 8 0 e Flush Right at Margin Aligns Header and Footer Text flush with the Right margin using the default Right margin selected in Page Layout Enter a new Right margin for Header Text only if desired This is Screenwriter s default for Header and Footer Text alignment Accepts values in 1 10 increments between 0 3 and 8 0 To have some items align flush left and others align flush right
13. 1 13 14 1 1 Options common to all script elements Options common to all script elements though with different values for each are Margins Left and Right adjustable in units of 1 10th of an inch Margins in Inches Left 15 B Right 1 0 a Justified Justified Justified is a feature that appears in the text formatting section of the following menus Dialogue Parenthetical Action and Notes When this option is enabled all words along the right side of the script will be aligned and even Animation scripts are the only scripts that actually use this format In addition the justified text will not display on screen but will print and display in Print Preview NOTE The Darken Courier New function will not work when justified is selected It will normally print Courier New instead You can find this function by going into the Tools menu clicking Options and then clicking the Printing button Line Spacing Lines Before and Interline between lines within an element adjustable in units of 1 10th of a line Line Spacing in Lines Lines Before 1 0 ki Interline 1 n All Capitals Bold Italicized and Underlined text formatting checkboxes A button to select a Font s Typeface Style and Size J ALL CAPS Bold salicized Underlined Font Courier Size rat b s a E Courier 12
14. 196 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 4 5 1 14 4 6 Multi Lock Production Multi Lock This menu command is grayed out unless you are in a script that already has Locked Scene Headings and or Locked Pages in which case selecting this item will take you to a sub menu with the following options 1 Scenes 196 This option will be grayed out unless the script already has Locked Scene Headings in which case selecting it will turn on off the Multi Locking of Scenes 2 Pages 197 This option will be grayed out unless the script already has Locked Pages in which case selecting it will turn on off the Multi Locking of Pages NOTE Multi Locking is Movie Magic Screenwriter variable second locking level used to preserve A Scene and A Page Numbering when new scene headings or pages are inserted before or between existing A Scenes or A Pages respectively See the online help under Multi Locking for more details Multi Lock Scenes To use Multi Lock Scenes you need to click on its tab Multilock After A 5cene fn 2C Ee Multilock After Normal Scene 3 2 A GEI OE Multi Lk 1 A1 This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Scene Headings and fall between two existing A Scenes Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Number For example a scene inser
15. 3 Click OK to save your changes Cancel to discard them See Element Styles 74 in the Customizing Screenwriter chapter for more details Switch Elements To convert one element to another for example Action to Note 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the Element to be changed Or select a portion of the element to change 2 Click on the Current Element Window on the Top Toolbar to display the Pull Down List of elements Or under the Format menu select Change Element Type then 52 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 19 3 Select the element type to switch to by clicking on it Moving between Elements With QuickType enabled pressing Tab or Return in one element either moves you to a new default element or displays a List menu of available options If you Type QuickType will FADE IN Display Scene Heading Initial Text or any Transition menu INT EXT etc If you Press RETURN while QuickType will in Display Scene Heading Initial Text iti menu INT EXT etc blank Scene Heading Scene Info or End of Act Scene Heading Display a List Menu of all unique without Location Locations already in the script Scene Heading Display a List Menu of Time of Day with Location DAY NIGHT etc End of Action Add another Action Element Character Name Add a Dialogue Element If the next element is Dialogue or Parenthetical it moves to the beginning of that element
16. Acts Like Save Acts Like Save As This option controls what happens when the diskette button on the tool bar is pressed e Acts Like Save This saves the file as if you had chosen File Save e Acts Like Save As This brings up the Save As window and lets you save the file under a different name or location 162 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 7 4 After a Search After a Search LOREM MENO EOMEOMDRU ROO R EDOMDGNORDNOMEOKODR EEEIEE EENEI KOG UGOROR GEGEN EK U UCRORGE NOR RORORK EGO RORGE CHOR ORG ORORGEOROROROROROROROA fa Bring Document to the Front Leave Collapsed Search Window in Front After a Search e Bring Document to the Front This option brings the document to the front and sends the search window to the back e Leave Collapsed Search Window in Front This option leaves the focus in the search window but collapses it into a smaller and less obtrusive version Replace Replace amp Find f Replace All 1 13 7 5 Pagination 1 13 8 fe Paginate When l m Idle For 1 0 B seconds Pagination Sound None ES No Real time Pagination e Paginate When I m Idle For seconds Lets you specify how long Screenwriter should wait when there s a pause in your typing before automatically repaginating your script If your writing is interrupted by the automatic repaginating increase the pagination delay e No Real time Pagination This option turns off real time pa
17. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 67 1 9 2 CTRL LEFT ARROW ses Previous Word ee Beginning of current line ST E End of current line UP ARROW eerie steve permettent e hebt Previous Line DOWN ARROW ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Next Line ONO ME Previous Screen POD tege Next Screen Asterisked items are the default keystrokes They can be changed under the Screenwriter menu by selecting Preferences then the Keyboard button Selecting Text Screenwriter uses the standard Mac OS X methods of text selection Menu Selection Places the cursor on the word to be selected Under the Edit menu choose from Select All Selects the entire script Select Special Displays options for selecting by e Word Selects the word the cursor s on e Sentence Selects the entire sentence the cursor s in e Element Selects the entire element the cursor s in e Group Selects a group of adjacent elements including the one the cursor s in for example Character Name plus Parenthetical plus Dialogue e Page Selects the entire page the cursor s on e Scene Selects the entire scene the cursor s in e Scene Range Displays a list of your script s Scene Headings Click on or drag the cursor over the ones you want to select and click on OK e Extend Selection Displays an Extend Block menu with options for extending your selection backwards or forwards in the script from the C
18. o Select the outline item to be moved o Click and drag your cursor UP or DOWN the list In this example the script Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 109 note is moved from Scene 6 to just before scene 8 o Release the mouse button to drop the outline element at the position indicated by the bold line The item is always moved in the document to the point immediately before the outline element below the bold line NOTE The Outline Styles options have several options that control how you can move outline elements 1 10 11 1 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Reassign Outline Element Styles in the Document The NaviDoc Outline Panel scene list may be used to promote and demote outline elements in the list via Drag and Drop When you reassign an outline element s style via drag and drop in the NaviDoc Outline Panel outline list the style of the corresponding material is reassigned in the document The following example promotes a Note outline element to a Sequence o Select the outline item to be promoted or demoted o Click and drag your cursor LEFT promote or RIGHT demote in the list In 110 Movie Magic Screenwriter this example the Note is promoted four levels to Sequence The small tic marks indicating the number of style promotions o Release the mouse button to drop the outline element at the position indicated by the flyover text The item in the document is autom
19. peni Automatically check for updates Monthly 2 Display Open File Dialog ZS Retrieve Last Document you worked on gU Restore Last Workspace 152 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 4 2 1 13 4 3 Screenwriter can be preset to automatically do one of five things each time it starts up by clicking on one of the following radio buttons e Leave You in a Blank Script Opens a new file with the default Screenplay format e Display the Open File Dialog Displays a standard Open File dialog set to your default scripts subdirectory e Retrieve Last Document you worked on Opens in the last script you saved in your previous Screenwriter session e Restore Last Workspace Opens all scripts you had open at the time you Exited your previous Screenwriter session e Automatically check for updates When checked Screenwriter automatically checks for updates daily weekly or monthly Default Document Folder Default Document Folder Users Chris Documents Movie Magic Screenwriter Beta DNO ET A d I i i d i Set d This option allows you to change the folder that Screenwriter uses as the default for opening saving documents default folder is My Documents Screenwriter Documents When you click on the Set button you ll get a standard OS X navigation dialog e Change the default folder to a different pre existing directory by clicking on items in the directory tree e Create a
20. 278 Movie Magic Screenwriter Previous NaviDoc Row Option CMD Up Arrow Ctrl Up Arrow Next NaviDoc Row piona ewe P ONN Ctrl Down Arrow rrow Increase NaviDoc Font Size oc Ctrl Decrease NaviDoc Font Size i Ctrl Remove Revision Mark Shift Ctrl M New From Template MERERI ShifttCmd N Normal Style Cmd Uppercase Ctrl U Lowercase Shift Ctri U Online Reference Cmd Cmd Page Setup Shift Cmd P Print Preview Option Cmd P select Sentence Cmd Shift A Select Group Cmd OpttA Select Scene Ctrl Shift A Last Position Cmd Y Pop Up Element Type List Cmd L or F4 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 279 Add Forced MW Break Shift Return Ctrl Return Add Hard Return Hard Return OpteRetum Return ShifttRetum ShifttRetum rn 200 Movie Magic Screenwriter Index 52 mmsw 275 SCW 219 220 275 TPG 30 1 1Page 119 2 2Pgs 119 A Abobe Acrobat 120 About 247 Accent Aigue 74 Accent Grave 74 Accented Characters 74 ACT 48 62 Act Breaks 180 Act Info 117 Act Information 40 118 Act Scene Info 59 60 62 232 Action 35 40 43 52 53 179 Action Indentation 1 79 Action is in Parentheticals 258 Add 34 AddaNote 49 Add an Index Card 34 Add as Text 44 Add Bookmark 92 Add Category 8 7 Add Dialogue Paragraph 221 Add Forced Page Break 54 221 Add Hard Return 55 221 Add Note Element 86
21. Displays Synonyms for the word that the cursor is currently in e Count Words Counts the number of words in the script e Name Bank s Displays the Name Bank screen where you can select names for your characters Alphabetically displays lists of Female and Male first names and Family surnames e Spell Check Word Checks the spelling of the Word that the cursor is currently in e Spell Check Selection Checks the spelling of the highlighted test selection e Spell Check Element Checks the spelling of the Element that the cursor is currently in e Spell Check Page Checks the spelling of the current Page e Spell Check Forward Checks the spelling from the cursor position to the end of the document e Spell Check Entire Document Checks the spelling of all text in the document e Correct Current Word Checks the spelling of the Word that the cursor is currently in and gives you options to handle it without bringing up the Spell Check window including suggestions Add to Dictionary Ignore for This Session well wel we H welle welled weal e Pause AutoCorrection Pauses the real time Spell Checking or AutoCorrection features if they re on When paused there ll be a check mark next to this menu item e Clear Ignore List Clears from memory all the words that you ve told Spell Check to Ignore this writing session e Change Dictionary Displays a menu where you can select a different user di
22. J IH the element in the document i A COLORS Text and fill color of ERTS TS mi i element in document and NaviDoc ma B Save as Default for Outline view zez all new scripts Act Breaks Scene Labels P j i le lia ah edhe a HE Ci avo Fa See eet Pe QUSE EIOS M nice a nre ud Use Current Font for All Elements KE Revert C Cancel j Ee Located in the Format Element Styles window the Outline Styles format options Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 105 allow you to define add and remove outline styles There are also controls for outline style names levels style type and color These Outline Styles format options are divided into two sections e he controls in the upper half of the Outline Styles format options control the appearance of items in the Outline Panel and or the document This includes margins line spacing and character formatting For Document Styles these controls only adjust the appearance of the items in the NaviDoc For Outline Styles these controls adjust the appearance of the items in the NaviDoc and the document e he controls in the lower half of the Outline Element Styles format options control the creation deletion and formatting of the outline styles as they appear in the NaviDoc 1 10 11 1 NaviDoc Outline Styles Format Options The controls in the lower half of the Outline Styles format options control the creation deletion and f
23. Or combine the two methods 1 3 32 45 78 89 end e Selected Scenes If selected prints the Scenes you select Enter the scene numbers in the same order they appear in the document i e lower numbers first Enter individual scene numbers separated by commas 1 3 32 Enter a section of consecutive scenes using a dash between the first and last scene 45 78 or 89 end Or combine the two methods 1 3 32 45 78 89 end List Click on this button to see a List Menu of all the scenes in your document with their Scene Headings Select a scene by clicking on it De select a scene by clicking on it again OK Click OK when done to confirm your selections e Dialogue JH selected displays a Dialogue Selection menu Check a radio button to select the kind of Dialogue to print and select one or more Character Names Dialogue With Reference Page Numbers and Statistics lf checked prints a dialogue report with page number references and statistics about the number of speeches words sentences and sentence length for each character NOTE If you select all characters a screen displays asking if you d like to print characters dialog in Script order rather than printing all of one character s dialogue at a time If you click on Yes your Dialogue report will not contain any statistics If you click on No statistics will appear in your printed report Dialogue With Cues for Actors lf checked prints all the dialogue for selected ch
24. Q I was trying to put some text in my dialogue in parentheses but as soon as I typed the left parenthesis I was in Parenthetical element is there a way around that A Instead of pressing just the left parenthesis type Ctrl Shift Q Is there an easy way to move an element down the blank page A Press F3 and specify the number of lines that you want to skip in Cheat Element menu Q My character reads poetry in her speech how do I go to the next line of the dialogue when I need to A Press Alt Enter or select Add Hard Return from Edit menu when you need to go to the next line Q accidentally made a mistake in my registration information during installation how do I change that A In Notepad or WordPad Win95 open the SCWRITER INI file located in the Windows subdirectory and edit the Registration section accordingly Production Problems and Solutions Screenwriter s Online Help is available to help with common problems encountered in the Production process Under the Production menu select Production Solutions then one of the following options Merge Text into Document General Techniques Scene Headings Page Breaks Headers Manual Overrides Temporarily Disable e General Techniques Walks you through the entire Production cycle helping you to avoid problems by demonstrating the proper procedure Scene Headings Lists common problems encountered with Scene Numbers and Scene Headings in a pro
25. Sex Male Play Sample Characters ANNIE Agnes m Voice File ANOTHER MAN Ralph e ui BERT ae Wondertul 6 mmsw BOUNCER Bad News Load Voice Assigment File CAROL ANNE Hysterical CARTER unassigned Save Voice Assignment File CHARLIE Whisper E S MSN AISCH Character Name Options This area allows you some choices on the way Character Names are read in the document e Do not read If selected the Character Names are not read e Read in Character Voice lf selected Character Names are read in their assigned voices e Read in Action Voice lf selected Character Names are read in the voice assigned to the Action element Parenthetical Options This area allows you some choices on the way Parentheticals are read in the document e Do not read If selected the Parentheticals are not read Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 135 e Read in Character Voice lf selected Parentheticals are read in their assigned Character Name voices e Read in Action Voice lf selected Parentheticals are read in the voice assigned to the Action element Load Voice Association File If you have assigned voices to a previous document and saved them you can load the voice association file vaf and use it on your current document Save Voice Association File This option allows you to save your current voice allocation settings Clicking this button saves your voice settings to a voi
26. eeeeeeeiieeniieeniiee nenne EEN EEN nnn nh nnn nnns anna nnns annosa nna nnn 113 PAGS SGU eee 113 Mell mE e S 114 Header and Foote NE TETTE OD EUN 116 Header and Footer E CRM eer i ee Serre te eee eee ere eee ern tent ae a eee re eee ere ree 117 POUN RE 118 Ge Di ele e EE 118 Putin Scene LaDel EE 118 PE RESET O EEA E m Tm 119 Align Headers F ootel EN 119 Blank Lines OMIM TAS AS E 119 mil A Tr 119 Printing the DOCUMEN E 120 Production Breakdowns Print WInOdOW ee Eege 123 Production Breakdowns Print Optons eeeecssesssssseseseeeee eene nennen nnne nnnnnn nn nnne nn nana sn sina sa ss nasa sanas sns 124 Secondary Sort by EXIT E 125 Secondary Sort by Production Breakdown Print Opottons nne 126 Miscellaneous Production Breakdown Print Options enne enne 127 12 Other Screenwriter MT 127 ld E rt 128 Connecting tO Tied NO TEE 128 TRS Ot gre bier RR UU 129 meine NAVAS VIS MP NENNEN m I 131 ez mLEIelieRezo iC T EE 131 Editing Keys I H arnie E 132 Revoking Slave s editing PrivileQes cccccccccccssseccccsssecccsessecccseusececseaseeeseeuseeeseusscesseasecessegsecessacsesessaseeeessanees 132 GG Me ae Bet MT a 133 Using the Voice feature to talk to your partner 133 iPartner Trouble Shooting
27. iT These controls determine the font size and lines of visible text for the scenes in the scene list of the Scenes Panel e Font Size Control right vertical slider This control sets the font size for the text in the scene list The default position is the middle of the slider and corresponds to the font size set in the Scenes Panel option Sliding up reduces the font size to a minimum of 10 points smaller than the default font size Sliding down increases the font size to a maximum of 10 points greater than the default font size The keyboard commands for decreasing and increasing the NaviDoc font size are CTRL and CTRL Ah deu e Viewable Scene Lines Control left vertical slider This control sets the number of viewable lines of each scene in the scene list The default position of the slider is all the way up and corresponds to one line viewable the 98 Movie Magic Screenwriter minimum number of lines allowed Moving the slider down increases the number of viewable lines Moving the slide all the way down makes the display equal to the entire scene for each scene 1 10 11 Outline Panel The NaviDoc Outline Panel is new to Screenwriter The Outline Panel is used to add remove modify and navigate to outline elements in your document The Outline Panel can be displayed by clicking on the Outline tab in the NaviDoc The keyboard command for showing the Outline Panel in the NaviDoc is CTRL
28. 1 10 11 20 1 Outline Tools in the Document View uu i n E Scene Heading The Outline Tools in the top toolbar control adding removing reassigning promoting and demoting outline items in the document 1 10 11 20 2 Adding and Removing Outline Elements in the Document Se Add Outline Element e Press the Add Outline Element button to insert an outline element item into the document You can also add outline elements through the NaviDoc menu the Insert Element button on the top toolbar or the Outline Element button on the right toolbar e Press the Delete button to remove selected outline elements from the document Pressing this icon deletes the entire outline element NOTE Placing the text edit cursor within an outline item in the document is sufficient use the Delete button You can also delete outline elements by selecting their contents and hitting Backspace or Delete on the keyboard 1 10 11 20 3 Reassigning Outline Elements in the Document Scene Heading L i r Act Ereak Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Y Scene Heading Scene Label Script Note Shot Title Centered Transition Sequence Scene Beat Create Edit Outline Styles This control sets the outline style of the selected paragraphs in the document view It is an easy way to reassign an outline style The current style is identified by a check mark To modify styles click the Styles button Movie Magic Screenwri
29. 1 8 1 7 Click on Replace to save the format settings for Stage Play mmsw as Stage Play in effect restoring it because the Stage Play mmsw was formatted as Stage Play format This method will not correctly restore the format if you have modified the settings and format of Stage Play mmsw In that case use the re install method above Writing the Script Each part of a script is formatted uniquely with different margins capitalization and spacing Screenwriter uses these elements e Act Information e Action e Character Name e Dialogue e Parenthetical e Scene Heading e Scene Information e Script Note e Shot e Title Centered s e Transition Creating Elements You can create Elements in a number of ways e Click on an element in the pull down Current Element window e Click on the element s icon on the Right Toolbar if displayed e Press a Command key shortcut for that element See the Appendix chapter entitled Key Assignments for details e Type an element s text and it is automatically formatted in certain elements Type int or ext in a new Scene Heading or blank Action element Type fade in or press RETURN at the start of a new script Type in Transition text ending it with to e Select the File gt Insert Element command Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 41 1 8 2 1 8 3 Tab amp Return You can easily go from element to element in Screenwriter by pres
30. 57 ChE al PAGS EE 58 CSG E 58 Cheal INE Whole SCHR TEEN 58 Cheat tne Page S E 59 User BC CN 59 PACU SCT qme I M 60 CNR SCE NSIS c cT 61 LO ACING ISS LIS RM T 61 Loading Locations Character Names or Transitions from Screenwriter ENEE eege 61 Saving Lists as the Default Lists for all New Gcnpts ENEE 62 Bis UNE cic E 62 Reading Default User RE 64 Alas TET e Q 64 Crean ABS RE 64 Capitalization O Alas TEE denges 65 7 TEx EO Le RETE 66 MOVING TNE CUFSOT Acc 66 elle RE i c 67 ACjusting the Block SGIOCUOIN WE 68 De SGIECHING TOKE E 68 Moving Rp SE 68 Cutting and Pasting with the MOUSE 5 in rehus io ioa a Coro EE 69 Copying and Pasting with the MOWUSe iier oed peine ato pha cita oae Ebo prava vd gu ea ra ebe EE v eoo adadad aia 69 Cutting Copying Pasting with the Keyboard 1lllseseeeeeeeieeeseee eese e nenne nennen nnn enhn nnne sn nnn nnn nnn sene nns 69 Dragging ANG Dropping MEER C 69 sra c E a 70 le TE ele dg m 70 Undo ec 70
31. Advanced Movie Magic Screenwriter Features Customizing Screenwriter 139 Outlining in Screenwriter og Using User Lists 5 Setting Script Options 173 Exporting the Script 262 Movie Magic Screenwriter in Production ze Movie Magic Screenwriter in Animation Production 2141 Appendix 218 Copyright amp Trademark Notice The software described in this book is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such license Disclaimer Write Brothers Incorporated Ken Schafer and ScriptPerfection Enterprises make no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Movie Magic Screenwriter for Mac OS X is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied Write Brothers Incorporated Ken Schafer and ScriptPerfection Enterprises shall have no liability or responsibility to you or any other person or entity with respect to any loss or damage caused by Movie Magic Screenwriter for Mac OS X including but not limited to any loss of profits interruption of service loss of business or consequential damages resulting from the use of such programs Copyright Notice Manual written by Kevin Hindley with contributions by Chris Huntley Stephen Greenfield Ken Haberman Kynan Jones and Richard McClelland Copyright Write Brothers Inc 1
32. Directory 152 Display onscreen 146 Display Eighth Totals 126 208 Display Notes in Script 51 182 Display Open File Menu 23 Display Options 20 72 225 Display Screen Sized Retrieve List 23 151 DISSOLVE TO 62 Document Analysis 235 Document Icon 2 70 Document Layout 114 Document Layout 229 Document Outline Styles 108 Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification 258 Double Capitals 157 Double Sided 120 Double Click 67 DOWN ARROW 66 Draft Color 59 Draft Version 241 Drag and Drop 68 69 109 Drag n Drop 69 Dramatica 61 Draw Boxes 37 Dual Column Margins 56 Dual Columns 55 229 Dual Column 55 Dual Column Dialogue 55 E Edit 54 Edit an Index Card 36 Edit Breakdown Sheets 240 Edit Categories 211 240 Edit Menu 19 24 69 221 Edit User Dictionary 235 Edit User Lists 61 Edit Word 78 Editing 66 Editing Screen 14 19 Editing User Lists 61 Electronic Index Cards 32 33 Element 5 7 59 66 67 75 Element Buttons 20 Element Styles 173 174 Element Styles 229 Element Type 51 Elements Numbering 240 Elements 40 69 Enable Alt Keys 146 END 66 END OF ACT 48 52 62 284 Movie Magic Screenwriter End of Act Text 59 62 End of Action 52 End of current line 66 END OF SHOW 62 ENTER 41 ENTER Key 146 Entire Scenes 120 Entire Script 75 120 Episode 241 European Format 118 EVENING 62 Every Page 119 Every Page Except first Page of Sce
33. Lets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc More Cont d L ets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text to use at the end of a page s broken Dialogue when it s split by a Page Break For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc More Text L ets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text to use at the beginning of the next page s continued Dialogue when it s split by a Page Break For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc Dialogue Put Dialogue on Same Line as Character Name Cont d Dialogue shouldn t have Character Names Cont d Dialogue Shouldn t have Character Select this option to have Movie Magic Screenwriter hide all Character Names to which it applies automatic Cont ds If you have this option selected then these Continued Names will appear in the script in a GRAY color to identify that they will not print and they will be ignored by the pagination routines NOTE The ONLY format in which this is used in the professional world is in play writing and we HIGHLY recommend that you do not use this setting in a screenplay or teleplay Put Dialogue on the same line as Character Names Select this option to have Movie Magic Screenwriter put dialogue on the same line as the Character Names i e Radio Script Style so that it will look like the following MARK True but despite the fact that you
34. Movie Magic Screenwriter Movie Magic Screenwriter Table of Contents Foreword 0 Part Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 12 MN OI E 12 2 Copyright amp Trademark Notice 111leeeeeeieeeeee e iieeeen nennen nnn n nnn nnn nh nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nn 13 3 Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 leeeeeeeeeeeeee e eeeee nnne nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn 14 EA OI C H BPN 14 TO Minute Tutorial eee 14 9 Eescher 14 SUN GE 15 Selecting Screenwriter Commands c c scceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeneeeseasaeeeseasaeessaasaeeeeaeseeeeeeaseesenenseeseneneesseneseessanseees 15 uH WEE 15 ETC 16 Peor c 16 B DM 17 Solen Ean E 0 MT P ee 17 PUSA CONS EE 18 CNECKDOXES a 18 FRAC RE d t 18 Text dilDaiueadidi lq 18 sed ET eee nw 19 hilz Ted sip e e eR c 19 TOD TOODA e eee ert ee eee ee 20 KOR Ke e e EE 20 Boo Ss E 20 ER aee E T T Trece 2
35. Removes blue highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e Green Style Removes green highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e User Defined Removes User Defined highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e Remove Scene w o OMITTED Removes the Scene Heading that the cursor is in without creating an OMITTED Scene Heading to indicate something was deleted May cause Scene Headings after the one removed to be renumbered 1 15 1 10 4 Override Provides specialized control over instances of production features in the document Page s Header or Color Page Break Type Element s Numbering e Page s Header Draft Color Allows you to override the header of the page the cursor s on Displays the Header Setup screen for editing of the header text Only available in a Locked Script e Page Break Type Allows you to override the type of page break directly before the cursor converting it to your preference Only available in a Locked Script e Element s Numbering Allows you to override the numbering of the Scene Header that the cursor s currently in renumbering it to your preference Only available in a Locked Script 1 15 1 10 5 Breakdown Shows options for tagging breakdown items to be printed on Breakdown Sheets or exported to Movie Magic Scheduling Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 241 Tagging Mode Edit Categories Tag Item Globally U
36. e Document Layout Displays a window where you can change the top bottom and binding page margins Also gives you the option to cheat the line spacing for the entire script 230 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Header and Footer Displays a menu where you can define the header and footer format and content for the currently displayed script e Font Color Shows options for changing the color of selected text If no text is selected the text from the cursor position to the end of the element is changed Blue Red Green User Defined v Black e Font Style Shows options for changing the style of selected text If no text is selected the text from the cursor position to the end of the element is changed v Normal Bold Italic Underline Strikeout e Change Case Shows options for changing the case of selected text If no text is selected the entire element except when in Scene Heading Character Name or Transition that the cursor is in is changed Upper Case U Lower Case SAF Initial Capitals Capitalize Word W Cap amp Bald Word Lower Case Word W e Change Element Type Shows options for changing the current element from Action to Shot for example e Mark One Character s Dialogue Displays a list of your script s Character Names for your selection A selected Character s dialogue appears in red in your script and in color printing and with a gray background in
37. 1 13 12 NaviDoc Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt NaviDoc aa Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline ral Sync Naviboc Row with Document v Point to Paragraph when Navigating fei Frame current row with this color ERES CT Flash pointer 2 times Quickly Use System Selection color for frame Disappear after flashing Medium fade Row Height fe Variable less wasted space Fixed faster resizing on slow computers Scenes Panel Font Lucida Grande ES Size aa a Text EN Fill L Row Lines Gray i EN a rd Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel Odd Row Text OoOo Odd Row Fill ES Even Row Text EN Even Row Fill f Notes Fanel Font Font Lucida Grande ES s Size 12 L Row Lines Thick Solid He HM Bookmarks Panel Font Font Lucida Grande e Size 12 Lei Text MAME Fil Row Lines Thin Solid F 1 Cancel Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 173 1 13 13 Outline Preferences Screenwriter Preferences Outline Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline Docum ent and Outline Elements Expand Collapse together aJ Clicking in an Outline Element in document bel reveals that element in the Outline Panel 7 Expand Collapse independently f Use this font f
38. 1 13 8 2 Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Mark If checked puts the default asterisk as the Header Revision Mark even when you ve changed the Current Revision Mark to be some other symbol Unchecked the Header gets the same Revision Mark as the rest of your script 1 13 8 3 Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to the right of it If checked puts the Header Revision Mark on its own separate line below the Header Unchecked puts the Header Revision Mark on the Header line at the right 1 13 8 4 Don t print Revision Marks on each line If checked and there are enough Revision Marks on the page to warrant Screenwriter putting a Revision Mark on the Header as determined by your setting in After Revision Marks above Current Revision Marks won t print on revised lines The Header Revision Mark prints instead indicating a revised page This avoids having a cluttered look to the 164 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 8 5 1 13 8 6 1 13 8 7 1 13 8 8 page Unchecked Current Revision Marks prints on the Header and on each revised line Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on them If checked puts an asterisk on the Header of added A pages to indicate that they re new and are considered revisions Unchecked new A pages are identifiable by their page numbering scheme only Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED p
39. 1 7 4 7 Mode F1 Outline fe Shuffle 1 Select Shuffle Mode if it s not already selected 2 Click on the card you want to move 3 Go to the Index Card you want to move your card in front of using the Scroll buttons if necessary Click on that card and your shuffled Index Card is inserted in front of it All other cards shuffle accordingly The Scenes in the script are not renumbered until you exit Index Card View by pressing the Done button Done Cancel Print To go back to your script without moving any Index Cards or scenes in your script click on the Cancel button Shuffle Multiple Index Cards Mode E Outline fe Shuffle 1 Select Shuffle Mode if it s not already selected 2 To shuffle more than one Index Card make sure the first card is displayed onscreen 3 Hold down the SHIFT key Using the mouse click anywhere on the Index Card you want to move The card turns a darker gray and the cursor changes to the Shuffle Cursor a hand holding a card 4 Still holding down the SHIFT key click on the other cards you want to shuffle If you inadvertently select a card that you didn t want to click on it again while still holding down the SHIFT key and it becomes unselected 5 Go to the Index Card you want to move your cards in front of using the Scroll buttons if necessary Click on that card and your shuffled Index Cards is inserted in front of it A
40. 74 CTRL 1 55 82 98 CTRL 2 55 93 CTRL 3 85 CTRLt 4 91 CTRL ALT 54 CTRL ALT DOWN ARROW 66 CTRL ALT END 66 CTRL ALT HOME 66 CTRL ALT UP ARROW 66 CTRL B 72 CTRL BACKSPACE 70 CTRL C 69 CtrltDash 54 CTRL DELETE 70 CTRL END 70 CTRL ENTER 52 CTRL F1 49 52 CTRL F12 74 CTRL F6 22 CTRL G 66 CTRL INS 69 CTRL LEFT ARROW 66 CTRL N 73 CTRL O 52 CTRL PgDn 66 CTRL PgUp 66 CTRL RIGHT ARROW 66 CTRL S 52 CTRL SHIFT 54 Ctrlt ShifttDash 54 CTRL T 52 CTRL TAB 22 CTRL U 72 CTRL V 69 CTRL X 69 CTRLt Y 72 CTRL ZERO 80 Current Page 120 Current Revision Marks 214 239 Index 283 Cut 69 221 Cut and Paste 68 Cut and Paste Import 259 Cut Element 221 270 CUT TO 62 Cutto 24 221 Cuts selected text 248 D Date 117 118 241 DAY 43 62 Day Month Year 118 Day Month Year 118 Decrease NaviDoc Font 2 0 Decrease NaviDoc Font Size 233 Decreases Right Margin 249 Default Lists 62 Default Note Category 87 default def 229 Defaults For all New Scripts 62 defaut def 229 Delete 70 112 155 Delete Category 87 Delete Left 70 Delete Left Word 70 Delete Note 86 Delete Outline Style 106 Delete Right 70 Delete Style 105 Delete to End of Line 70 Delete Word 70 78 Demote Outline Element 233 270 Demoting 113 De Selecting Text 68 Dialog 53 Dialogue 35 40 45 46 52 120 177 184 Dialogue Numbering 215 Dialogue With Cues for Actors 120 Dictionaries 75 Direct Import 258 Director 241
41. B b Bold start and end respectively e I i ltalics start and end e U u Underline start and end e S s Strikeout start and end e L l B Blue text start and end e R r Red text start and end e G g Green text start and end e U1 thru U7 u1 thru u7 User Defined color text start and end e S section symbol Hard Return e pipe symbol Hard Dash e tilde Soft Dash this symbol is also inserted before a word in a document if you have told the program to ignore the word for auto correction Zoom Screen Text View Zoom Screen Text Displays the Zoom Screen dialog window allowing you to alter how large the document text displays onscreen 142 Movie Magic Screenwriter Zoom Screen Text Normal View INT COMPUTER DAY Where you re fiddling with the screen di rather than doing any real writing C3 Fit Width Automatically adjusts text size to fit the document in the window staying within the specified minimum and maximum magnification percentages E DH r C ir Minimum Maximum te Fixed Text Size Use the slider to specify a fixed magnification factor for screen text M Preview Cancel 1 13 1 3 1 Fit Width This option makes Screenwriter automatically adjust the text size in the document portion of the window as you grow or shrink the document view horizontally including openi
42. B C 118 Line Spacing 175 Line Spacing Format 108 List 120 List Characters in Each Scene 127 208 243 List Menu 16 17 List Non Speaking Characters 127 Listening 133 Lists 61 Load Script Format 31 Load Styles From 229 Load User Lists from 64 229 Loading Element Styles 24 Loading User Lists 62 Location 42 52 59 124 126 205 Locations 61 62 Locations after INT EXT selection 147 Locations List 120 Lock Current Rev Marks 246 Lock Dialogue Numbering 217 246 Lock The Script 187 237 Locked 200 Locked Headers 59 Locked Letter Skip List 198 Locked Page Break 239 Locked Page Breaks 194 Locked Pages 59 Locked Revision Mark 264 Locked Scene Headings 193 Locked Scripts 185 199 Locked Scripts Options 192 Locking Current Revision Marks 214 Locking Level 214 Lowercase 73 74 Lowercase Word 73 Main Menu Bar 14 15 16 19 Make Default for All New Documents 229 Male Names 138 Manual Overrides 256 Margins 175 Margins Format 108 Mark Element 164 Mark One Character s Dialogue 229 Marks 239 Max Length 76 Menu 69 Menu Changes 270 Menu Selection 6 7 Menus 14 218 Merging Documents 14 25 Microsoft Windows 15 Minimize All 247 Miscellaneous Options 139 Miscellaneous Short Cut Keys 253 MMSW 137 Index 287 MOMENTS LATER 62 Month Day Year 118 Month Day Year 118 More 185 More Cont d 176 More Text 176 MORNING 62 Mouse Blocking 67 Mouse Options 139 Mouse Sel
43. BLUE PINK Asterisked Pages lf checked prints only those pages which have Current Revision Marks on them and any A Pages immediately following them NOTE If you re working in a Locked script with Draft Revision Colors this displays a list Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 123 1 11 5 of Revision Colors as in the pictured example e Print in Reverse Order Prints your selection in reverse order starting with the highest numbered pages scenes e Run SmartCheck before this Print Job If checked SmartCheck checks your document for common formatting errors before printing If you ve set SmartCheck to always run before printing in Options under the Tools menu it is checked here Turn it off for this print job only by unchecking the box e Print Title Page lf checked prints the title page at the head of the script Only available if you ve created a Title Page in the Title Page Publisher Selecting an Entire Script to print automatically checks this box and prints the Title Page e Preview Click this button to see a Print Preview of the current selection in WYSIWYG format Click on the appropriate button for Print Sends the onscreen page to the printer formatted exactly as it looks but at 100 size Prev Goes to the previous page in the document Next Goes to the next page in the document Close Exits the Print Preview screen back to the Print Selection menu Zoom In Displ
44. Import Text as Action Only Y Text Only Non RTF Use Stylesheets Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Use when line spacing in the source text is inconsistant though it can cause shots to be imported as Character Don t use Capitalization Information for Element Identification Use when Character Names may be lower case in the source text Ignore Margins for Element Identification Action is in Parentheticals TY D import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Use ONLY when the script is already in Production and the page breaks have ta match e To import a script file Import in Script Format should be checked e To import an outline or some other non script text check Import Text as Action Only Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 259 e Text Only Non RTF Checking this CheckBox if available imports the file slightly faster and may improve the accuracy of the import It also loses any bold italic or underline formatting If you re importing a file with Embedded Style Sheets in Rich Text Format such as a Final Draft script a Use Style Sheets checkbox displays on the menu Check it for better interpretation of paragraph elements If Screenwriter has difficulty interpreting any style sheet it prompts you to identify it Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Causes Screenwriter to normalize inconsistent line spacing and margins In most cases this produces
45. Livestock Makeup Hair Mechanical FX Hide ShowSelected Category i Set to Movie Magic Scheduling Defaults Cancel E The Edit Tagging Categories window displays The categories displayed are the defaults for exporting to Scheduling Three User Definable categories are available for your new categories or you can edit an existing category Cast Members and Scene Description cannot be edited Grayed out categories are Hidden and do not display on the pop up Tagging menu To Hide or Show a category select it by clicking on it and click on the Hide Show Selected Category button Double click on a Category to select it for editing An Edit screen displays In the Category Name field type the new Category name Type an ampersand amp before the letter you d like to appear underlined and selectable as the one key QuickLetter on menus In the Display Code as field type in a unique abbreviation up to 6 letters that displays as the category s Format Code in Tagging Mode Click on Replace OK on Mac to accept your new category Cancel to discard the changes If you make changes and later want to return to the original defaults click on the Reset to Defaultss button 212 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 8 1 14 8 1 Click on OK to accept your changes or Cancel to discard them Breakdown Sheets The Breakdown Sheet is the report showing all your tagged items in their resp
46. Once you ve locked your script and added omitted scenes you may want to keep the new A Scene Numbering and give any new scenes a new unique number Checking this option enables you to do so Any new scene added between existing A Scenes will have a number added after it For example a scene added between scenes 13A and 13B would be numbered 13A1 the next one 13A2 etc 194 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 4 2 If you add a new scene between an existing A Scene and a Normal Scene it is entered as a normal A Scene For example a scene added between 25B and 26 would become 25C If a new scene is added between a Normal Scene and an A Scene it is entered using the Multi Lock Character For example a scene added between scenes 103 and 103A would become A103 using the default Multi Lock Character Also see A Scene Numbering Scheme 195 NOTE An individual Locked Scene Heading can be moved in the script without changing the numbering by Dragging and Dropping it Be careful to drag and drop only the Scene Heading The text of the scene associated with the moved Scene Heading does not move with it Locked Page Breaks To use Page Break Locking you need to click on its tab fe Unlocked Locked Multilocked Unlocked Normal Adding or deleting enough text to create a new Page Break causes pages to renumber automatically Locked Adding or deleting enough text to create a new Page Break makes the exi
47. Put the cursor anywhere on the Page to be cheated 2 Under the Format menu select Cheat then Page 3 Increase or Decrease the page length by the number of lines desired from 1 to 10 Cheat the Whole Script 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the Script to be cheated 2 Under the Format menu select Cheat then Script 3 You re prompted to remove all previous Line Spacing Cheating Click Yes to remove the existing cheating and start cheating afresh Click No to leave the existing cheating intact and add any new cheating to it 4 The Setup Page Layout menu displays Change the Page settings for this script as desired Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 59 1 8 27 5 Cheat the Page s Header 1 8 28 This option is only available in a script with Locked Pages and Locked Headers 1 Put the cursor anywhere on the Page to be cheated 2 Under the Production menu select Override then Page s Header Draft Color 3 The Header Setup screen displays Change the Header settings for that page 4 Click Preview to view the changes OK to save the changes or Cancel to discard the changes User Lists While you write Screenwriter can recognize certain text you ve typed as matching an item in one of its User Lists and format it as the appropriate element automatically To use User Lists the QuickType feature and the individual Pop Up lists must be enabled See QuickType in the Customizing Screenwriter section for more inform
48. Redo c F X 71 inserti Typeover d TE 71 POPIMIACHING RL A 72 seias oc 72 Unaerining To EE 72 TRANG TZUN E EE 72 SPIKO OUT 72 Removing TSXt FORMAN DEE 73 Appiying Multiple Tex eu EE 73 i is Le be 73 Quick Format Of Previous VV ON ors vxcccrscacscorss vcsustasinacerss NEAT Anr ERNA Ea AES OR AER A ENE E NATADO 74 Typng Foredi Kee TT 74 SDEIPCHECK EE 75 EE TMS ee EE 75 AUO CONGO TYPOS P 76 ee e 78 Thesaurus 78 10 The NAVID OG rr P 79 Opening and Closing the NavIDOO uncut oteu tus oem unva tauu5 Eu acduw a UE cU cao Rp cuu iE DD dup UTER V AU UNS NR RR CQEEEK 80 Resizing the NaviDOC Panel ee 81 Contents 5 Navigation Pointer and the NaviDoc Panel 5 7 52 5 010022 ZENS deeg 81 NaviDoc e E Bee ln ET TE 81 THE NaViDOG MENU me 82 NaVIDOC ODM ONS 83 General NaViDOC ODUOHRNS a
49. Spaces to indent Outline Levels Option 101 Speak Silently 134 Speak Text 134 235 Speaking 133 Speaking Characters First Speed Buttons 20 Spell Check 75 Spell Check as you Type amp Edit 64 Spell Check Element 235 Spell Check Entire Script 235 Spell Check Forward 235 Spell Check Page 235 Spell Check Selection 235 Spell Check Word 235 Spelling 157 Spelling Options 139 splitter 80 Stage Play 30 31 Standard 6 lines 126 207 Standard American format 118 Standard Breakdowns 123 Start amp End 243 Start Menu Folder 269 72 140 225 264 127 208 292 Movie Magic Screenwriter Start New Scene 49 Start Next Revision 190 Starting Only 243 Starting Page Number 185 Startup Files 151 Startup Files Options 139 Statistics 120 Status Bar 19 20 Storyboard Linking 237 Strikeout 72 Strikeout Codes and or Text 239 Style 175 Style Level 105 Style Name 105 Style View 100 Substitution Text 59 62 65 Suggest 75 Switch Elements 51 Sync Control 90 92 96 102 Sync Frame 84 85 93 Sync NaviDoc 84 synonyms 78 System Selection 84 T TAB 41 52 TAG 62 258 Tag Item Globally 240 Tag Items Globally 210 Tag Text 59 62 Tagged Items 127 208 Tagging 209 Tagging Items 209 Tagging Mode 240 Tan 187 Taped Sitcom 30 TEASER 48 62 Technical Support Questions 254 Television Templates 32 Template 24 39 Template Icon 270 Templates 266 Temporarily Disable 256 Text 18 Text as
50. it displays to the right of the Menu Item as in CMD Q for Quit Screenwriter in the example above Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 17 1 5 4 2 1 5 4 3 List Menu CH Character Names GEORGE S VOICE GOWER List Menus are scrollable menus with text items selectable for input into your script without typing such as the Character List in the example To select an item e Type enough letters to match the item you want typing c highlights CARTER in the example above while typing ch highlights CHARLIE Then press RETURN e Or Click on the item you want using the mouse e Or Scroll through the items with the arrow keys and press RETURN to select the highlighted item More items can be viewed by clicking or dragging in the scroll bar on the right of the menu Options Menu Option menus have different types of input options including Push Buttons CheckBoxes Radio Buttons and Text amp Numerical Input Fields Select the option you want using any of these methods e Moving around in the menu by pressing TAB or SHIFT TAB e Clicking on it with the mouse Current Page Forwards 0 Entire Script Selected Text Selected Pages Selected Scenes List Revision Asterisked Pages d Production Breakdowns Dialogue Character List y al g4 Scene Heading List Script Notes Kg Outline Report Run SmartCheck before this print Job Print in
51. menu under the Tools menu a Character Name element will be inserted instead If QuickType is not enabled these popup lists can be displayed manually by pressing the appropriate Control key combination If you Press While in CTRL S Any element Blank Scene Heading Scene Heading with Initial Text Scene Heading with Initial Text and Location CTRL O Any element CTRL O Blank Shot element CTRL ENTER Any element SHIFT CTRL C Action or Dialogue element TAB Any element QuickType will Add a Scene Heading element Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT EXT etc Display a List Menu of all unique Locations already in the script Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY NIGHT etc Add a Shot element Display a List Menu of Shots ANGLE ON etc Add an Action element Display a List Menu of existing Character Names Add a Character Name element Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 149 Character Name element Display a List Menu of Character Extensions V O O S etc Dialogue element Add a Parenthetical element CTRL T Any element Add a Transition element CTRL T Blank Transition element Display a List Menu of Transitions CUT TO etc CTRL F1 Any element Add a Note If Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Editing page of Options under the Tools menu Tab creates a Parenthetical element when in
52. or closest keyboard equivalent 2 Release both keys 3 Type the letter you want accented For example to create you would press OPTION release them both then press e e Accent Aigue the accent over the in caf Press OPTION followed by the letter you want accented e Accent Grave the accent over the in la mode Press OPTION followed by the letter you want accented e Circumflex the accent over the in moi m me Press OPTION actually OPTION SHIFT 6 followed by the letter you want accented e Umlaut the accent over the in No l Press OPTION followed by the letter you want accented e Tilde the accent over the in matiana Press OPTION followed by the letter you want accented Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 75 e Cedilla the accent under the CTRL in gargon Press OPTION followed by either a small c or Capital C 1 9 16 Spell Check Screenwriter s built in Spell Check system allows you to check the spelling of your script by e Word e Element e Page e Forwards from the cursor position e Entire Script Spell Check can also e Auto Correct common Typos as you write e AutoCapitalize Sentences e AutoCapitalize the Names of Characters e Correct Double Capitals e Spell Check in Foreign Languages e Create User Dictionaries for each script You can customize Spell Check options to suit the way you work Under the Tools menu select Options then click
53. transfer the document to your partner s computer Instead it opens a window on your partner s computer allowing your partner to view and edit with permission the document Once you click on the Show Partner button it will change to Showing Partner to indicate that your partner is viewing your document At this point you are considered in Master view since the document is on your computer and you control the editing and the viewing of the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 131 1 12 1 3 1 12 1 4 document When your partner is showing you a document the Show Partner button will change to View Partner to indicate that you are viewing your partner s document Since at this point you can only view the document and cannot edit without the Master s permission you are considered in Slave view Editing in Slave view Normally in Slave view you are unable to have any control over what part of the script you are viewing or make changes in it However it is possible for the Master to grant you permission to edit the script While you can edit the script it is important to realize you are viewing a script on another s computer You will not be able to use any of your menu commands function key s or quick entry features such as pop up lists of Character Names or Locations This feature is mainly for the purpose of editing or rewriting existing text in a collaborative type of environment If the Slave needs to do
54. 1 10 of an inch from 0 3 to 5 inches Bottom Margin This is the minimum amount of space between the last line of Text on the page not including Bottom Scene Continueds and the bottom edge of the page Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 3 to 5 0 inches Binding Adjustment Left and Right Margins are determined by the Element Styles of the document template you re currently using The Binding Adjustment allows you to add to or subtract from the leftmost Margin shifting all the pages text left or right without changing the width of its elements Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 5 to 5 0 inches Text Line Spacing Sets the amount of white space between consecutive lines of text in the same paragraph Entering a value of less than 100 for example 9596 can fit 2 or 3 extra lines of text on each page and make your document perhaps 2 or 3 pages shorter Adjustable in single percentage points from 85 to 115 Blank Line Spacing Sets the size of the blank line spacing that Screenwriter places between elements This can be set slightly lower than Text Line Spacing and still look acceptable Below 90 it becomes noticeable to the reader Adjustable in single percentage points from 85 to 115 Macintosh Compatibility Mode Used for moving a document back and forth between Movie Magic Screenwriter for PC and Movie Magic Screenwriter for Macintosh This feature 116 Movie Magic Screenwrite
55. 163 Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision j Arc H P 163 Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to EA qa EIN m o m om mm 163 Don t print Revision Marks on each Ime nennen nnne nnne neni nna sns na sn ssa sns 163 Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on Uem 164 Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED oages nnnm nnnm nnnn nnne nn nn nnne nani nasa sana sr sns assis 164 Mark Element following Complete Deletion 11csseeeeeseeeeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnnm nenne nnns 164 Auto Update Locked Headers on Hevision nennen enne nenne nn nnne nnn nna sani na ansa nns 164 PEUDIEFPIBISEGHEBS ee ENEE Ee 165 mug duele ele 165 Ge le OOF TE TUE 9 M 166 Producton IIE E 166 When printing to PDF prompt user with COP 166 Print Using FRACTION al AVIC DIS coneibesatuoavbaiafeidan gun EEE RD SN A RD NACH ME CINE DEUM ME 166 BG ar PC LOVIN CS RN ETE TE TE E T ome 166 Keyboard Preferences Buttons i ise Eerontr oon Sn Ens EUEV Fiat epa MER FUE pr Fr OS Vna E EY a FCBPA RUE UELEIA KR FRU YE nDQUN REN FPEVEIRU TM SKK EFE EE 167 Edit Keyboard GE e 168 Animation Dialog Pretere nce cii seku sonno Eua EIE yRE cen MORE Ee RUNDE SURUN aaa 168 SPEE E qe EE rm 169 Character Name Eeer 169 Reen Ee Ee e EET TI E EE DE 170 Movie Magic Screenwriter Dialogus ee e e DEE 170 Blank Lines Before Printed
56. 6 Help Continues Last Replace amp Find Next Deletes the character to the left of the caret Deletes the word to the left of the caret Undo Redo Deletes the character to the right of the caret Deletes the word to the right of the caret 249 DELETE DELETE CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD FORWARD DELETE FORWARD DELETE FORWARD Delete to End of Line CMD OPTION DELETE 1 15 2 2 Shortcut Keys for Inserting and Manipulating Elements Short Cut Keys for Inserting Manipulating Elements Insert Action Element ewm Shift Tab inserts the previously used Character Name SHIFT TAB Insert Character Name into text EE CONTROL OPTION Inserts a Scene Heading starting with EXT CONTROL Inserts a Scene Heading starting with INT CONTROL Inserts a Transition CONTROL ir Inserts Parenthetical Element When in Dialogue Inserts Character Extension When in Character Element Title Centers the current Element EUM NN Drops down ne Eemeren i Seis curent semento Lercoum conrra t Ser curent Eemer to ight coun conre 8 ses curenteienentioruiwan cona F 250 Movie Magic Screenwriter Inserts Left Parenthesis When in Dialogue SHIFT CONTROL Inserts New Element after the cursor element chosen contextually ENTER 1 15 2 3 Shortcut Keys for File Operations Shon cut Kev tor Fn Operations J J Sid New Document using Berater
57. Act or Scene information As an example some writers prefer to start the first page of their script with the script s title underlined instead of Fade In First create a blank Action element Then click on the Current Element window on the Top Toolbar and select Title Centered from the drop down menu Script Note Shot Title Centered Transition 1 8 16 Act Information TV and Stage Play Format 1 8 16 1 Prologue Text Type any valid Prologue Text at the beginning of a blank element until you customize the User Lists see User Lists s later in this chapter the only Prologue Text that Screenwriter recognizes is TEASER PROLOGUE or COLD OPENING Screenwriter automatically centers and capitalizes it 1 8 16 2 New Act To start a New Act Type NEWACT at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter centers it and changes it to ACT where is the new Act Number A forced page break will not be entered Or press RETURN at the beginning of a blank Action element Type c for Start New Act A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate New Act info 1 8 16 3 Same Act To continue the Same Act type SAMEACT at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter centers it and changes it to ACT where is the same Act Number 1 8 16 4 End of Act H To end an Act press RETURN in a blank Action element Type a to select End of Act Info at the Scene Heading Initial Text Pop up List A forced page break is
58. CTRL DOWN ARROW 82 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 10 5 The NaviDoc Menu The NaviDoc menu contains the menu commands for working with the NaviDoc Panel Keyboard commands for each command are listed in the menu as well Note that most of the commands require using the CTRL key such as CTRL 1 to show and hide the Outline Panel in the NaviDoc For more information on the specific menu commands go to the NaviDoc zs menu description in the Appendices x Outline Scenes Notes Bookmarks New Note New Bookmark Add Outline Element Promote Outline Element Demote Outline Element Create Edit Outline Styles Top Bottom Page Up Page Down Previous Row Next Row Decrease MaviDoc Font 5ize Increase MaviDoc Font Size NaviDoc Preferences Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 83 1 10 6 NaviDoc Options In the Screenwriter menu select Preferences Choose NaviDoc to bring up the options Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline Sync NaviDac Row with Document Point to Paragraph when Navigating Frame current row with this color BEA Flash pointer 2 times Quickly KE SC d E Use System Selection color for frame Disappear after flashing Medium fade BN Variable less wasted space Fixed faster resizing on slow computers Scenes
59. Cancel 1 14 4 10 Locked Letter Skip List Certain letters are seldom used for Act Scene and Page numbering due to the potential for confusion Common pairs skipped due to their similarity are ui ld the letter I and the number 1 the letter O and the number 0 the letters E and F Clicking on the Locked Letter Skip List button displays a List of letters of the alphabet Check those letters you don t want to use NOTE Screenwriter also uses this skip list for use in its numbering of Act Breaks and Scene Labels if they are set to use Letters Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 199 1 14 5 1 14 5 1 Letter Skip List I Lh Kei KE GD x e 9 T S Wi Don t Use a Scene Zero a I j m I U L A i I zu Cancel Advanced Locking Features In the normal day to day process of the Production Cycle Screenwriter s automated Production Features will meet most people s needs The following features give you an extra level of manual control over Scene and Page Locking should an unusual situation arise Be careful when altering Locking features as some procedures are not reversible Always save a copy of the script before attempting any of the following procedures In a Locked scrip
60. Card 33 view for viewing editing and rearranging the document scenes in an index card format The Zoom Screen Text Icon ES Opens the Zoom Screen Text window for setting the screen magnification of the document text without changing the printed font sizes in the document The Normal zz View Icon Displays the document text as a continuous scroll of text Page breaks show as dashed lines 22 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 5 10 1 5 10 1 1 5 10 2 1 5 10 3 1 5 10 4 The Full Page zs Icon Displays the document text with extra space around the edges to simulate actual pages Opening a Document Under the File menu select Open Select from the list of available files changing the subdirectory drive or file type if necessary Click on OK to open the file To open a file you ve recently saved select one of the numbered files at the bottom of the File menu Opening Multiple Documents Screenwriter allows you to have up to 9 files open at the same time e Open multiple scripts at the same time from the File Open menu by holding down the SHIFT key and selecting a range e Or press the CMD Apple key to select multiple scripts individually Displaying Multiple Windows Under the Window menu select either Cascade or Tile e Tile shows all open scripts each at full page width stacked horizontally above each other Makes for easy cutting and pasting e Cascade sho
61. EE 34 PIG ZONA dex EE 34 vereal lee e 34 POT 8 1 gt Le SRI TTE 34 VUPHECAPE BIO e e EE 35 CUE Ny WE CAN EE 36 onanie an Cs A EE 36 lr ET ene CANS E 37 gio insi peii te c 37 Creating a User Defined Format Template 1 11 Leeeeiieeee EE eeeecliieeee nennen nna aua n natas uana saa a ansa aaa a KEEN 39 Restoring an Overwritten Template 2 1 5 scabini eras ee a ossa 1223 ad EE Ra T aa va admo aaa Tte adde caida aia Cana ba aai 39 o Wiitihg tie SOME E 40 Creating E IEMED C NORTE ETE oo oot 40 Ef ig M c 41 Faden Ncc 41 NET Ti e WE 42 Forero NNNM cc 42 RI A 43 ACION Nn cc 43 Character Nee 43 Inserting Character Names giereg T EeeEe 44 Gharacter diri I el EE 44 Delete a Character Extension 45 HE e TC NN cc T 45 ST E de iM Mc c 46 MUSOU MP c 47 e GE 47 Centered EE 48 Act Information TV and Stage Play Format iniri erem ae a eeER 48 GG ele Lett oO OC 48 OWAE n
62. End of Dialogue Add an Action Element Middle of Dialogue Break the Dialogue and insert an Action Element Parenthetical Add a Dialogue Element if the next element is Dialogue it moves to the beginning of that element f Return in Dialog takes you to Character is checked on the Editing page of the Preferences window found in the Screenwriter menu a Character Name element will be inserted instead If QuickType is not enabled these popup lists can be displayed manually by pressing the appropriate Control key combination Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 53 If you Press While in CTRL S Any element CTRL S Blank Scene Heading CTRL S Scene Heading with Initial Text CTRL S Scene Heading with Initial Text and Location CTRL O CTRL O Any element Blank Shot element CMD RETURN Any element SHIFT CMD C Action or Dialogue element TAB Any element QuickType will Add a Scene Heading element Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT EXT etc Display a List Menu of all unique Locations already in the script Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY NIGHT etc Add a Shot element Display a List Menu of Shots ANGLE ON etc Add an Action element Display a List Menu of existing Character Names Add a Character Name element Character Name element Display a List Menu of Character Extensions V O O S etc Dialogue ele
63. Ilcon 21 Normal WP Mode 229 Not Page One 119 Note 50 Note Category 8 7 Note Category Commands 87 Note Category View 88 Note Colors in Outline View 101 Note icon 49 Note Options 49 51 Notes 49 50 51 120 182 233 270 Notes Category Controls 87 Notes Command 86 Notes Controls 86 Notes List 86 Notes Options 89 Notes Panel 79 85 88 89 Novel 30 31 Number of Copies 120 Numbering Dialogue for Animation 215 208 Movie Magic Screenwriter Numbering Scheme 180 181 Numbers 1 2 3 118 Numerical Input Fields 18 O O S 44 62 OMITTED 156 Omitted And Text 195 Omitted Thru Text 195 Omitted Text 195 On Line Help 14 Open 22 37 250 Open File Menu 151 Open 219 220 Opening a Document 14 22 Opening a Title Page 27 Opening Multiple Documents 22 Opens Search Dialogue 248 Options 139 Options Menu 16 17 Options 235 Original Defaults 64 Outline 233 270 Outline Controls 99 Outline Levels 99 Outline List 99 Outline Mode 34 Outline Options 100 139 173 Outline Panel 79 98 108 Outline Panel Font 101 Outline Panel Options 101 Outline Spacing 100 Outline Style 107 Outline Style Assignment 104 Outline Style Management 104 Outline Style Table 113 Outline Styles 104 Outline tab 98 Outline Tools 112 Outline View 105 Outlining Features 111 Override 59 Override 237 240 Overriding 200 Overriding Dialogue Numbering 217 P P O V 62 Page 58 67 75 2
64. Information in Script must be checked on the Scene Labels page of the FORMAT ELEMENT STYLES menu Notes A Note or script note provides you with a place in the document to jot down an idea for a scene or a comment on the story or to put writing you ve cut but are not sure about discarding See the section of the NaviDoc Note Panel for additional information on organizing your notes Notes are separate from the body text of your script and don t affect the page breaks or script length They can be displayed onscreen or hidden They can be printed separately with page references or printed in the regular body of the script in which case they affect the page breaks and script length e Add a Note ag e Type a Note so e Hide Show a Note ag e Print a Note so e Note Options 5 Add a Note To add a Note position the cursor in the element you want a script note to follow Press CTRL N Or click on the Right Toolbar button with a musical Note icon H 50 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 17 2 1 8 17 3 1 8 17 4 A Note is added directly following the element Type a Note Type and format text in a Note as you would in any other element To force a new line or put in a blank line press SHIFT RETURN Hide Show a Note Notes can be individually displayed onscreen or hidden In the left margin next to the Note is a triangle that indicates the note s status When a Note di
65. Known Jesues nnne enhn nnn nnne rn nennen 133 Firewall Configuration Informatio RI m m m m EENE EETA E EE ionii 133 PEK TE SE 134 SOUP y e 134 ee 137 Send As Email Attachment Command leeeeeee i eeeeeeiieeeeee sienne nennen enhn nn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnne 137 ARICA COT AA cc T HHET 137 Compose Message M RE T nO EO T TO TD 138 Name Bank W Rem ane 138 13 Customizing SCFreeDWEIGr uuucc eoo eege RUE SEES MEUS RUE RAE ERN aaa PUE UERM M ENAM ERU ERN KE M SM EIEE 139 VIEW Ju c 140 Ur X 140 SHOW Fr ON Ee EE 140 ZOOM OCICEN TOM P 141 2 alt 142 aoi E 142 TOOlDar lecons lae 143 CUSTOMIZE Kee ENERETRETHRE 144 Eding WE COS PET OD Sem 146 SIT WK 146 ANO Ge e t c 147 Enable Quick Type En M 147 E ZROIRAII MM RC 149 Contents 7 FONNING D E 149 Pressing The ENTER RV T 150 Other e W e WE EEN 150 Files El 151 When Screenwriter starts it SDOUlCl ccc ooa eoi nao pnr y nba naeh snp e ssa eae pho ndn ne waa Sa yx en dE EES Eeer 151 Def
66. MaviDoc Outline v Use SmartTab ri Running Shot List ri Running Transition List m When parsing Locations only strip known Times Tab in Dialogue goes to a Parenthetical v Drag and Drop should break Elements in Middle in Action with hidden names goes to Dialogue QuickType preferences are located in the QuickType section 1 13 3 1 QuickType Preferences QuickType gt v Enable QuickType Entry v Auto Pop Up Locations vi Auto Pop Up Time of Day Vi Auto Pop Up List of Character Names yi Use SmartTab v Running Shot List vi Running Transition List r When parsing Locations only strip known Times Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 147 1 13 3 1 1 Auto Pop Up v Enable QuickType Entry E Auto Pop Up Locations Ww Auto Pop Up Time of Day v Auto Pop Up List of Character Names Enable Quick Entry 4 When checked QuickType is enabled QuickType lets you speed text entry by using many different keyboard shortcuts 147 Unchecked QuickType is disabled e Auto Pop Up Locations lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Locations List after you enter Scene Heading Initial Text e g INT Unchecked you need to press RETURN to display the list e Auto Pop Up Time of Day If checked QuickType automatically pops up the Time of Day List after you enter Location text e g LAURA S APARTMENT from a pop up Locations List
67. Modes Screenwriter can deal with the typing of new text at the cursor position in two different ways The current mode is displayed on the Bottom Status Bar e Insert mode lInserts new text at the cursor position pushing existing text to the right This is Screenwriter s default mode e Typeover mode New text replaces existing text typing over it To Switch between Insert and Typeover e Press the INS key on the keyboard e Or click on the Insert Typeover button on the Bottom Status Bar For Typeover mode to take effect the Allow Typeover option must be enabled To change its status 1 Under the Tools menu select Options 2 Select the Editing tab 3 Check or Uncheck the Allow Typeover box 72 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 9 15 1 9 15 1 1 9 15 2 1 9 15 3 1 9 15 4 Formatting Text Screenwriter deals with text formatting Bold Underline talics Strikeout by placing hidden format codes surrounding the formatted text One code starts the format another ends it In normal use you won t need to be aware of these codes Screenwriter s default is to Hide Format Codes To display the codes Under the View menu select Show Format Codes A checkmark appears next to it reminding you it s on Bolding Text To format existing text as Bold Select the text Then e Click on the Bold Button labeled with a B on the Top Toolbar Or e Or press CMD B Underlining Text B U 7 N T
68. New drafts must be saved Save the script using the Save As command Give it a different name to reflect the Date and its status as the next Revision Color draft e g MyScript PINK e Click on OK to go to the Title Page Publisher Manually change the Running List adding the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes 3 Make changes to the script adding and deleting text as necessary Save the file as you go 4 Issue Revised Pages by printing and distributing them 5 Go back to Step 1 of Start Next Revision Repeat the process for each day s revisions 6 That s the Production Cycle completed Revision Marks A Revision Mark is a special character usually an asterisk usually appearing in the right margin of a line It signifies that changes have been made to that line If you follow the Production Cycle sequence described above Screenwriter will automatically handle Revision Marks for you To work with Revision Marks manually use the following instructions Manual Revision Marks There are three ways to manually enter or remove revision marks e Asterisk Key Pressing the Asterisk key manually enters a revision mark on the line the cursor is blinking If the line already has a revision mark pressing the asterisk key removes it NOTE The Asterisk key is still used to type Manual Revision Marks even if the Revision Mark has been re defined as a different character e Apply Revision Mar
69. Notes Bookmarks New Note New Bookmark Add Outline Element Promote Outline Element Demote Outline Element Create Edit Outline Styles Top Bottom Page Up Page Down Previous Row Next Row Decrease MaviDoc Font Size Increase MaviDoc Font Size NaviDoc Preferences e Outline s Shows or hides the Outline panel in the NaviDoc e Scenes o Shows or hides the Scenes panel in the NaviDoc e Notes ss Shows or hides the Notes panel in the NaviDoc Bookmarks a Shows or hides the Bookmarks panel in the NaviDoc New Note Inserts a new Note at the current cursor position in the document New Bookmark Inserts a new Bookmark at the current cursor position in the document Add Outline Element Inserts a new outline element at the current cursor position in the document e Promote Outline Element Promotes moves to the left the current outline item s by assigning the style above the current style in the Outline Style Table The keyboard command for promoting an outline element is CTRL LEFT ARROW e Demote Outline Element Demotes moves to the right the current outline item by assigning the style below the current style in the Outline Style Table The keyboard 234 Movie Magic Screenwriter command for demoting an outline element is CTRL RIGHT ARROW Create Edit Outline Styles Opens the Outline Element Styles window which controls the list and format o
70. Plain Text itxt HTML Publishing t html Movie Magic Scheduling Export ap Avid Editar Format tot Final Draft Scriptware Tagged tag Save As Template Send As Email Attachment 1 13 10 1 Keyboard Preferences Buttons f Clear Export Import E Print Edit i vaiha ae mem Es Reset Reset This button resets the keyboard shortcuts to the shipping defaults Clear This button clears all of the keyboard shortcuts Export Exports the current keyboard shortcuts to a keyboard shortcuts kbd file Import Imports kbd keyboard shortcuts files to the current keyboard shortcuts Print Prints the keyboard shortcuts Edit e This button lets you add remove and change keyboard shortcuts 168 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 10 2 Edit Keyboard Preference Fait Most any command in Screenwriter can have a keyboard shortcut To add remove or change a keyboard shortcut e Select the command from the list of commands in the Keyboard Preferences tab by clicking on it e Press Edit This opens the Change Shortcuts window Change Shortcuts Edit Keyboard Shortcuts for NaviDoc Cancel OK Each command can have one primary keyboard shortcut and one alternate shortcut If a shortcut already exists for the command it displays automatically Click in or tab to the Primary or Alternate shortcut box and press the keyboard shortcut of
71. Pop Up List Title Page Publisher Edit Script Formats Load Script Formats Save Script Formats Edit User Lists Repaginate Now Run SmartCheck Change Element Type gt Left Change Element Type gt Right Change Element Type gt Set Margins Find Find Next Replace Replace amp Find Next Replace All Change Character Name Mark one Character s Format Format Format OLD MENU LOCATION Format Format Format Format Format Format Format Format Format Search Search Search Search Search Search Search View View View NEW MENU LOCATION NAME Format Element Styles Format Load Styles From Format gt Make Default for All New Documents Format User Lists Tools Tools Dual Columns gt Left Dual Columns gt Right Dual Columns gt Set Margins Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Format 274 Movie Magic Screenwriter LOCATION LOCATION NAME i p 9 mm ER 9 Bw lo m E 0 o9 wuwmeme BER ER meme RR Ee ER Some E SE ER ER Sex Bem ER 9 me9 ER o9 em Eeer E Emme p RR SS Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 275 1 16 3 1 16 3 1 1 16 3 2 1 16 3 3 1 16 4 New File Format MMSW Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 introduces a new file format and a new file name extension mmsw This new file format accommodates the many new feature
72. Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc L Document and Qutline Elements ei Expand Collapse together yl Clicking in an Outline Element in document i j reveals that element in the Qutline Panel Expand Collapse independently Use this font for all Outline Items instead of styles Font Lucida Grande Same color as Note in script Spaces to indent Outline Levels 10 Single color based on Outline Style Reduce indent for unused levels vi Up Down moves rows Start Drag Sound Tink aul Left Promotes row Right 3 Demotes row Dragging Sound Pop Promote Demote Sound Zoop Moved Row Sound Purr Cancel e Expanding amp Collapsing Outline Elements These options control the conformity and visibility of the outline list with the document and vice versa e Outline Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the outline list They include the font face font size font color and font background color These options only affect the outline list text if the Use this Font for all Outline Items box is checked When not checked each outline item uses its own document font style e RowLines This option controls the appearance of the line that separates the outline items in the outline list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin oolid Thick Solid and Groove e Note Colors in Outline View This option controls the appearance of notes in the outli
73. SOM Breakdown FIBI DY EN 205 DECONG ANY DOLE DY CRM TM 206 Calculating El OMNIS DY T T 207 Display e nd Totals OY E 208 TE SOUS OPON CN 208 Breakdown Tagging RBS 209 WAC OIG MOJE i aacenivncstavunnce st ciiascetycianst E ane et E E E A E E 209 TAG OIG HONS EE 209 Biz medi E 210 Tag items GIO All c 210 ignore Selection TOF Breakdowns EN 210 Untag A E TE 210 Edit Breakdown C ee EE 211 Breakdown ET dasirneirnmi tiaia aa a aa a aaraa aiaa 212 Layo Breakdown ET 212 Export to Movie Magic Scheduling nut oor beetebuerg ge 213 PUTA ON PO GU CUIOND BM TET E oo EO Ee 214 Miulitipble REVISION EIN 214 Locking Current EE ang 214 ASSIGNING N rmbers to Ern EE 215 Animation Recording SCrTiptS sorsra c 215 Printing Animation Re teller de ET 215 Changing the Animation Recording Script Lovout nennen nnne nnns 216 leide finnen E e e EE 217 LOCKING WE Neie TER NumMDErN Le MERE EE m rr mm 217 Multi Locking Dialogue NUMDELING AA 217 Unlocking Dialogue N itriDerlliq E 217 Overriding Dialogue Tale le DEE 217 19 Append NRI UU 218 SCC IER 5 MENUS scs ce Eua ccc cee esse secs cna esc new scenes PEE dU MM cb CEN MR E PEDE D dE 218 wis Usi BIMBI RU MERITI RO TTE 219 PUS WIG e RRTRNERT 220 mei
74. Scene Headings v Bottom Scene Continueds Auto Revision Marks All Header Text Set Up Header Text P Ee 5et the Header to Print on Every Page WA After Locking the Headers set the Revision Draft Color to BLUE Remove All Current Revision Marks Screenwriter s defaults for Locked Scripts are already selected for you Generally you will want to accept these settings unless your Production Company dictates otherwise If desired you can e URN ON or off the options you prefer by clicking on their checkboxes Grayed out options have already been selected by your prior choices in Element Styles e LOCK or Unlock items as you prefer by clicking their checkboxes e SETUP the Header Text by editing the default codes Click on a Code s button to enter itin the Header The default Header Text for the White shooting script reads something like White Revision 12 25 97 120 using the current date and page number e Change the Revision Draft Color order if desired Screenwriter uses the following industry standard Revision Draft Color order Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 189 Edit Revision Draft Colors WHITE BLUE PINK YELLOW GREEN GOLDENROD SALMON CHERRY BUFF TAN CNew Color CPelete Color orgeat the talar n Current calor WHITE 43 DW Display Page Colors On Screen After the last color is used it shauld fd Save as Defaults for All New Scripts Cancel Loop to Double
75. Screenwriter Prompts you to save any open scripts with unsaved changes only if you have added something to your script If you remove portions of your script and never add anything to it the program will not prompt you to save Saving Portions of a Script While you re rewriting you may want to cut a scene from your script but not discard it completely Screenwriter lets you save portions of your script to a new file 1 Select the text 2 Under the Edit menu select either Copy To or Cut To Copy To Copies the selected text leaving it in your script and saving it in a new file e New File Creates a new file puts the selected information within it and allows you to name the file before the program saves it Screenwriter keeps the original document open To retrieve the new file you must go to File Open Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 25 1 5 12 e Existing File Allows you to copy the selected text to a script that already exists Choosing this option brings up a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the file that you would like this text to be pasted to Select the file and click open Screenwriter pastes the text to the end of the document and closes the file Your current script will remain open e Scrap File Creates a new file with the same name as your current document but at the end will have scrap You can find this document by going into the Window menu At the bottom of this m
76. Selecting the New Color Category option in the Note Category drop down list creates a new notes category Use the Notes Category controls to modify the category style 1 10 8 6 Show Hide Category View in NaviDoc Se m Eel E Y Show All Categories in NaviDoc Hide All Categories in NaviDoc Y L Default ScriptNote m LL ScriptNote Category 1 BH Jj ScriptNote Category 2 This control shows or hides categories of notes in the Notes Panel This control does not affect the document view Notes categories may be turned on or off individually by selecting them from the popup list Alternately all categories may be shown or hidden by selecting the appropriate option from the popup list The default is to show all note categories in the NaviDoc Notes Panel 1 10 8 7 Show Hide Note Categories in Document TES BL IS E EK A T a Y Show All Note Categories in Document Hide All Note Categories in Document d LL Default ScriptNote d 2 ScriptNote Category 1 X Lu ScriptNote Category 2 m This control shows or hides categories of notes in the document This control does not affect the NaviDoc view Note categories may be turned on or off individually by Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 89 selecting them from the popup list Alternatively all categories may be shown or hidden by selecting the appropriate option from the popup list The default is to show all note categories in the documen
77. Sido E NR HL 221 IVA MC E 225 Seu EM re r 227 38s GC 228 ime nens LaL E EE 229 ele DEEN 231 Ee e RE T 232 PAI OG Feo MERE RRRIE 233 Ree E EE 235 imde e Uie ere IV SIMU MTM ERES 237 EE EE 238 Ee cd 9 n E 239 laii mc I 239 Ru e a rct 240 SIN ee A rc 240 TV Breakdowns e 241 Generate Rundown heet 241 Generate Set List COPY ccccccccscssssseeeeceeessseeeeesseesseeeeeseeeaueeeeesseeasseeeesseeauseeeeesseaasseeeessssnsseees 243 Movie Magic Screenwriter Scene Character OSlS sraidean kiano annaS a AR ia TEENER Eariri 245 Animato COCKING esris nea naaa EE EE A EA ATEEN EnA ea aiaiai 246 Clg ele OT EE 247 Ia le I DEE 247 Key CD ela tI D e 248 El Vleiwr ef l checa L EnEn 248 Shortcut Keys for Inserting and Manipulating Elements 249 Shortcut Keys TOF File een EN 250 leiere l Keys TOF FONTANO senses assa irte E Kar ndn Ud EEA EEEN atc E Resa dua au Gk ECRIRE Fd head d E TOM 250 DUOMCUL KEYS TOF NAVIDOG T 251 SHOMCUL Keys Tor le E 251 SHOMCUE KEYS TOF SSlO CUO EE 252 Misc
78. Unchecked you need to press RETURN to display the list e Auto Pop Up List of Character Names lf checked pops up a List of all Character Names in the script when pressing RETURN is the first activity in a Character Name element 1 13 3 1 2 Enable QuickType Entry Enable QuickType Text Entry If checked this allows the automatic display of pop up lists of Character Names Locations Times of Day etc If you Type QuickType will FADE IN Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu or any Transition INT EXT etc If you Press RETURN QuickType will while in Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT EXT etc blank Scene Heading Scene Info or End of Act Scene Heading Display a List Menu of all unique Locations without Location already in the script Scene Heading Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY with Location NIGHT etc 148 Movie Magic Screenwriter End of Action Add another Action Element Character Name Add a Dialogue Element If the next element is Dialogue or Parenthetical it moves to the beginning of that element End of Dialogue Middle of Dialogue Element Parenthetical Add an Action Element Break the Dialogue and insert an Action Add a Dialogue Element if the next element is Dialogue it moves to the beginning of that element f Return in Dialog takes you to Character is checked on the Editing page of the Options
79. and Scene numbers the same while adding new ones as A Pages and A Scenes Update the Title Page Under the File menu select Title Page Publisher Manually change the Running List adding the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes Check the Header Text to make sure it accurately reflects the current Date and Revision Draft Color Save the script using the Save command Issue Revised Pages 1 Print the Revised Pages only e Under the File menu select Print e Click on the radio button for the displayed Revision Color or click on the radio button for Asterisked Pages if you re not using Revision Colors Screenwriter prints only the pages with Revision Marks and any A Pages immediately following them 2 Distribute the revised pages Start Next Revision 1 Under the Production menu select Start Next Revision From now on Screenwriter automatically takes you through the steps to get to the next revision When you select Start Next Revision Screenwriter e Removes all Revision Marks e Fixes all A Pages Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 191 1 14 3 1 14 3 1 Locks the Header Text e Advances to the next Revision Draft Color e Prompts for a mandatory Save Displays the Title Page Publisher so you can add the next Revision Draft Color to the Running List and change the Date e Click YES to have Screenwriter start the automated process 2
80. as the total allowable lines on a page divided by eight When rounded this equals lines 208 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 6 1 4 Display Eighth Totals by Display Eighths Totals by C Total of All Rounded Eighths fei True Total of All Lines Display Eighth Totals by Specifies how Screenwriter should calculate the totals for each Sort grouping If the displayed totals for each scene are added their rounding accumulates too leading to an inaccurate total e Totals of All Rounded Eighths If checked rounds the displayed totals for each scene into eighths before adding them For example a group has Scene 5 with 39 lines and Scene 7 with 50 lines in it You ve specified 6 lines per eighth For Scene 5 it calculates 39 divided by 6 6 5 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 7 8ths Scene 7 is calculated as 50 divided by 6 8 33 8ths or 1 and 0 33 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 1 1 8ths The total of Scenes 5 amp calculates as 7 8ths 1 1 8ths 2 0 8ths e True Total of All Lines If checked the actual numbers of lines in each scene are added then rounded into eighths to give a more accurate total In our previous example the total of the lines from Scenes 5 amp 7 is 89 And 89 divided by 6 is 14 83 8ths or 1 6 83 8ths which rounded upwards comes out to 1 7 8ths 1 14 6 1 5 Miscellaneous Options Miscellaneous Options Ed List Characters in Each Scene ei Sorted Alphab
81. between the broken Elements Unchecking the option Drag n drop should break Elements in middle tells Screenwriter not to let Drag and Drop text Break Elements If you release the Left Mouse Button while the cursor s in the First half of the Element text is dropped Before the Element If you release the Left Mouse Button while the cursor s in the Last half of the Element text is dropped After the Element 1 9 10 Deleting Text The following delete commands remove the selected text from your script without placing it on the Clipboard To un delete text you ve deleted select Undo before selecting any other editing command NOTE Select Tools Options Keyboard to enable Shortcut Keys for the Delete keystrokes Delete Left of the cursor by character BACKSPACE Delete Right of the cursor by character DELETE FORWARD Delete to End of Line CMD OPTION DELETE FORWARD Delete Next Word seeeeeeeeeeeeee CMD DELETE FORWARD Delete Previous Word eese CMD DELETE Delete a Block of selected text by clicking on the Delete Block Button on the Top Toolbar the icon with a large dark red X Delete a block of selected text by Right Clicking and using the Context menu 1 9 11 Un Deleting Text To un delete text you ve deleted select Undo before selecting any other editing command Under the Edit menu select Undo 1 9 12 Undo To Undo a text
82. black and white printing Useful for printing out a script for an actor with his her dialogue highlighted e Dual Columns ss Allows changing selected text to Left or Right Column as in two column simultaneous dialogue or AudioVisual format and changing the margins for Right or Left Columns Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 231 Left Column ants Right Column R Normal Full Width F Set Column Margins e Normal WP Mode Toggles between the script format you re using and Word Processing mode where Tab and Return function as in other Mac OS X word processing programs e Cheat s Shows options for tweaking the margins of the selected element the current page the entire script etc Element Page SCript Keep Element Together Keep Group Together Keep With Following Mark as Non Printing e Reset Cheated Shows options for Undoing any previous cheating you ve done Element Page Document Unmark as Non Printing 1 15 1 6 Search Menu Removed All Find commands are now in the Edit 2 1 menu Mark One Characters Dialogue command is now in the Format zs menu 232 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 1 7 Goto Menu Top Bottom Page scene Previous Scene Heading Next Scene Heading Next A Page Next Forced Page Break Next Speech By Next Script Note Next Current Revision Mark Next Strikeout or Colored Text Or Last Position
83. color s Name does not show its corresponding color In 256 color mode on your monitor only 16 colors are available for Revision Draft Colors These may not be enough for a list with extensive Revision Colors Setting your monitor to display in more than 256 colors is recommended if possible Set as Defaults for All New Documents If checked uses the Revision Draft Colors you set here to be the default colors in all New documents Help Displays this page in the Help file Production Breakdowns Screenwriter can automatically generate and print or export a variety of Production Breakdown sheets To access these reports Print Standard Breakdowns e Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Print Standard Breakdowns The Production Breakdowns print window displays Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 205 Production Breakdowns Sort Breakdown Primarily by Secondary Sort by Script Order e Script Order Interior vs Exterior S Interior vs Exterior a Location Location p ash Time of Day Time of Day 7 Characters All i some Movie Magic Scheduling File d Ka Script Breakdown Sheets Miscellaneous Options Iw List Characters in Each Scene _ Calculate Eighths by Sorted Alphabetically Standard 6 lines 1 8th C Script Order Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th amp Speaking Characters First C3 User List Order Display Eighths Totals by List Non 5p
84. dr Top tTakes you to the Top of the script Bottom Takes you to the End of the script Page Takes you to a specific Page Number or Scene Number Scene Displays a Scene Heading list allowing you to select the one to go to Previous Scene Heading Takes you to the previous Scene Heading in the script Next Scene Heading Takes you to the next Scene Heading in the script Next A Page Takes you to the next A Page Only available in locked scripts Otherwise its grayed out Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Forced Page Break In a Television or Stage Play format script takes you to the next Act Break or Scene Break Next Speech By Displays a Character Name list taking you to the next speech by the character you select Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Note Takes you to the next Note Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Current Revision Mark Takes you to the next Current Revision Mark Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Strikeout or Colored Text Takes you to the next Strikeout text or Colored text Last Position Returns the cursor to the last position in the script where you where typing editing Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 233 1 15 1 8 NaviDoc Menu x Outline Scenes
85. if Screenwriter cannot Undo the changes Redo Restores what you just undid Only available immediately after you ve performed an Undo prior to making any more changes Cut Removes selected text from the script placing it on the clipboard Copy Copies selected text leaving it in the script but also placing it on the clipboard Paste Places the contents of the clipboard into the script at the cursor position Paste into Current Element This menu item is ONLY available if you already have Cut or Copied text from a single Movie Magic Screenwriter element or are pasting from an external document It allows you to paste that text into a different element type and have it become part of that element You might use this for example if you wrote a parenthetical like turning to John and pulling out a gun and you decide you want to move that to an action element Simply cut the parenthetical element as you would normally then use the Paste into Current Element to paste it into a blank action line Clear Deletes selected text removing it from the script but not putting it into the clipboard Paste from Displays a menu allowing you to select an existing file Its contents are placed into the currently displayed script at the cursor position Copy to 24 This menu item is only available if you have selected i e blocked text in your script If this is the case Screenwriter takes you to a sub menu with the following option
86. insert a Flush Right code between them For example Act Page would place Act 2 flush left and Page 3 flush right on the same line Blank Lines following Header Select the number of blank lines to insert between the Header Text and the page s first line of script text or Top Scene Continued Default is 1 blank line Preview Click this button to see a Print Preview of the current page showing your Header and Footer Text Click on the appropriate button for e Print Disabled when previewing from the Header Footer window Normally it sends the onscreen page to the printer formatted exactly as it looks but at 100 size e Prev Goes to the previous page in the script e Next Goes to the next page in the script 120 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 11 4 e Close Exits the Print Preview screen e 1 Page Displays one page at a time onscreen e 2 Pgs Displays two pages at a time onscreen e Setup Document Layout Disabled when previewing from the Header Footer window Normally it goes to the Document Layout screen see above displaying your actual script page instead of a non printable sample page e Zoom In Displays the sample page larger onscreen You can also left click on the sample page to zoom in e Zoom Out Displays the sample page smaller onscreen You can also right click on the sample page to zoom out Printing the Document Printing in Screenwriter is acces
87. major rewriting it would probably be better to use the Send Document feature so they can have full use of their program You may also experience slow screen refreshes and typing rates since you are actually editing the script on the Master s computer A Slave can request control of the script by simply placing the mouse pointer anywhere over the script and clicking The Master will then receive the following request Attention Your partner wishes to type in the document This can cause problems if you both try to edit at once or if you move around in the document while your partner is trying to edit Allow your partner to type in the document Once the Master clicks Yes the Slave can now edit the script Slave view editing capabilities Once you have permission to edit the script you can perform the following functions e Use the mouse to click in the script to edit e Use the Mouse to highlight text by holding the shift key and clicking where you want the text selection to be extended e Edit by typing in the script e Scroll by using the Up and Down Arrows or Page up Page Down You can also cut copy and paste text as well by using whatever keys are set on that computer to cut copy paste with in the Keyboard section of the Tools Options window These commands are being executed on the Masters computer so the Slave will not be able to paste text from another application on the Slave computer Likewise if the Slave invok
88. or reassign an outline style The current style is identified by a check mark If the selection is not an outline style no check mark is shown The NaviDoc menu also has commands for setting outline style assignments 1 10 11 1 0utline Style Management Control Use the Format Element Styles command and select Outline Styles or use the NaviDoc gt Create Edit Outline Styles command to open the Outline Styles Format Table This table controls the list and format of all available outline styles Element Styles Use the table on the right to Character Names add or remove Outline Styles Dialogue STYLE NAME This name shows up in various style and element menus Parentheticals LEVEL Defines the hierarchy of an Scene Headings Outline Style Styles at a higher level may be hidden in the NaviDac Shots Outline View by clicking on the disclosure triangle Action PRINT unchecked means elements dE of this outline style will not print when you print your document nor will they consume space on the page Include these document styles in Outline View or increase page count Checked Act Breaks Shots Scene Labels on forces elements of this style to C EEN always print AND add to the page Ven IM Scene Headings x COUN DTE you can always print Style Name Print Frame Colors outline elements through Aet Break P SES mH the Outline Report Sequence y H FRAME Style af frame drawn around 2 Scene Label y
89. or medium such as a floppy disk tape drive CD DVD network server etc e Timed Backup Frequency Set this to between 1 and 60 minutes 15 is the default If you try to set it to O or greater than 60 minutes it changes to 60 minutes when you exit the menu 154 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 4 5 1 13 4 6 1 13 5 e Timed Backup Sound use this sound to remind you that the bk file has been created when you save your document The default is set to None Password Protect Scripts f Password Protect Scripts Password Protection keeps unauthorized people from reading your scripts When saving a script you ll be asked to enter a password twice for confirmation To open the script you ll have to enter the correct password When checking this option you ll be prompted to type the word YES to confirm your decision to put passwords on all scripts When saving an Allow Viewing Printing without Password option lets you make the script viewable and printable to anyone without the password if checked They won t be able to edit or save the script When Opening Existing Documents Show NaviDoc Panel Last Used ES Start at last saved position e Show NaviDoc This option controls the NaviDoc display when documents are opened It has the following options Panel Last Used default Outline Panel Scenes Panel Notes Panel Bookmarks Panel or Hide NaviDoc Y Panel Last Used Qutline Panel Scenes
90. other Mac OS X program and open the file you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under that program s Edit menu Select All or select all the text in the file using another method 3 Under the Edit menu select Copy Once the Copy command is complete the text will be on the Clipboard Don t cut or copy anything else 4 Open Screenwriter 5 Under Screenwriter s File menu open a New file Under the Edit menu select Paste Instead of pasting the import text in your new empty document Screenwriter presents the following Text Interpretation menu 260 Movie Magic Screenwriter fi Import Text in Script Format C Import Text as Action Only Y Text Only Non RTF Use Stylesheets rA Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Use when line spacing in the source text is inconsistant though it can cause shots to be imported as Character Don t use Capitalization Information for Element Identification Use when Character Names may be lower case in the source text Ignore Margins for Element Identification ki Action is in Parentheticals CAT Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Use ONLY when the script is already in Production and the page breaks have to match Cancel 4 ha AZ e To import a script file Import in Script Format should be checked e To import an outline or some other non script text check Import Text as Action Only e Text Only Non RTF
91. pages The first step is to delete the page breaks that separate the short pages e Place the cursor at the Beginning of the Element following the first short page e Press the Backspace Delete on Mac key or under the Edit menu select Remove Forced Page Break e Screenwriter will display a dialog box that asks Delete this Locked Page Break Choose Yes e Repeat these steps until all short pages are combined Hyphenating the page numbering The next steps is to add Non Printing Omitted pages at the end of the newly combined page This will tell the program that there used to be multiple pages occupying the space of the newly combined page e Place the cursor at the end of the newly combined page e Press Ctrl Return on the keyboard to add a Non Printing Omitted page The page number on the combined page should now be hyphenated e g 15 16 from the example above Repeat this step until the page number reads correctly e g 15 17 NOTE You can also choose to add an A Page as the last Non Printing Omitted page if you want the number after the hyphen to display as such e g 15 174 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 203 1 14 5 6 Set Revision Draft Color Order Tools Set Revision Draft Color Order This feature opens the Revision Draft Color window showing the order in which revision colors will be used the default is the industry standard Revision colors are displayed in a Color window on the left
92. say that their total height is the value which will be used to center them rather than each one being centered individually e Undo Alignment Cancels the last alignment option selected unless the text elements in question have been otherwise dragged The section that tracks where text is placed on the title page is the X and Y axis section It is located in the upper right of the screen When text is being positioned on the title page the X and Y axis section shows how far from the left X and top Y margins of the page your text element starts These measurements change as you move the text element and are shown in Inches or Centimeters AU Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 6 4 1 6 5 1 6 6 1 7 A Grid helps you position text elements on the page Check Show Grid to display it Saving a Title Page As the Title Page is saved as part of the script itself there s no need to save it separately To save it as a template for use with other scripts simply click on the Save button and give it a name A file extension of TPG is automatically added to a Title Page Template file you save Loading a Title Page You can load a title page that is part of another Screenwriter script or was saved as a Title Page Template file Click on the Load Button On the Open Title Page menu load an existing Title Page Template file by selecting a file ending in TPG and clicking OK To load a title page that is part of anothe
93. send messages Your computer s IP address I5 192 168 3 116 For your computer to be able to communicate with your partner s either 1 he or she needs to enter in your IP address or 2 you need to enter his or d her IP address Enter Partner s IP Let Partner Do It j Which do you want to do Troubleshooting Port Number 2200 F Cancel i IP Address In order to connect with your partner one of you will need to know the other s IP If you have a Static fixed IP address if connected by network or some high speed Internet Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 129 1 12 1 2 connections you can give the IP address to your writing partner and they will be able to use that address anytime they want to connect to you If you are connecting via a Dial up connection meaning your computer calls your Internet Provider every time you wish to connect to the internet your IP will change each time you connect to the Internet This means one of you will need to communicate the other s IP address to the other person every time You can do this by one of the following ways e Calling the person on the telephone e Sending the IP to them in a text message on their mobile phone e Sending the IP via an instant message service such as AOL instant Messenger Yahoo Instant Messenger MSN Messenger Google Talk ICQ etc e E mailing the IP address However this can take as long as a day depending on
94. since you sent the document to your partner Using the Voice feature to talk to your partner iPartner allows you and your partner to actually speak to each other via the connection using a microphone and speaker This feature functions best if both you and your partner are on the same LAN Local Area Network or if you both have high speed internet connections DSL Cable etc Slower modem connections may produce undesirable results when using the Voice feature In order to enable speaking and listening you must have the microphone and speaker buttons available These buttons are only be available if both you and your partner are on the same platform Windows to Windows or Mac to Mac connections Speaking To enable speaking to your partner click on the microphone and iPartner will enable your microphone and send anything you say to your partner via Streaming Audio Listening To enable listening to your partner click on the speaker and iPartner will enable your speaker so that you can hear anything your partner says via Streaming Audio iPartner Trouble Shooting Known Issues Go to the online technical support site for known iPartner issues 1 12 1 10 Firewall Configuration Information iPartner can communicate over any of the following TCP port numbers 2200 2136 2184 and 2245 At a minimum the firewall will need to allow outbound connection on at least one of these ports The user can select the port number to use s
95. slow computers Sync NaviDoc Row with Document This option turns on the Sync Frame to highlight the item in the NaviDoc list corresponding to the current location of the cursor in the document O O Frame current row with this color Sets the color of the Sync Frame Use System Selection color for frame Sets the color of the Sync Frame to the system selection color Point to Paragraph when Navigating This option turns on the flashing pointer showing the location of the cursor in the document after navigating in the NaviDoc O O Flash Pointer This option sets the number of times the pointer flashes Flash Pointer times This option sets the speed at which the pointer flashes Don t Flash Slowly Quickly and Super Fast Disappear after Flashing This option sets the speed at which the pointer disappears after flashing When Type or Click Very slow fade Slow fade Medium fade Fast fade Instantly Row Height This option controls whether the items in the NaviDoc list are uniform or variable O Variable less wasted space This option allows varied item heights The maximum height is related to the item text and the number of visible lines allowed whichever is less Fixed faster resizing on slow computers This option sets a uniform item height dependent on the maximum number of visible lines allowed If an item s text is shorter than the number of visible lines the balance of the space Is blank
96. standard 1 8th or a truer 1 8th Standard 6 lines 1 8th of a Page lf checked defines an eighth of a page as 1 6 lines If you have more than 8 of text on a page however it s possible for a page to calculate as longer than 8 8ths giving inaccurate page counts Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th of a Page If checked defines an eighth of a page as the total allowable lines on a page divided by eight When rounded this equals lines e Display Eighth Totals Specifies how Screenwriter should calculate the totals for each Sort grouping If the displayed totals for each scene are added their rounding accumulates too leading to an inaccurate total e Totals of All Rounded Eighths If checked rounds the displayed totals for each scene Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 127 1 11 5 4 1 12 into eighths before adding them For example a group has Scene 5 with 39 lines and Scene 7 with 50 lines in it You ve specified 6 lines per eighth For Scene 5 it calculates 39 divided by 6 6 5 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 7 8ths Scene 7 is calculated as 50 divided by 6 8 33 8ths or 1 and 0 33 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 1 1 8ths The total of Scenes 5 amp calculates as 7 8ths 1 1 8ths 2 0 8ths e True Total of All Lines If checked the actual numbers of lines in each scene are added then rounded into eighths to give a more accurate total In our previous example the total of t
97. t in a Shot then it puts you into one e CTRL R Forces a refreshing of the screen e CTRL S If you aren t in a Scene Heading then it puts you into one e CTRL T If you aren t in a Transition then it puts you into one e CTRL U Turns Underlining on off e CTRL Y Turns Italics on off e CTRL ENTER Puts you into Action e SHIFT ENTER Puts in a Forced Page Break e ALT ENTER Puts in a Hard Return e CTRL Puts in a Soft Hyphen e CTRL SHIFT Puts in a Hard Dash e CTRL SHIFT Puts in a into Dialogue without making it a Parenthetical e CTRL ALT SPACE Puts in a Hard Space Revoking Slave s editing privileges The Master can revoke the Slave s ability to edit the document only by clicking on the Showing Partner button The Master can permit the Slave to still view the script by simply Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 133 1 12 1 7 1 12 1 8 1 12 1 9 clicking the Show to Partner button again Ending the session Either side can end the iPartner session by clicking the Disconnect button When you disconnect iPartner will ask if you wish to synchronize your document with the document that has been edited by your partner If you select Yes it overwrites the copy of the document you currently have open in your program with the edited changes in your partner s program If you choose No then the document in your program will not reflect any of the changes made
98. the less blank white space at the bottom of a page Accepts a number between 1 and 10 with 2 as the default Not used when Sentence Ends Only is selected Break After a Single Sentence If checked elements may be broken after a single sentence that only takes up one line doesn t word wrap For Dialogue elements this option only applies to a single sentence directly following the Character Name element Dialogue elements following Parentheticals or second paragraphs of Dialogue may be broken after a single sentence even if this option is not checked Break two One line Sentences lIf checked elements consisting of only two one line sentences may be broken Unchecked the element is not broken Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 185 1 13 14 1 13 3 Transitions E Allow Transition as 1st line on Page Allow Transition on CONTINUED line Allow Transition as 1st Line on Page lf checked a new page is allowed to start with a Transition element This is unconventional as Transitions are intended to bridge two other elements Unchecked part of the element preceding the Transition is broken to appear at the top of the new page The previous page may have extra blank white space as a result Allow Transition on CONTINUED line If checked forces a Transition element to fit on the bottom of a page if the next element is Scene Heading or Act Scene Information Only applies when Bottom Scene Continueds are turned on the
99. to enter DAY and the correct spacing and dashes before it A Z nt A INT OFFICE WIGHT Your Time of Day is entered and the cursor moves to a new Action element Action Type your characters descriptions and activities in the Action element e Press RETURN to go to a new paragraph of Action e Press RETURN twice to go to a new Scene Heading element e Press TAB to go to a Character Name element Character Name To create a new Character Name type it in To enter a Character Name that s already been used in this script 1 Press RETURN A Pop up list of available Character Names displays D Character Names ANNIE ANOTHER MAN BERT BOUNCER CARTER CHARLIE 2 Type the first letter of the character s name you want The name becomes highlighted 44 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 9 1 8 10 3 Press RETURN The Character Name is entered and a Dialogue element is created To enter an existing Character Name by first letter 1 Type the first letter of the character s name A Pop up list of Character Names starting with that letter displays e Character Names B EE BERT BOUNCER 2 Type enough letters until the name you want is highlighted and press RETURN The Character Name is entered and a Dialogue element is created 3 To enter a Character Extension press left parenthesis instead of RETURN The Character Name is entered and a Character Extension Pop up L
100. to start underlining and Y to end underlining e Bold Insert lt to start underlining and gt to end underlining To enter the character that represents a code in the Header such as the sign to make it say Act 6 enter the code twice as in Act Screenwriter s default is to keep blank spaces in Header Line 2 and print it as a blank line Text you enter in Line 2 replaces the spaces and print accordingly Put in Date As Selects a format for the Date appearing in Header and or Footer Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Month Day Year Standard American format 3 15 2009 e Month Day Year American with dashes 3 15 2009 e Day Month Year Standard International Format 15 3 2009 e Day Month Year Standard International with dashes 15 3 2009 Put In Act Break As Selects a format for Act Break when it appears in the Header and or Footer Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Numbers 1 2 3 e Letters A B C e Words One Two Three e WORDS ONE TWO THREE e Roman Numerals I Il Ill Put In Scene Label As Selects a format for Scene Label when it appears in the Header and or Footer Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Numbers 1 2 3 e Letters A B C Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 119 1 11 3 5 1 11 3 6 1 11 3 7 1 11 3 8 e Words One Two Three
101. want to override a Dialogue Number 1 14 11 5 Multi Locking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be Multi Locked numbering new speeches as AA Numbers e g lt 6AA gt To Multi Lock Dialogue Numbering repeat the method above for Locking the Numbering Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Lock Dialogue Numbering 1 14 11 6 Unlocking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be Unlocked at any point going from AA Numbering to A Numbering or from A Numbering to non locked numbering Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Unlock Dialogue Numbering 1 14 11 7 Overriding Dialogue Numbering Once Dialogue Numbering has been Locked or Multi Locked a single speech s numbering can be manually overridden e Put the cursor anywhere in the Dialogue speech whose numbering you want to adjust e Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Adjust Dialogue Numbering 218 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 1 15 1 The Locked Dialogue Numbering screen displays Choose an option Set this Dialogue s numbering to Normal Changes the current A or AA numbered Dialogue to Normally numbered Dialogue Set this Dialogue s numbering to A Numbering Changes the current AA or Normally numbered Dialogue to A Numbering Set this Dialogue s numbering to AA Numbering Changes the current A or Normally numbered Dialogue to AA Numbering Only available in scripts wh
102. words that are tagged To correct this simply go to the Production menu and click Breakdown In the cascading menu choose Tagging Mode It will reveal all tags Go back into the Production menu through Breakdown and click Tagging Mode again to turn it off This will hide all tags and cause the squares to disappear Title Page A Title Page is placed before page 1 of the script In a spec script all it needs to contain is the script s title the author s name and an address and contact phone number In a production script what text appears on the title page is determined by the production company Screenwriter s Title Page Publisher allows you to create a title page with a WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get page layout Gridlines are displayed to help you position your text boxes and do not print The title page is automatically attached to the script and is saved with it yet it stays out of your way while writing Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 27 itle Page Publisher e a r T a D Display Size Full Page VEU PN nr D 1 a 3 3 id E 3 4 i Vs DN a KWR a S WMP S Inches _ Centimeters As wi TATEM To add or edit text double click on existing text or at the location on the page where you want new text to go Or use the buttons below EE NUTUS NUNT SINIT a eyes Add Text iver Pena ge EN NES Align Horizontal d ud Garad yu eege E PRI RI Al
103. you type NEWACT it starts a new ACT changes the element to ACT INFORMATION replaces the text with ACT and increases the Act Number The Alias for Item B is set to SAMEACT When you type SAMEACT it changes the element to ACT INFORMATION replaces the text with ACT but keeps the same Act Number Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 61 1 8 28 2 1 8 28 3 1 8 28 4 The Alias for Item C is set to NEWSCENE When you type NEWSCENE it changes the element to Scene Information replaces the text with SCENE if appropriate and increases the Scene Number or not depending on whether it follows a New Act and on your settings in the Script Formats menu Editing User Lists If you d like Screenwriter to auto format a text item that you type put that text in the User List of the Element it should be formatted as Existing User List text can be changed or deleted Under the Format menu select User Lists You ll see the window below User Lists Alas L Character Names INT EE EXT POV Initial Scene Text Scene Body Text FULL SHOT i See em eer Sat m o EndofActText FADEIN Text Save as Default for all New Scripts Click on a button in the right column to select a User List to edit Available items for that User List with defaults display Select the text in a lettered Item for example FULL amp SHOT in I
104. your choice You may use many combinations of CMD CTRL OPTION and SHIFT modifier keys Screenwriter lets you know if the shortcut key has already be assigned of if it is an invalid choice such as OPTION SHIFT and SHIFT OPTION only modifiers Press OK to save your edits Press Cancel to exit without saving your keyboard shortcut edits 1 13 11 Animation Dialog Preferences Screenwriter Preferences Anim Dialog Select the Anim Dialog preferences to setup the layout of your Animation Recording Scripts These options change the way the a Recording Script prints without affecting the script Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 169 Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard i NaviDoc Outline Animation Dialoque Printing Speech Numbering Character Name Position fe On Right Margin of Page fe Above Dialogue r3 S Print lt gt Around Numbering _ On Left Margin of Page _ Ta Left of Dialogue Dialogue Spacing TI 1 Substitute Font fe Use Spacing in Script mt Use Double Spacing Always Capitalize Dialogue I5tone Serif Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches Print Script Notes ei Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before Only Notes Before Selected Dialogue ZS Set Blank Lines Before To 1 E Print Notes Directly Above Speeches Print Boxes Around Notes 1 13 11 1 Speech Number Speech Numbering fe On Right Marg
105. 0 5 Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally SH ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 97 1 10 10 6 Scenes Panel Options Scenes Panel Font i Size 12 LS Text MEM ri Row Lines Gray B E Font Lucida Grande E Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel Odd Row Text E OddRowFill Even Row Text B Even RowFill e Scenes Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the scene list They include the font face font size font color and font background color e Row Lines This option controls the appearance of the line that separates the scenes in the scene list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid and Groove e Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel This option controls the appearance of adjacent scenes in the scene list The appearance of adjacent scenes may be the same or they may alternate between two different styles This option controls the font color and background color for both the even and odd rows 1 10 10 7 Scene List View Controls
106. 1 D zs JOSEPH S VOICE Air raid Warden EXT DUMP DAY CLOSE SHOT Wheelbarrow full of junk being dumped onto pile JOSEPH S VOICE Scrap drives EXT HOUSE NIGHT CLOSE SHOT man beside lighted window pulls down the shade as George blows his whistle Se UE Tos UE Geer GE NER i ETE EE zx Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 99 1 10 11 1 Outline List The Outline List displays all outline elements and notes in the document Clicking on an outline element in the outline list scrolls the document to that outline element Use the mouse NaviDoc menu or keyboard commands to navigate the Outline List 1 10 11 2 Outline Controls The Outline Controls affect the display and organization of the outline elements in the Outline Panel These controls can affect the styles of outline elements in the document view depending on the setting of the Outline preferences 101 Tools gt Options Outline Scenes Notes Bookmarks Add Outline Element F Scene Heading 1 10 11 3 Outline Levels Control Y Include All Outline Levels Exclude All Outline Levels Act Break Sequence Scene Label Scene Scene Heading Beat Script Notes il d Create Edit Outline Styles This control Includes or Excludes outline levels in the Outline Panel Outline levels 100 Movie Magic Screenwriter may be turned on or off individually by selecting them in this
107. 1 Opening ERR TC A S 22 Opening Multiple Documents MEE o co m 22 Displaying Multiple le ele 22 Switening between nee EE ER Opening a Previously Saved Version conica ehh ee aeo d vnb d e lord CR iR o ad UBL Ri t RUD Aui a RR Dd 22 Opening a Script automatically E ET Le EE 23 ee pete cR 23 Options Tor Loading TE un ET 24 debel aec M 24 Saving ORION a ER le 24 Merging Bore 25 o Tile Page c A A E 26 es ipie ERT TE m 27 Creating Text E EE 28 MOVING a TEXT mi iar a PR E oom E E n 28 3WINO a HUE FP GE Mee D 30 Eolo ae a NUE VI o oee a 30 xdistilaie a Tile uo eG G 30 DSP UU OUI Sosa Eom 30 LOACING a SEMOE A nn E 31 Other Formats EE 31 Contents 3 Television Tu rcm 32 te 249 7 M e 32 afe Eo d v RETO TUE 33 IGS CANE SDS COD EE 34 RESIZE UNS IGS CAN GS
108. 2 1 8 INTERIOR 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY Ze Su 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 5 5 2 8 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 2 378 1 2 8 Secondary Sort by Script Order O Location Time of Day e Script Order First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then in the order they appear in the script without any sorting e Interior VS Exterior First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Exterior scenes before Interiors within each group e Location First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Locations alphabetically within each group e Time of Day First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts alphabetically by Time of Day within each group 1 14 6 1 3 Calculating Eighths by Calculate Eighths by Standard 6 lines 1 8th fe Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th Calculate Eighths by Specifies how Screenwriter should define an 1 8th of a page Historically an 1 8th of a page was one inch 6 lines Nowadays writers are allowing more than 48 lines on a page so Screenwriter gives you a choice between the standard 1 8th or a truer 1 8th e Standard 6 lines 1 8th of a Page lf checked defines an eighth of a page as 1 6 lines If you have more than 8 of text on a page however it s possible for a page to calculate as longer than 8 8ths giving inaccurate page counts e Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th of a Page If checked defines an eighth of a page
109. 3 enter to click OK DES EB t Size 18 FH i Bees Type your text The Left three buttons allow you to select Bold Underline and Italics respectively The next button lets you select the text s Font The next three buttons allow you to select Left Justified Centered or Right Justified text NOTE All the text in any given text element will have the same style i e bold underline etc font and justification If you want the script s Title to appear differently from the Author s name for example underlined use different text elements for each and align them as desired Click OK and the Edit Text window disappears placing your text in a text element on the Title Page Moving a Text Element Select the text element by single clicking on it with the mouse You can now move it using any of these methods e Dragging it to where you want it to go Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 29 e Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard e Clicking on the Horizontal and Vertical text alignment buttons at the right of the title page Align Horizontally e Left Aligns the left edges of all selected text boxes with the left edge of the first text box that was selected Right Aligns the right edges of all selected text boxes with the right edge of the first text box that was selected Centers Horizontally centers all selected text boxes with the horizontal center of the firs
110. 3 4 of an inch Due to this anyone using this printer will probably get the top portion of the bottom continueds cut off in the print job To correct this INCREASE the bottom margin by 1 or 2 lines in the Page Layout option under the FILE menu Font managers The presence of some font managers can cause some minor problems The problem will be easy to detect as your script will not print in the correct font Courier If your script appears in an unusual font or you are unable to get a Watermark to print you most likely have the problem The screenwriter program is set to substitute Courier Old in printing because it looks better and has more stroke weight Courier new is used to display onscreen The problem is occurring because the program cannot access Courier old and is substituting something else instead To correct this go to FILE PROGRAM OPTIONS PRINTERS and under substitute font choose Courier New Common Technical Support Questions and Answers Q accidentally learned a wrong word while spell checking how do delete this word from a supplemental dictionary A Go to DOS Command Prompt and switch to Screenwriter for Windows subdirectory type STUTIL to start the editor select the dictionary you want to edit find the word and delete it Q Screenwriter for Windows takes forever to print how do speed it up A Pull down file menu in Screenwriter for Windows select Tools Options click on Printer tab and Substitute for C
111. 32 Page Break Type 240 Page Breaking 185 Page Breaks 183 256 Page Down 233 270 Page Margin Settings 37 Page Number 185 PAGE OMITTED 164 Page Setup 113 Page Up 233 270 Dages Header Draft Color 240 Paper Orientation 113 Paper Size 113 Paper Source 113 Parenthetical 35 40 45 46 52 176 Parentheticals 177 Password Protection 154 Paste 69 221 Paste from 221 Paste into Current Element 221 248 Paste Text 248 Pause AutoCorrection 235 PDF 137 166 Po 117 PgDn 66 PgUp 66 Pink 187 Plain Text 262 Play Sample 134 portnumber 128 Preparing a Script for Importing 25 7 Prev 119 Preview 119 120 Previous character 66 Previous Element 66 Previous Line 66 Previous Row 233 270 Previous Scene 66 Previous Scene Heading 232 Previous Screen 66 Previous Script Page 66 Previous Word 66 74 Print 105 119 120 219 220 250 Print a Note 49 50 Index 289 Print Act Info 243 Print Bottom Continued 165 Print Breakdown Sheets 240 Print Color Text Highlight 166 Print Headers 119 Print Notes 89 Print Notes in Script 51 182 Print Notes on facing pages of script 50 Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers 50 Print Numbering in Script 217 246 Print Preview 119 219 220 Print Scene Description Text 241 Print Scene Text 243 Print Selection 120 Print Separate Act Scene Column 241 Print Separate Day Night Count Column 241 Print Separate Page Number Column 241 Print
112. 45 1 15 1 10 6 1 Generate Rundown Sheet Displays a menu where you can choose options for printing TV Sitcom Scene Rundowns Can generate or regenerate Character Lists before printing Allows you to enter 242 Movie Magic Screenwriter Generate Rundown Sheets Script Attributes Separate Columns Script Title 1 u s EJ ACH Scene Numbers 3 Page Numbers Production Company Day Night Numbers Episode Number Act Scene Text 1 Bold Underline Draft Version First Date 1 23 07 Scene Headings Director C Bald f Underline Font Palatino Timing Boxes d Boxes per Row C d Double wide Boxes List Each Location Only Once per Timing Box Width o7 lg Min Height 0 7 SP Print Scene Description Text LA Print Total Boxes at End of Page e Script Title Production Episode Draft Version Date auto entered but editable Director Offers these printing options e Choice of Font and font Size e Box Width Lets you choose the width of the blank boxes printed for timing notes etc Accepts a value between 0 5 and 2 inches in 1 10 inch increments e Box Min Height Lets you choose the minimum height of the blank boxes printed for timing notes etc Boxes expand if more space than this value allows is needed Accepts a value between 0 5 and 2 inches in 1 10 inch increments e Print Separate Act Scene Column lf checked prints a separate far left column fo
113. 59 Beep Sound Use this popup menu to choose a sound that is played when you type a word that is not in the dictionary The default is None 1 13 6 5 AutoCapitalize Auto Lapitalize E Auto Capitalize Sentences Auto Capitalize Character Names v Except immediately following Shots All Caps v Correct Double Capitals e g PRablem v Treat TV as a Sentence End in dialogue for the purposes of auto capitalization amp spacing vi Correct Capitalization 5pacing when Run Manually v Ignore Capitalization when Checking Words Sentences lf checked capitalizes the first letter in all Sentences in Dialogue Action and Notes Except immediately Following Shots Shots also known as secondary Sluglines can be used to emphasize an object or person with the following Action giving more detail To have the combined Shot and Action read as one sentence with the Action sentence not capitalized check this box Character Names lf checked capitalizes the first letter of all Character Names in Dialogue Action and Notes To be capitalized by Auto Correct a character name must either have been used previously in the script or exist in the Character Name User List When using names such as Mark or Art in your script Auto Correct also capitalizes the words mark and art To avoid this Pause Autocorrection under the Spell menu Type the word with your desired capitalization
114. 9 8 1 9 9 Cutting and Pasting with the Mouse Pasting has two methods based on how much text you select If you select a word and paste it into a line it will merge with that element If you select more than a word and paste it into an element it will insert the line and any adjoining elemental groups and retain its own element value e g if you cut a line of dialog it will paste the dialogue and character name into your script and break the existing element in two or appear in front of the current element Whether you break an existing element in half or paste in the front of the element depends on whether you have this feature enabled in the Program Option screen Select Tools Options Mouse Drag n Drop to enable the break Elements in the Middle feature e Select the text to be moved Under the Edit menu select Cut e Move the cursor to the place you want the text you ve cut to appear and click there The cut text appears after the cursor position If you select any text in the new position the cut text replaces it e Under the Edit menu select Paste Copying and Pasting with the Mouse e Select the text to be moved Under the Edit menu select Copy e Move the cursor to the place you want the text you ve copied to appear and click there The copied text appears after the cursor position If you select any text in the new position the copied text replaces it e Under the Edit menu select Paste Cuttin
115. 997 2003 2007 Portions Ken Schafer 1993 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be transmitted reproduced stored in any retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means mechanical electronic magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without prior written consent by Write Brothers Inc Trademarks Screenwriter and the Screenwriter Logo are trademarks of Write Brothers Incorporated Movie Magic is a registered trademark of Entertainment Partners Inc Dramatica is a registered trademark of Write Brothers Incorporated SmartCheck SmartTab ZapSave 14 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 1 5 QuickType iPartner Script Note Commander and PrintThing are trademarks of ScriptPerfection Enterprises WordPerfect is a registered trademark of the WordPerfect Corporation Microsoft Word is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Movie Master is a registered trademark of Comprehensive Video Software Scriptware is a registered trademark of Cinovation Inc Collaborator is a registered trademark of Collaborator Systems all others are registered trademarks of their respective holders Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 To run the program in Mac OS X simply double click on the Movie Magic Screenwriter Icon Main Menu Bar zs Movie Magic Screenwriter s Pull Down menus can be accessed from the Main Menu Bar by single click
116. Action Only 258 Text between Each Act 243 Text Editing 66 Text Entry Editing 146 Text Entry Editing Options 139 Text Only Non RTF 258 Text or Numerical Input Fields 14 Text to Precede Pg Numbers 243 Text to Speech 134 The Bottom Bar 14 Thesaurus 78 235 Thru 195 Tilde 74 Tile 22 Tile Horizontally 247 Tile Vertically 247 Timed Backup 23 Timed Backup Frequency 153 Timed Backup Icon 270 Time of Day 42 43 59 62 95 124 126 205 Time of Day Dashes 178 Time of Day List after Location Selection 147 Title 35 48 183 Title Centered 40 Title Centers the current Element 249 Title Page 26 30 120 Title Page Icon 270 Title Page Publisher 21 26 30 225 Title Page Publisher Icon 21 Title Page Template 30 to 47 Toggles Word Processing Mode 248 Toolbar 34 36 37 Toolbars Menu 143 Tools Menu 19 235 Top 232 233 270 Top Scene Continued 119 Top to Bottom 28 Top Toolbar 14 19 20 48 Tops 28 Totals of All Rounded Eighths 126 Trademarks 13 Transition 35 40 47 52 59 185 Transitions 59 62 149 179 Treat as a Sentence End in Dialogue 76 Troubleshooting 253 True Total of All Lines 126 Turn off Block 67 Turn Revision Color Off 239 TV Breakdowns 23 7 241 TV Template 31 Index 293 TV Templates 30 Type a Note 49 50 Typeface 175 Typeover 71 146 Typing Foreign Characters 74 U Umlaut 74 Un Deleting Text 70 Underline 72 117 264 Underlined 175 Underlin
117. Add Outline Element 112 233 270 Add Outline Style 107 Add Word 78 Add Words to 75 Adjust Dialogue Numbering 217 246 Adjusted 7 lines 126 207 Adobe Acrobat PDF 262 Advanced Locking Features 199 AFTERNOON 62 Alias Auto Recognition Text 64 65 Alias Text 59 64 Align Headers Footers 119 Align Horizontally 28 Align Vertically 28 All Caps 76 All OMITTED Scene Headings 239 All or Some Notes 239 Allow Dragging Outline Rows 101 Allow Typeover 20 71 146 ALT 103 ALT 103 ALT DOWN ARROW _ 66 81 ALT END 81 ALT ENTER 45 50 55 ALT HOME 81 ALT LEFT ARROW 113 ALT PAGE DOWN 81 ALT PAGE UP 81 ALT RIGHT ARROW 113 ALT UP ARROW _ 66 81 Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel 97 Alt Key Character Names 44 ANGLE ON 47 62 Animation 31 Animation Locking 214 217 237 246 Animation Numbering 215 Animation Production 214 Animation Recording Script 215 Animation Recording Scripts 120 215 A Page 201 237 A Pages 164 201 Application Icon 270 A Scene 237 A Scene Numbering 195 ASCII 258 Assigning Numbers to Speeches 215 Associate Items with Locations 240 Index 281 Associate Items with Names 240 Asterisk 163 191 Asterisk Headers 164 Asterisked Pages 120 Asterisked Speeches Only 120 Attach ScriptAs 137 AudioVisual 31 Auto Pop Up 147 AutoCapitalize 76 159 AutoCapitalize Sentences 75 AutoCapitalize the Names of Characters 75 AutoCapitalize Sentences 76 Auto Correct 75 157 Auto Co
118. As Email Attachment 219 220 Send Script 129 Sentence 6 7 set 95 Set Column Margins 55 56 Set Current Element to Right Column 249 Set Note Color 51 Set Revision Draft Color Order 203 237 Sets current element to Full Width 249 Sets current element to Left Column 249 Setup Draft Information 237 Setup Duplicate Locations 240 Setup Duplicate Names 240 Setup Menu Animation Dialogue Numbering 215 Setup Numbering Layout 246 Setup Options 75 Setup Page Layout 58 119 Setup Set List Layout Options 241 Setup Voices 134 235 SHIFT CTRL C 52 53 SHIFT CTRL F 55 ShifttCTRL N 86 SHIFT DELETE 69 SHIFT ENTER 54 SHIFT F12 74 SHIFT INS 69 SHIFT TAB 43 Shooting Script 187 Short Cut Key for File Operations 250 Short Cut Keys for Editing 248 Short Cut Keys for Formatting 250 Short Cut Keys for Inserting Manipulating Elements 249 Short Cut Keys for NaviDoc 251 Short Cut keys for Navigation 251 Short Cut Keys for Selection 252 Shortcut Keys 70 Shot 35 40 47 Shot Text 59 62 Shots 149 179 Show 50 Show Format Codes Show partner 129 Shuffle 36 Shuffle Mode 34 36 37 Shuffle Multiple Index Cards 37 Single Starting Blank Space 155 Sitcom 30 Sitcom Version 31 Sitcom Version II 31 Size 175 Skip Once 75 Slave view 131 slider 90 SmartCheck 154 155 SmartCheck Options 139 SmartCheck Prompts 156 Soft Hyphen 54 264 Sort Breakdown Primarily by 205 Sort Scenes 95 Sorted Alphabetically 127
119. BERT What was I thinking 3 Press RETURN BERT What was I thinking 4 The cursor moves to a new Action element Second Dialogue Paragraph To split up a long paragraph of Dialogue into smaller chunks you can enter it as two or more shorter paragraphs of Dialogue To enter a second paragraph of Dialogue press SHIFT RETURN twice to put in two hard returns BERT What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in I knew 1f I were drowning you d try to save me And you see you did and that s how I saved you Parenthetical With the cursor anywhere in a Dialogue element press left parenthesis Or if Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Editing tab of program Options under the Tools menu press TAB A Parenthetical element is created at the cursor location If the cursor is at the beginning of a Dialogue element the Parenthetical is placed between the Character Name and the Dialogue BERT d What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in I knew if I were drowning you d try to save me If the cursor is in the middle of a Dialogue element the Dialogue is broken by the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 47 1 8 13 1 8 14 Parenthetical BERT What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in dq I knew if I were drowning you d try to save meae Type the Parenthetical text and press RETURN The cursor m
120. Bank 138 128 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 12 1 1 12 1 1 iPartner Whether you re across the building or across the world Movie Magic Screenwriter s iPartner feature lets you and a partner view write edit and chat over the same script as if you were in the same room together iPartner requires a standard internet connection through a non proxy server on both computers and we highly recommend at least a high speed Internet connection or direct network connection although a 56k dial up connection will work See the section Trouble Shooting iPartner for more technical details iPartner major features include e he ability to allow you to view and edit a script on your partner s computer and vice versa e he ability to communicate with your partner through a typing in a chat window e he ability to speak and hear your partner requires compatible sound card and microphone only available on Mac to Mac or PC to PC connections e The ability to transfer scripts back and forth e he ability to synchronize scripts Connecting to iPartner Select the iPartner command from the Tools menu to use this powerful tool to collaborate with a writing partner over the internet When you run iPartner you ll see the following screen which displays your unique IP Address and Port Number Fach computer connected to the Internet has an IP address which is used by other computers to know where to
121. Checking this CheckBox if available imports the file slightly faster and may improve the accuracy of the import It also loses any bold italic or underline formatting Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Causes Screenwriter to normalize inconsistent line spacing and margins In most cases this produces the most accurate import However it may cause Shots to be misinterpreted as Character Names Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification Some word processors lose Capitalization Information when exporting files Checking this box tells Screenwriter to ignore Capitalization when identifying Elements Ignore Margins for Element identification Some script files have their script elements defined by their margins others by codes or Hard Returns If a script file is being imported incorrectly due to its margins not being what Screenwriter expects checking this feature may allow a more accurate import Action is in Parentheticals Check this if your import file has the Action Element in parentheses such as certain TV or Stage Play scripts Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Check this if the import file has Page Breaks and you want to keep them exactly the same in the resulting Screenwriter script 6 Click on OK to paste the imported text 7 Under Screenwriter s File menu Save your imported file under a new name Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 261
122. D from the pages that you don t want to print Non printing omitted page sign will appear page numbering will change accordingly Q The program is correcting a word that I m typing in What can do about that A Simply pause the AutoCorrection by going to the SPELL menu and choosing Pause Autocorrection and type in the word as desired and uncheck Pause Autocorrection If it is a word that you ll be using elsewhere you may want to run the spell check and tell the program to learn it OR alternatively put the cursor at the beginning of the word and press CTRL DASH which will put in a hidden code to tell the program not to autocorrect this word Q Cut and paste is slow on my machine Can I speed it up at all A Yes Goto the Tools menu select Options then click on the Misc Page and uncheck Share Clipboard with Other Windows Programs This will speed up cut and pasting by approximately 3396 but will make it so that you cannot cut text in Screenwriter and paste it into another Windows program Q I have Screenwriter for Windows on two different computers and when I load exactly the same script on both of them the page breaks are slightly different what s going on A The computers have different printers selected and since Screenwriter bases the page breaks on the selected printer s page size and printing resolution different printers can produce different results Simply select the same printer driver on both machines ev
123. E EISES Heading Pg 1 of 68 Screenwriter s new Outline feature helps you to develop organize and structure the different elements of your story You can create a hierarchical outline using the Outline Elements along with other document elements Outline Elements are similar to Notes except they are defined in a hierarchical order The Outline feature allows you to incorporate the existing hierarchical document Elements Act or Book Info scene or Chapter Info Scene or Outline Headings and Shots in the Outline The keyboard command for showing the Outline Panel in the NaviDoc is CTRL 1 Outline Panel Sync Frame When you select an item in the NaviDoc the script is scrolled to that item in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the item in the NaviDoc behaves differently depending on the type of item you select e For standard Document elements Act break scene label scene heading The Sync Frame appears around the item corresponding to the element in the document in which the cursor appears Example If the cursor is in the middle of a scene the Sync Frame still appears around that Scene Heading in the Outline Panel e For Outline Elements Sequences scene label beats notes shots and user 112 Movie Magic Screenwriter defined outline styles The sync frame only displays around the corresponding item in the Outline Panel when the cursor is in that particular Outline Element in the document
124. ECHER seces sonens Lal few sets Gop O Si id ew oon EE oona f m ussas Lal II mae Selects to the Beginning of the peer TN SHIFT Selects to the end of the Une to the end of the Line SHIFT amer Ui Selects a screen of text above the current carets position SHIFT PAGE UP Selects text to the next Page break SHIFT CMD PAGE UP Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 253 Selects a screen of text above the current carets position PAGE DOWN Selects text to the next Page break PAGE DOWN Selects text that is transversed by the Up Arrow Key UP ARROW Selects text that is transversed by the Down Arrow Key Combinations DOWN ARROW Selects text that is transversed by the Right Arrow Key Combinations RIGHT ARROW LEFT ARROW 1 15 2 8 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys Miscellaneous Short Cut Keys Spell checks the current word Opens Thesaurus Brings Up Online Help Turns on Context Sensitive Help 1 15 2 9 Function Keys GoTo Next Strikeout or colored Text SHIFT Fo Show Format Codes Lo OPTION Open Thesaurus o 5 1 15 3 Troubleshooting e Known Hardware Software Problems 254 e Common Technical Support Questions and Answers 254 e Production Problems and Solutions 26 254 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 3 1 1 15 3 2 Known Hardware Software Problems HP DeskJet printers These printers have an unprintable bottom margin of
125. Gpeeches nnne nennen nn nnne nn nnne nn sena sa sinas sina sns sa sns 170 PU SCHDCINOIGS oom idein urne tap que DOs ibasddeuaseiuarefeu ius ones wucelverrtntic dase sea csetciadades INK RM M IM LIE MN E UNDUUEd PR NUN 171 Misc Animation Dialog Prefererces 5 retener erani rin n paye ba n peYakx a kerab eta FER eFEYV KE n a FER EKY FR a apa F R risa 171 NaVIDOG Preferences TOT TTD o o DD meme 172 Outline Prefere neBS auci Demi ata eia aaia iaaa eenegen Eege 173 Script Format ODUONS eege ENEE 173 ESIGN 1 E e C 174 Options common to all script elements sessi ns nas n ss na sn sse ns 175 Sari 176 Bios mc aaa tneniaatas 177 ln TE de 177 wie Sue Te NU 178 110 e 179 ojo c 179 Mcuciqocmer 179 PCL BCA Ec 180 Ce EOE PEN 181 pol Rn n 182 COMMIS NIMM 183 Poe BICAK eebe I M 183 legis e ee 183 Break htl qe
126. Headings All Script Notes All Non Printing Text Unhide All Unhide Non Printing Text e Running Lists 4s Shows options which allow you to control automatic updating of lists of user defined items such as character names shots and transitions created as you write in the document Recalculate Dynamically Recalculate Now e Zoom Screen Text Displays the Zoom Screen dialog window allowing you to alter how large the document text displays onscreen Default is 90 1 15 1 4 1 Normal Displays the document as a continuous flow of text Page breaks are indicated by a dashed line 228 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Wonderful 6 mmsw U aA Aa i 2a Underline Uppercase Lowercase Cut Element Insert Element Carter as they go Although I shouldn t wonder when you okay reverse charges on personal long distance calls CONTINUED COUSIN TILLY George shall we hang up GEORGE 1 15 1 4 2 Full Page Displays the document as it will appear on the printed page Page breaks appear as separate pages with headers and footers displayed Wonderful 6 mmsw XO Ld 3 tins A NW Mus iW i E U aA Aa Se Save Print Undo Redo Underline Uppercase Lowercase CutElement Insert Element JEC Ee LANE pap PM SE QUEM aov un Although I shouldn t wonder when you okay reverse charges on personal long distance calls CONTINUED COUSIN TILLY George shall we hang up GEORGE u
127. Line window Headers for Spec Scripts normally contain the page number only flush right and followed by a period To insert codes at the cursor position for the following items click on their buttons e Pg Inserts the code representing the Page number To have the page number appear with a period following it e g 119 type a period after this code e Act Break Inserts the code representing the Act number for TV shows and Stage Plays To have the act number appear as Act 2 put Act in the Header e Scene Number Inserts the code representing the Scene Heading number To have the number appear as Scene 2 put Scene in the Header e Scene Label lInserts the code representing the Scene number for TV shows and Stage Plays To have the number appear as Scene 2 put Scene in the Header 118 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 11 3 2 1 11 3 3 1 11 3 4 e Date Inserts 95 the code representing the current date e Rev Color Inserts the code representing the Revision Draft Color for revised pages Flush Right Inserts the code telling Screenwriter to align the text following it flush with the Right Margin To have some items align flush left and others align flush right insert this code between them for example Act Page would place Act 2 flush left and Page 3 flush right e Underline Insert
128. Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 265 1 15 7 1 Installed Contents C Program Files Write Brothers Inc Movie Magic Screenwriter 100 SUP 1000 SUP 1071 LEX 171 LEX 200 SUP 2 1 LEX 300 SUP 37 1 LEX 400 SUP 471 LEX 500 SUP 5 1 LEX 600 SUP 671 LEX 700 SUP 771 LEX 800 SUP 8 71 LEX 900 SUP 971 LEX atl70 dll ClibPDF dll DICTEDIT EXE FILMTERM US FULL640 BAR FULL800 BAR met d IMPORTSW DAT mfc70 dll mfc70u dll mfc71 dll mfc71u dll msvci 0 dll msvcp 0 dll msvcr O dll msver 1 dll NAMEBANK FIL netpub exe paceilui dll RTF XTD Screen pdf ScwPreview exe Scwprint exe scwriter32 chm scwriter32 exe 266 Movie Magic Screenwriter scwriter32 exe manifest SWPLAYER EXE THESFILE DIC theslink dll USER US LXA WBIBase dll WORDWEB DOT WORDWEB HLP WordWeb lso WordWeb lss WPERF60 XTD WPERFECT XTD WRS32 DLL WRSPACK DLL wweb cnt wweb GID wweb16 wwd WWebUK wcm WWebUS wcm XTDLINK EXE Weblinks FAQsMovieMagicScreenwriter2000 url ScreenplaySystemsSupportSection url ScreenplaySystemsWebsite url Screenwriter Tutorials url StoryViewVisualOutliner url WelcometoDramatica url Documentation NewFeatures pdf User Manual pdf Production Bible pdf 1 15 7 2 Sample Scripts and Templates My Documents Screenwriter Documents Sample Scripts Export to Scheduling mmsw Generic Comic Sample mmsw Gosset amp Kayle Comic Sample mmsw Novel mmsw Radio Show Sample mmsw ocreen mmsw oitcom1 mmsw oitcom2 mmsw Spec Scrip
129. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 145 Drag your favorite items into the toolbar Mew Bold Cut CAP Cap Word Blue Element Styles Show Icon Only HH Wi Use Small Size Tight Scene Ze Open U Underline Fe Copy aA Uppercase Green c Preferences m hcl Save Italic Lowercase Red Ruler Lal Print 5 Strikethru ee Soe s Cut Element Ab Initial Caps Black Ed Flexible Space Er eR Find Find Next Ei ES Preview Send N if Mormal Undo LE LII EH ES ES Insert Element Promote Ch i Cap Bold Left Column 3 v Extra Colors Check Spelling Space Half Space a b Replace waa Document Layout u Redo Ce Demote E Right Column ABC i Pause Auto Correction Separator egy Word Menu Help v Thesaurus Customize Ka Normal Column Sh iPartner 146 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 3 Editing Preferences Screenwriter Preferences Editing Preferences ME rM I I ELE Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc QuickType Ei Enable QuickType Entry Ww Auto Pop Up Locations iw Auto Pop Up Time of Day v Auto Pop Up List of Character Names Pressing the ENTER Key TA Jin Dialogue takes you to a Character Name d k in Script Note adds a Hard Return La a in Transition takes you to Action Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog
130. Open Documents Export to Le Save As Template Send As Email Attachment Page Setup AER Print Preview TOP Print db P Clear File History List WI nderful D ImmsM New using Default Template Opens a new document using the default document template New from Template Opens a new document and lets you select a pre existing document template Open By default displays a list of existing Screenwriter scripts to be opened Also allows you to open files in other formats for purposes of importing Close Exits the currently displayed document prompting you to save it Save Saves the document under its current name and location without prompting you for a name Performing a Save command overwrites the previously saved version of a document with the same name If you have not saved this file it will prompt you to to specify a name and location to save the file Save As Saves the currently displayed document to a different name location or format This closes the original document and leaves open the document you just saved Save A Copy Saves a copy of the currently displayed document Selecting this menu item lets you create a copy of the document without closing the current document It is useful for creating backup copies of your working document Save All Open Scripts Saves all open files without prompting you for file names except for unsaved untitled files Automatically overwrites
131. Panel Notes Panel Bookmarks Panel Hide MaviDac e Start at last saved position lf checked it opens a script exactly as it was onscreen when you last saved it Unchecked it opens at the top of the script SmartCheck Options Screenwriter Preferences SmartCheck You should always have your script proofread before sending it out to be read preferably by someone else At the very least run SmartCheck before printing your script SmartCheck scans your script for the following common formatting errors e An element that starts with a single blank space a common typing error e Completely blank elements Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 155 e Character Names with no dialogue e A Character with two speeches in a row with no intervening text such as an Action element Any errors found are displayed onscreen for your attention or if you prefer are automatically fixed by SmartCheck Preferences Editing Files SmartGheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline SmartCheck Options vi Automatically Run SmartCheck before Printing v Beep on Found Formatting Error Delete WITHOUT prompting _ Single Starting Blank Space Completely Blank Elements Character Names without Dialogue amp Second Character Names when he she speaks twice in a row with nothing between the two speeches wi Combine OMITTED Scene Hea
132. Panel Font Font Lucida Grande sie 1259 Text ENG Fill __ Row Lines Gray M Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel Odd Bouw Text IB OddRowFill Even Row Text BE Even Row Fill Notes Panel Font Font Lucida Grande Sa Size 1 L Row Lines Thick Solid Bookmarks Panel Font Font Lucida Grande Pe Size 12 LPS Text Fil Row Lines Thin Solid The NaviDoc Options are divided into four areas e NaviDoc Options These options control the general appearance of the NaviDoc See the General NaviDoc Options section below for details e Scenes Panel Options s These options control the general appearance of the Scenes Panel in the NaviDoc See the Scenes Panel Options section for details e Notes Panel Options s These options control the general appearance of the Notes Panel in the NaviDoc See the Notes Panel Options section for details e Bookmarks Panel Options These options control the general appearance of the Bookmarks Panel in the NaviDoc See the Bookmarks Options section 84 Movie Magic Screenwriter for details 1 10 7 General NaviDoc Options v Sync MaviDoc Row with Document Zei Frame current row with this color EE o Use System Selection color for frame Flash pointer 2 8 times Quickly ES Disappear after flashing Medium fade EA Row Height FEES f Variable less wasted space d Fixed faster resizing on
133. Reverse Order Previaw Print Title Page 18 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 5 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 1 5 8 Push Buttons There are two Push Buttons displayed as rectangular boxes in the File gt Open window as shown in the example below Open and Cancel Select a Push Button using any of these methods e Moving to it with the arrow or TAB keys and pressing RETURN e Clicking on it with the mouse Selecting OK or Open in this case always exits a window accepting all of the current settings or selections Selecting Cancel always cancels a menu without changing anything Cancel E k Checkboxes vA Run SmartCheck before this print Job Print in Reverse Order An example of a CheckBox displayed as a small box either blank or with a Checkmark in it is shown in the example above titled Run SmartCheck before this Print Job A CheckBox can be checked or unchecked using one of these methods e Moving to it with the arrow or TAB keys and pressing the Space Bar e Clicking on it with the mouse e Pressing the Underlined QuickSelect Letter from the keyboard in this example r for R un Radio Buttons Gei Current Page Forwards Entire Script Selected Text There are several Radio Buttons displayed as a small circle either blank or with a dot in it on the example above The first two are Current Page and Forwards Radio Buttons are similar to CheckBoxes except that only one Radio bu
134. S Bold Italicized Underlined respectively in units of 1 10ths of f an inch Font Courier l Transitions LINES BEFORE are the number of Courier 12pts lines before the element in units nf SE 1 10ths of a line a ct Breaks INTERLINE SPACING is the spacing CH Scene Labels 1 Put Action in F thesi between lines WITHIN the element an ction in Parenthesis in units of 1 lOths of a line thus single spaced is 1 0 double is 2 0 and so on e Script Notes This is a sample Action paragraph with the current indentation settings Centered Title Outline Styles Page Breaks iv Allow words that are five or more letters long to extend Locked Scripts lor 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin m Save as Default for all new documents Use Current Font for All Elements L KE 1 13 14 1 Element Styles Format Element Styles Down the right side of the Element Styles window are buttons for displaying the unique characteristics of individual Elements e Character Names 176 e Dialogue 177 e Parentheticals 177 e Scene Headings 17s e Shots 179 e Action 179 e Transitions 179 Act Breaks 180 Scene Labels 181 Notes 182 Centered Title 183 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 175 and options for e Page Breaks 183 e Locked Scripts 185 Click on a button to display that element s options
135. Saving Lists 62 Scene 49 67 232 Scene Body Text 59 61 62 Scene Character Lists 245 Scene Continued Text 178 Scene Controls 95 Scene Element Spacing 96 Scene Header Field View 102 Scene Header View 96 Scene Heading 40 42 43 49 52 Scene Heading Text 62 Scene Heading w o OMITTED 239 Scene Headings 1 78 256 Scene Info 52 117 Scene Information 40 60 118 Scene Labels 181 Scene List 93 Scene Number 49 60 95 200 scene Numbering 225 270 Scene Numbers 178 Scene Omitted 195 Scene Range 67 Scene Range 221 Scenes 233 270 Scenes Panel 79 93 95 97 Scrap File 24 221 Screenplay 30 31 Screenwriter 6 Menus 218 Screenwriter Commands 14 Script Breakdown Sheets 124 205 script Directory 152 script elements 1 75 Script Format Options 173 Script Formats 30 Script Formats Menu 60 Script Note 35 40 Script Order 124 126 127 205 Script Title 241 Scriptware Tagged 258 262 Scroll by Row 34 scw 219 220 Search 221 Search amp Replace 221 Search Again or Search amp Replace Again 221 Search for Help On 247 Second Character Name 155 Second Dialogue Paragraph 45 Secondary Sort 206 Index 291 Secondary Sortby 125 Select All 67 221 252 Select Language 75 235 Select Names 120 Select Special 6 7 221 Select Voice 134 Select Which Color Notes to Print 50 Selected Pages 120 Selected Scenes 120 Selects Word 252 Send As Email Attachment 137 Send as E Mail Attachment 270 Send
136. Set List 243 Print Standard Breakdowns 123 204 240 Print Tagged Items 127 208 Print the Set List Directly 243 Print Title Page 120 Print to Option Window 120 Print total boxes atend of pg 241 Print without Prompting 50 Printer Setup 219 220 Printing 30 37 165 Printing a Title Page 30 Printing Animation Recording Scripts 215 Printing Index Cards 37 Printing Options 139 165 Printing the Script 113 120 Production 123 207 241 Production Breakdown Print Options 126 127 Production Breakdown sheets 204 Production Breakdowns 120 Production Cycle 186 Production Features 185 Production Menu 19 237 Production Problems 256 Production Rewrites 186 Production Sides 120 Production Solutions 237 PROLOGUE 48 62 Prologue Text 48 59 62 Promote Outline Element 233 270 Promoting 113 Prompt on Multiple Words 76 Pronunciation 134 Publish to Internet 235 Pull Down Menu 16 Push Buttons 14 18 Put Act Info in Parenthesis 180 Put Action in Parentheses 1 9 Put in Clipboard Rather than Print 243 Quick Format 74 Quick Help 247 Quick Key 20 Quick Keys 69 QuickSelect 16 17 QuickType 41 59 139 147 R Radio Buttons 14 18 Radio Play 30 31 Read Script 235 Reassign Outline Element Styles 109 Reassigning Outline Items 112 Red 239 Red Highlights 239 Redo 71 221 248 Redraw Screen 247 Reduce Indention for Unused Levels 101 Reference Page Numbers 120 Register with Writ
137. Shots List plus any initial shot text defined in the User List when you add a new Shot element Unchecked displays User List items only e Running Transition List lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Transitions List plus any Transition text defined in the User List when you add a new 150 Movie Magic Screenwriter Transition Unchecked displays User List items only 1 13 3 2 Pressing the ENTER key a in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name in Script Note adds a Hard Return in Transition takes you to Action in Action with hidden names goes to Dialogue Pressing the ENTER Key e Enter in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name If checked QuickType creates a new Character Name element when you press ENTER in a Dialogue element To go to an Action element instead press ENTER twice or press CTRL ENTER Unchecked pressing ENTER creates a new Action element Pressing the ENTER key in Script Note adds a Hard Return lf checked QuickType adds a Hard Return in a Note when you press ENTER ending the line short and taking you to another line Unchecked pressing ENTER in a Note creates a new Action element following the Note Pressing the ENTER Key in Transition takes you to Action With this option enabled when you press ENTER in a transition element then you will be taken to an Action element Pressing the ENTER Key in Action with Hidden Names goes to Dialogue With this o
138. Show Swear Words in Thesaurus With this option enabled the thesaurus will display vernacular swear words as synonyms for words like excrement With this option NOT enabled the thesaurus will not display vernacular swear words as synonyms for words like excrement Draw Text Anti Aliased Check this if you want text drawn anti aliased Note Some fonts may look better anti aliased while others may not Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses If checked treats Ellipses as a sentence ending for purposes of page breaking Unchecked pages won t be broken at ellipses Don t put at end start of broken Action With this option enabled if you have action in parentheticals and Movie Magic Screenwriter breaks an action line over a page break it will not put in an ending parenthetical on the half left at the bottom of a page nor a starting parenthetical on the half that starts the new page With this option NOT enabled if you have action in parentheticals and Movie Magic Screenwriter breaks an action line over a page break it will put in closing and starting parentheticals as if these broken action elements were each individual elements 1 13 7 2 Chat Sound Chat Sound TweetTweet This sound will play if iPartner receives a chat message and the chat window is not in front This preference controls the sound played if iPartner 128 receives a chat message and the chat window is not in front 1 13 7 3 Diskette Button on Tollbar
139. Spell Check finds no misspelled words it displays a window telling you how many words it checked Click on OK to exit When Spell Check finds a word it doesn t recognize it points to it onscreen with a large Red Arrow It also displays the Found Unknown Word window This shows the unknown word in the Word window and offers a list of suggested alternatives in the Suggestion window Option Buttons down the right side are e Replace lf you find the correct spelling in the Suggestion window click on it and it appears in the Word window replacing the unknown spelling Click the Replace button to replace it in your script also e Auto Correct Adds the unknown word and its correct spelling to the User Dictionary as a Typo which should be Auto Corrected as you type Auto Correct must be turned on to enable Typo correction e Learn Remember this spelling for future use by adding the word to the current User Dictionary USER_US LXA unless you specify otherwise All scripts that use that User Dictionary will recognize the word e Skip Once Skip over this appearance of the word but stop at the next one Ignore Skip over this word and all future occurrences Ignores the word in all scripts you check until you Exit Screenwriter or Clear the Ignore List e Suggest lf none of the suggested spellings for your unknown word are correct type a different spelling in the Word box and Click the Suggest button to have it checked Auto C
140. T The number of items in a User List is determined by Element as follows Character Names Initial Scene Text DU Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 28 1 Scene Body Text Locations Shot Text Time of Day Transitions Act Scene Info Prologue Text Tag Text End of Act Text FADE IN Text Substitution Text User Lists for Character Names amp Scene Body Text Locations are only used to supplement what Screenwriter puts on its popup list and uses in Auto Text Recognition Before Screenwriter pops up User List text for Character Name or Scene Body Text it first scans the script to find existing text in those elements Then it adds text from the User List and displays You only need to add to either of these User Lists if you e Write more than one script with the same Characters or Locations for example for multiple episodes of a TV series and want them to display automatically e Want Alias Text for specific Character Names for example typing vk to have the program enter Von Karajan e Already typed in lists of this text elsewhere such as in an outline or a separate story development program and want to re use this work User Lists for Act Scene Info and End of Act Text have Alias Text that is only used for auto text recognition The actual text is used for popup lists and for replacing the Alias Text Act Scene Info The Alias for Item A is set to NEWACT When
141. Tells Screenwriter not to break an Action element unless there are at least this number of Action lines both before and after the page break The lower the number entered the less blank white space at the bottom of a page Accepts a number between 1 and 10 with 2 as the default Not used when Sentence Ends Only is selected 1 13 14 1 13 2 Break Dialogue Break Dialogue Do Not Break Dialogue Sentence Ends Only fe Sentence Ends Preferred Maximum Lines on Page Minimum Dialogue Lines ona Page p z v Break After a Single Sentence Break two One line Sentences Do Not Break Dialogue If checked a Dialogue element is never split by a page break Unchecked Dialogue may be broken over the two pages Sentence Ends Only lf checked Dialogue is broken at the end of a sentence or between Dialogue and Parenthetical only Sentence Ends Preferred lf checked Dialogue is broken at the end of a sentence if one exists in the 3 lines before the end of where the page break falls If no sentence end is found in the last 3 lines Dialogue may be broken in the middle of a sentence Maximum Lines on Page lf checked Dialogue may be broken in the middle of a sentence in order to fit the maximum number of lines on a page Minimum Dialogue Lines on a Page Tells Screenwriter not to break a Dialogue element unless there are at least this number of Dialogue lines both before and after the page break The lower the number entered
142. Text BACK TO SCENE ANGLE ON MORNING DAY AFTERNOON EVENING NIGHT LATER CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER CUT TO DISSOLVE TO FADE OUT NEWACT Alias for ACT SAMEACT Alias for ACT NEWSCENF Alias for SCENE TEASER PROLOGUE COLD OPENING TAG END OF ACT END OF SHOW 64 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 29 1 8 29 1 FADE IN Text FADE IN Substitution Text Empty 1 8 28 7 Reloading Default User Lists If after changing any of the User Lists you want to go back to the originally installed Defaults e Under the Format menu select Load User Lists from then Original Defaults Alias Text Alias Text allows you to type an abbreviation of text as few as two letters and have Screenwriter automatically expand it to the full text for you The expanded text is formatted with its correct element format For example you could enter I as the Alias for INT in the Initial Scene Text User List When you type I on a blank line followed by a space or appropriate punctuation ocreenwriter expands it to INT for you and formats the element as Scene Heading Or add the name CAROL ANN to the Character Name User List assigning it an Alias of CA When you type ca followed by a space or appropriate punctuation it s expanded to Carol Ann for you Type CA and the same capitalizati
143. The Production Cycle 186 e Revision Marks 191 186 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 1 1 14 2 e Locked Script Options 192 e Advanced Locking Features 199 e Production Breakdowns 204 e Breakdown Sheets 212 e Export to Movie Magic Scheduling 213 e Animation Production 214 e Animation Recording Scripts 215 Production Rewrites After the final draft of a script is turned in by the screenwriter and the decision to go into production is made copies of what is now the shooting script are distributed to cast and crew Each time a change is made to the script after that everyone needs a copy of the changes Instead of sending out the entire script to everyone again only those pages with changed text are sent the revised pages Revised pages have revision marks next to those lines that have changed or revision marks in the header if most of the page has changed Added A and B and deleted Omitted scenes and pages are indicated also Each time a set of revised pages is distributed they re copied on a different color of paper to instantly distinguish them from other revisions Screenwriter can automatically generate all A Pages A Scenes and revision marks for you and gives you a lot of flexibility over how you d like your revisions to appear To begin generating revised pages you must first Lock the Page Breaks of the script Otherwise any addition or deletion to the script wo
144. This About Web Resources Check For Update 248 Movie Magic Screenwriter Web Resources Quick Help Online Reference Automatic Help Balloons Restore All Program Hints Check For Update e Web Resources Includes a list of useful World Wide Web links to assist you with using Screenwriter and screenwriting in general Edit User links command under the Web Resources allows you to enter your own screenwriting links for easy access e Quick Help Displays a Sample Script Page Move the cursor over an item to get a Hint and click on any item to get a brief Help screen e Online Reference Displays the searchable Index of the Online Help e Automatic Help Balloons When selected Movie Magic Screenwriter displays a brief description of functionality when placing the mouse pointer over icons and features e Restore All Program Hints Restores program hints to default settings e Check For Update Checks the internet for updates to Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 2 Key Assignments Short Cut Keys for Editing Short Cut Keys for Inserting and Manipulating Elements Short Cut Key for File Operations Short Cut Keys for Formatting Short Cut Keys for Menus Short Cut Keys for NaviDoc Short Cut keys for Navigation Short Cut Keys for Selection Miscellaneous Short Cut Keys Function Keys 1 15 2 1 Shortcut Keys for Editing sron carrey torea T Movie Magic Screenwriter
145. Transition takes the place of the Bottom Scene Continued 1 13 14 1 13 4 Miscellaneous Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line y Count More Line in Page Breaking Starting Page Number w v Start 1st Farced Page on Line Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line If checked a Scene Heading or Act Scene Information that is the first item on a page is placed where the Top Scene Continued would appear Only applies when Top Scene Continueds are turned on Unchecked the first element text on a page appears in the same position on each page regardless of the Top Continueds Count More Line in Page Breaking If checked the line containing MORE is considered part of the Dialogue element for page breaking purposes Unchecked only the actual Dialogue text is considered when deciding where to break the page Starting Page Number Allows you to specify a different starting page number for the script Default is 1 Start 1st Forced Page on Line Allows text on the first page of the script and all pages following Forced Page Breaks to start further down the page than the first line Enter the line number to start text on Used in Sitcom formats to start each scene about a third of the way down the page 1 13 14 1 14 Locked Scripts 1 14 The options on this page are only used during production Locked Scripts are covered in the Production Features wes chapter Production Features e Production Rewrites 186 e
146. a Dialogue element 1 13 3 1 3 Use SmartTab If checked this option allows the quick entry of recently used Character Names using the TAB key Press TAB followed by a letter and the last Character Name you used starting with that letter is highlighted in the pop up Character Name pop up list Press ENTER to enter the name in your script For example you have characters named MICHELLE LARRY LISA and LAURA in your script and the current scene features LAURA and MICHELLE When you press TAB then L the first time in this scene the drop down list might have the name LARRY highlighted Type A then U to highlight LAURA then press ENTER to have omartTab finish entering the name for you Without SmartTab enabled you ll have to do that each time you want LAURA With SmartTab enabled the next time you press TAB then L the name LAURA is automatically highlighted for you NOTE Without SmartTab enabled pressing TAB followed by a letter always highlights the first name starting with that letter If you ve added a name starting with that letter to the Character Name User List the User List name always appears highlighted See User Lists below 1 13 3 1 4 Running Lists v Running Shot List E Running Transition List Running lists are lists of user defined items such as character names shots and transitions created and updated as you write in the document e Running Shot List lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique
147. a breakdown of all scenes in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior Lists all the EXT scenes followed by all the INT scenes Location Lists by Location in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that take place in the same Location Time of Day Lists by Time of Day in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that have the same Time of Day Characters e All Lists Every Character Name in the script in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not e Some Lists Selected Character Names in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Checking this radio button and pressing OK brings up a Select Names screen Click on a name to select it and Double Click on the top bar of the Select Names screen to return to the Production Breakdowns menu NOTE If you select any Primary sort other than Script Order Time of Day Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 125 Normalization is performed any scene that ends with CONTINUOUS LATER or SAME TIME is automatically given the previous Scene Heading s Time of Day Movie Magic Scheduling File Prints a breakdown to disk saving it as a Movie Magic Scheduling import file It contains the Scene Number Scene Heading and Starting Page Number and page count in Eighths of a page Options under Secondary Sort and Miscellaneous is grayed out and unsel
148. abled if the real time spell check erroneously fixes a word by inverting two of its letters changing the capitalization or spacing and then you immediately go back and change it back to what it was before the program fixed it will prompt you with a message asking you if it should learn this word as you have restored it or whether it should simply ignore this one instance This option will only be available if the option Spell Check as you Type and Edit has already been enabled With this option NOT enabled assuming you have Auto Correct Typos enabled in the case where you restore a fix that the program has just made it will simply ignore this one case without prompting you 1 13 6 4 Beep on Unknown Words v Beep on Unknown Words Beep Sound Nane Highlight Unknown Words Beep on Unknown Words lf checked alerts you to any suspected typos that Auto Correct is unable to correct for you The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work Highlight Unknown Words f this is checked the spelling checker draws red underlines beneath words in the current element it does not know This option will only be available if the option Spell Check as you Type and Edit has already been enabled With this option NOT enabled when the real time spell checking routines find a word that it cannot correct and does not recognize it will NOT give you a visual alert Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 1
149. acters Click OK to go to the Print window with selected options Cancel to go back without 1 14 11 2 Changing the Animation Recording Script layout Animation dialogue preferences are found under Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Anim Dialog in the program Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 217 Go to Animation Dialog Preferences wes for more on this topic 1 14 11 3 Displaying Numbered Dialogue To Display and Print the dialogue speech numbering in the script as well as in the Animation Recording Script report Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Print Dialog Numbering in Script A checkmark displays next to Print Dialog Numbering in Script To turn the display of Numbering off click on it again 1 14 11 4 Locking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be locked numbering new speeches as A Speeches while reordered speeches maintain their original numbers You might want to do if you re using these numbers to relate to story boards or cells Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Lock Dialogue Numbering This causes a number for each speech to be displayed onscreen to the right of the Character Name in angle brackets e g lt 6 gt This number will not print unless you select Dialogue on the Print menu and check Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts above It is displayed for reference to show what s going to print in case you
150. ader Locking off for this script Only available in a script with Locked Pages 1 14 5 4 Converting A Pages There may be times when you want to pull out a bunch of short A Pages to combine the text or convert an A Page to a Locked Page To Remove a Locked or Fixed A Page Break e Put the cursor at the beginning of the Element following that Page Break e Press the BACKSPACE key Delete key on Mac or under the Edit menu select Remove Forced Page Break e Screenwriter will display a dialog box that asks Delete this Locked Page Break Choose Yes 202 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 5 5 e he page becomes a Flexible A Page To Insert a Locked or Fixed A Page Break in a script with locked page breaks e Put the cursor at the end of the Element that you want the page break to follow e Press CTRL RETURN e Or under the Edit menu select Add Forced Page Break e At the Page Break screen that displays select the type of page break NOTE Adding or removing Locked Page Breaks changes the numbering of all following pages Adding a Fixed Page Break will only change the numbering of Fixed or Flexed pages Combining Short Pages There may be a situation whereby in a Locked production draft you end up with a few consecutive short pages that need to be combined and show a hyphenated page number Example Pages 15 16 and 17 are short pages that need to be combined into one 15 17 page Combining the short
151. ages If checked a page in a locked script whose entire text has been omitted prints with the legend PAGE OMITTED at its center Unchecked the omitted page won t print Instead the previous page prints numbered as a run 119 120 for example Mark Element following Complete Deletion If checked puts a Revision Mark on the following element when an element with Current Revision Marks is completely deleted Unchecked there is no indication of where that deleted revised element used to be Auto Update Locked Headers on Revision If checked automatically changes an individual Locked header to the Current revision header when a new revision mark appears on its page Unchecked Locked headers are not updated automatically When printing Screenwriter prompts you to Update the Headers of all pages with revisions on them to the Current header They can also be updated manually by issuing either a Fix Headers or Remove Current Revision Marks command Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 165 1 13 9 Printer Preferences Screenwriter Preferences Printing Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline Los Print Colored Text At Fixed Distance from Bottom of Paper In Color but grey on a black and white printer Floating at Fixed Distance from Text Ignoring Color black text Production Sides Gray Background on Unselected Tex
152. alll Document FONDS ERR 152 RETAIN Previous VerSiONS EE 152 Automatic Tired BACK EE 153 dsswotd ee eh 154 When Opening Existing DOCUMGEING E 154 heuer Ses m 154 Automatically Run SmartCheck Before Printing eene nnne 155 e on Found FOr Eed Le el E 155 Delete WITHOUT DEOIIDUEE ias osusstt odi npussducd eu apae ines aeneo quss eS Coe siseo n0 eoo na Capa ea na SK e Uv evadat ath dns eu ase Focused uxo intus 155 Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks eene nennen nnne nennen nnne nnne 156 Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT M crc ne 156 Combine OMITTEDs that are Widowed on page 156 enne e ere NO o DOT 156 OPS TENS OPUONS ani M 157 Correct Double Capitals e g Mlstakel eene nnn nennen nnn nnns nana nnn rris nna nnns 157 SpellCheck as you Type and e ME 157 Alto Garrect Typos as you KEE 158 Beep on Unknown Re e eain HI OREEN OUS eb DI QR ONU due UHDE MEDI E ten TINUS SUL MMDE De de MU ae bee MU MUR RUD Ma MEN DRNEE 158 Alle e 159 MISC PISISTODEDS EEN 160 le Ee E Ree 160 Eh EE 161 Diskette Button on Mole T L c a KEAS 161 AE Be EE 162 PaO 162 REVISIONS GE 162 After Revision Marks on the Page put a Revision Mark on the Header
153. and off e Customize Toolbar 44 Clicking this opens the Customize Toolbar window This is where you can drag and drop specific icons from the palette to customize the icons in the Top Toolbar e Small Large Icons These options allow the user to choose between small or large size icons on the top Toolbar e Reset Toolbar to Defaults Clicking this sets the Toolbar to the default set of visible icons icon positions and icon size e Remove All Icons Clicking this removes all icons from the Toolbar but still keeps the Toolbar visible 144 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Default Toolbar Clicking this sets the Toolbar to the default set of icons and icon positions e Standard Large lcons Selecting this sets the Toolbar to the default set of icons at the larger size e Minimal Large lcons Selecting this sets the Toolbar to a reduced set of large icons e All Toolbar Icons Includes all Toolbar icons in the Top Toolbar Note Since the Toolbar does not wrap most of the icons are available by clicking on the gt gt icon on the far right of the Toolbar and selecting from the popup menu of icons For example lj underline f Italics pr faa cc eh A Preferences ON Customize 1 13 2 1 Customize Toolbar This command gives you complete control over what appears in the top toolbar All you have to do is drag the icons to and from the toolbar It s that simple
154. andle a Send Script Show to Partner d Ea Disconnect The top area of the chat window is the message area where you will see messages from your partner and you as well as occasional system messages The bottom area of the chat window is a text entry window where you can type messages to send to your partner The B U N style Buttons between the two windows allow you to change the style of the text you send to BOLD Underline Italics and Normal respectively The small window below the text entry window is where you specify your name as it will appear in your partner s Chat window You can change the name by simply typing a new name in this window All previous names are remembered and are accessible by clicking on the down arrow to open the popup list Send Script Document Allows you to send the current active document in your program to your partner Your partner will receive a request asking if he wants to accept the document If accepted your partner s computer will begin receiving the document During this time you and your partner will not be able to Chat with each other until your partner receives the document iPartner will then automatically put you in Partner view slave mode see below because the file is now on their computer The document now resides on your partner s computer allowing him to save and print the file Show partner This is different then the Send Document feature since it does not actually
155. ange all script Locking options in one place Uncheck Locked items individually to Unlock them Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Multi Lock Allows you to keep the existing A Page wer or A Scene 195 numbering and give new pages or scenes a new unique numbering scheme Only available in a script with Locked Pages or Scenes e Start Next Revision The Start Next Revision Command will start the next revision automatically by doing the following e Remove All Revision Marks e Fix all A Pages e Lock the Header Text e Increment the Revision Draft Color e Run the Title Page Publisher so that you can add the new color to a list e Set Revision Draft Color Order z5 Displays the Revision Draft Color window showing 238 Movie Magic Screenwriter the order in which revision colors will be used the default is the industry standard e Apply Revision Mark Adds a revision marks to the selected lines of text without modifying the text e Remove Revision Mark Removes revision marks from the selected lines of text e Fix or Flex s Advanced control of locked pages e Auto Revision zg Controls automatic revision annotation and revision page colors e Remove 2 5 Controls removal of various items in the document e Override 2 Provides specialized control over instances of production features in the document e Breakdown 2 Shows options
156. ank line after it Script Notes should be surrounded by two angle brackets like the following lt lt Make sure we keep the ages consistent gt gt Forced Page Break Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Contains exactly the following text dd Forced Page Break Edit an Index Card Scenes containing regular script elements such as Action Dialogue Script Notes etc can be edited in Index Card View To ensure that your changes translate correctly back to the script scenes follow the guidelines in the Write an Index Card table 35 Non Editable Index Cards You will not be able to edit the Index Cards if e he script contains Locked Page Breaks e he script contains Locked Scene Headings e he script contains Act Scene Information TV or Stage Play formats e he script contains non printing text and you re using Screenwriter in 16 bit mode e he script contains Outline elements on the same level or higher than the Scene level NOTE If you have Cheated any elements in a scene editing that scene s Index Card causes all cheating of all elements in that scene to be lost Shuffle an Index Card Screenwriter allows you to move Index Cards around and change their order by Dragging and Dropping them This is done in Shuffle Mode entered by clicking on the Shuffle button on the bottom right of the Toolbar Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 37 1 7 4 6
157. any previously saved versions of files with the same name Export to 22 Saves the document in Movie Magic Screenwriter older scw format as Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 221 well as non Screenwriter file format for use in other software programs such as Adobe Acrobat Microsoft Word HTML for internet publishing and others e Save As Template 3 Saves the current open document and its settings as a template def file e Send As Email Attachment en Transmits the open document to a recipient via email Use this feature to send MMSW files to other Screenwriter users or PDF and RTF files to non Screenwriter users e Page Setup Displays a window where you can select a printer and change printing options e Print Preview Displays a WYSIWYG preview of how the current page of the document will print e Print en Displays a window where you can select what to print 1 15 1 3 Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Paste into Current Element Clear Paste From Copy To Cut To Select All Select Special Insert Element Cut Element Add Forced Page Break H Pag Add Hard Return Add Dialogue Paragraph Find Find Next Replace Replace amp Find Next Replace All Change Character Name 222 Movie Magic Screenwriter Undo Takes a step back undoing the last text edit performed This option is grayed out unselectable
158. aracters along with either a Dialogue Cue preceding the speech if available or the preceding line of Action Entire Scenes that ANY of the Selected Character s is are in lf checked scans the document and finds only those scenes where At Least One of your selected characters is present Those scenes are automatically placed in the Selected Scenes window ready to be printed Entire Scenes that ALL of the Selected Character s is are in lf checked scans the document and finds only those scenes where All of your selected characters are present Those scenes are automatically placed in the Selected Scenes window ready to be printed Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts lIf checked prints dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially 122 Movie Magic Screenwriter Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only If checked prints dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially but only Revised dialogue speeches which have Asterisks in their right margin Select Names Click on one or more Character Names in this window to print their dialogue Click on a name again to de select it Select All Click on this button to select all Character Names in your document Clear Selected Click on this button to de select all Character Names you ve selected Click on OK to save your Dialogue selection and return to the Print menu or Cancel to discard your s
159. ard Return To end a line short and start a new line enter a Hard Return at the cursor position e Under the Edit menu select Add Hard Return e Or press SHIFT RETURN Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue There may be occasions when you want two characters Dialogue to appear side by side in the script For example when two characters are speaking at the same time with their dialogue overlapping CEDEGE EPNTE ACE aged I know I know I What do yoa mean it s know I think it s goma snow again Look at marvelous the headlines NOTE While Screenwriter can print Dual Column Dialogue lined up correctly it displays it onscreen sequentially The left column paragraph displays then the right column paragraph and so on Dual Columns Menu Format gt Dual Columns Select the Dual Columns menu from the Format menu and you ll see four choices Left Column L Right Column R Normal Full Width F Set Column Margins e Left Column Formats the selected element s as the left column of the dual column Hitting RETURN ends the left column formatting e Right Column Formats the selected element s as the right column of the dual column Hitting RETURN ends the right column formatting e Normal Full Width Resets the selected element s as normal non dual column text e Set Column Margins ss Dual Column margins can be customized to your preference Dual Columns Instructions To enter Dual Column Dialo
160. ard in boldface e Page Margin Settings Allows you to change the Top Bottom Left Right and Inter Card between cards margins Font Button Allows you to specify a different font for the Index Cards than for the script Times New Roman 10 pt is often a good choice as it gets more text on each card than the standard Courier New 12pt e Save As Saves Index Card layouts as separate files automatically adding the extension CRD for you Open Loads a previously saved Index Card layout Save as the Default Layout Loads the current settings every time you select Print Index Cards in the future To print all your Index Cards click on the Print All Cards button To print certain cards only 1 Click on the Select Range of Cards to Print button You are returned to Index Card View 2 The cursor changes to an arrow with a box saying Select 1st Card to Print Click on the first card you want to print and it turns a darker gray 3 The cursor text changes to Select last Card to Print Click on the last card you want to print and it also turns darker gray Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 39 1 7 5 1 7 6 To print one index card only select it as both the 1st and Last card to print The range of cards you selected are sent to the printer Creating a User Defined Format Template Formats are saved as part of the document file itself and don t need to be saved separately You can re define one o
161. area to change the title for the category group that appears for that box on the breakdown sheets Title are ALL CAPS only Category Items Each box on the breakdown sheet contains one or more production breakdown categories Click and drag the category items into the desired category group on the breakdown sheet NOTE There must be at least one category in each box Click OK to confirm changes Cancel to discard changes Export to Movie Magic Scheduling ocreenwriter can export all your tagged breakdown items for every scene to a Screenwriter Export file with the file extension SEX This file can be imported directly into Movie Magic Scheduling EP Scheduling and Gorilla by Jungle Software where breakdown information is automatically transferred to Breakdown Sheets and Production Strips enabling you to easily organize a production schedule and print strips for the Production Board To export Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Movie Magic Scheduling Export Production Breakdown Scenes Production Company Prod Title Mo Wonderful 6 mmsw l d 3 3 EXT HOUSE NIGHT 4 EXT STREET DAY 5 INT CHURCH DAY b EXT CHURCH ANOTHER ANGLE DAY Z EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET WINTER DAY amp EXT STREET DAY SINT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAY 10 FULL SHOT THE OFFICES ARE UNCHANGED STILL SMALL TIME AND OLD FASHIONED THE SAME OFFICE Selected Scenes ONLY All Scenes A
162. atically reassigned to the new style NOTE The Outline Styles options have several options that control how you can move outline elements 1 10 11 1 A Note About Copying Styles Between Documents The rules for copying outline styles between documents are very simple If the style name of the source Outline Elements copied matches the style name in the destination pasted EXACTLY the destination s style will be used If not the entire style will be copied over from the source document and created in the destination document This means if you copy a beat from a document with ten Outline Styles to a document with one outline style the beat style will be created No other styles will be copied unless you actually copy over elements with that style same as MS Word Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 111 1 10 11 2 Outlining Features jg 3 s A 4 5 x UL s Scene Heading e sok EA i AE Bookmarks Notes Outline Scenes C JOSEPH S VOICE D E Air raid Warden P A f Scene Heading k d EXT DUMP DAY 8h CLOSE SHOT Wheelbarrow full of junk being dumped onto d pile Q JOSEPH S VOICE Scrap drives EER EXT HOUSE NIGHT 6 EX CHU CR ET ITHER ANGI A END OF MONTAGE gt CLOSE SHOT man beside lighted window pulls down the shade e 7 EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET as George blows his whistle let To e E I I Sale
163. ation For example typing ext on a blank line tells Screenwriter that you re starting a new Scene Heading It automatically formats your entry as EXT and pops up a Scene Body Text User List showing previous Locations in this script These popup lists or User Lists contain text items that can be entered by typing the first letter or two instead of typing the whole text saving you time and effort Selecting a Location from the Scene Body Text User List enters it in your script and pops up the Time of Day User List Typing the first letter or underlined QuickLetter of a Time of Day enters it in your script and moves the cursor to a new Action element NOTE Transitions are an exception Any text that ends with TO is recognized as a transition whether or not the text is in the Transition User List Screenwriter can also recognize abbreviations for text that you use often Typing the first letter or two of a word tells Screenwriter to enter the full text complete with any element formatting margins etc Entering an abbreviation or Alias Text e in an element s User List lets Screenwriter know it should auto format that abbreviation using that element s settings 5 As an example you could assign as the alias text for the Scene Heading Initial Text INT Typing l on a blank line would tell Screenwriter to expand that abbreviation to INT and format the line as a Scene Heading element just as if you d typed IN
164. ation production companies want Recording Scripts print outs of dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially 1 14 11 1 Printing Animation Recording Scripts Many animation production companies want print outs of just dialogue with an incrementing number to the right of each speech 216 Movie Magic Screenwriter Under the File menu select Print A Print window displays Select the Dialogue radio button The Print window displays options for printing Dialogue Dialogue Printing Print Dialogue with Reference Page Numbers and Statistics C3 Dialogue with Cues for Actors Entire Scenes that ANY of the Selected Characters are in Kl C3 Entire Scenes that ALL of the Selected Characters are in RK SC ff SC Animation Recording Script Format Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only aaa ANNIE ed Select All ANOTHER MAN VW BERT Clear Selection BOUNCER l CARTER CHARLIE CHILDREN CHILDREN S VOICES Cancel 1 CLARENCE COP Select the Animation Recording Script Format radio button Or to print Revised speeches only select the Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only radio button In the Select Names window click on a character s name to print his her dialogue ANNIE ANOTHER MAN BERT BOUNCER CARTER CHARLIE CHILDREN CHILDREN S VOICES CLARENCE COP Or push the Select All button to select all of the char
165. ays the document page larger onscreen Cycles through 53 9396 133 173 213 253 of actual page size Zoom Out Displays the document page smaller onscreen Cycles through 53 93 133 173 213 253 of actual page size Production Breakdowns Print Window Selecting Print Standard Breakdowns from the Production gt Breakdowns menu or from File gt Print gt Production Breakdowns displays the Production Breakdowns Print window which looks like the following 124 Movie Magic Screenwriter Production Breakdowns Sort Breakdown Primarily by Secondary Sort by Script Order Script Order F3 Interior vs Exterior Interior vs Exterior Location Location FA Time of Day Time of Day E Characters All i some C Movie Magic Scheduling File Script Breakdown Sheets Miscellaneous Options KE List Characters in Each Scene _ Calculate Eighths by Sorted Alphabetically La E Standard 6 lines 1 8th J Script Order Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th Speaking Characters First C3 User List Order Display Eighths Totals by rA List Non Speaking Characters Total of All Rounded Eighths Each Group on New Page True Total of All Lines Print Tagged Items Cancel EM i 1 11 5 1 Production Breakdowns Print Options Breakdowns can be sorted before printing using Primary and Secondary Sort criteria Sort Breakdown Primarily by Script Order Prints
166. be 12A2 and so on e 2CA Choose this option if you want a new page break added and numbered as Number Letter Letter Multilock After Normal Page Determines how a Multi Lock Page inserted between a Normal Page and an A Page is numbered e 2 A Adds a Dash plus the A Letter after the page number e 2AA Adds the A Letter plus the Multi Lock Letter after the page number e A2 Flips the normal A Page numbering order Revision Mark Revision Mark Text Revision Mark Right Margin 0 8 ar Revision Mark Text Allows you to enter a character used for printing and displaying all Revision Marks in this document Default Revision Mark Text is an Asterisk Revision Mark Right Margin Specifies the distance of the Revision Mark from the right hand side of the page in 1 10ths of an inch A value of 1 0 would print 1 from the right hand side of the page a value of 0 5 would have them print 1 2 etc 198 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 4 9 Use Alternate Scene Numbering Alternate Scene Numbering Method Numbering scheme g s Standard bi Standard with Numbers J Flipped Flipped with Numbers User Defined locked A Number between 12A amp 12B 14 12 124A Multi Locked Multi Locked between 12 amp 12A Ala Jemp SHANA MSEHAANMA MANS 4 a as dC aC aT Scene Number Following Scene Number Fa hi Multi Lock Number Multi Lack Letter
167. be checked for this function to Work SpellCheck as you Type and Edit If checked Auto Correct Character Name Aliases and Substitution Text Aliases are allowed Unchecked they are disallowed and grayed out on this page 158 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 6 3 Auto Correct Typos as you Type P Auto Correct Typos as you type v Prompt on Multiple Words during Auto Correction Maximum um Iis Auto Correct Sound None He VA Query when you Fix Auto Corrected Words If checked Auto Correct corrects common letter inversion typos such as teh to the as soon as you type them The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work e Prompt on Multiple Words during Auto Correction Check this if you want to be asked what to do when a misspelled word can be corrected in more than one way If checked it gives you a choice of words when the typo could have two or more correct spellings If unchecked Auto Correct makes the decision for you The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work e Maximum Sets the maximum word length of typos to auto correct If on a slower computer set this to a lower number Screenwriter uses a default word length of 25 letters e Auto Correct Sound Sets the sound used when an auto correction is made The default setting is None e Query when you fix Auto Corrected Words With this option en
168. butes Format for Any Printer Paper Size US Letter 8 50 in x 11 00 in Orientation Scale 100 X e To select another printer scroll through the list of connected printers in the Format for popup list and click on your choice e Select a Paper Size US Letter is the standard 8 1 2 by 11 paper used for screenplays in the United States International paper size is generally A4 210mm x 297mm e Select a Paper Orientation Portrait is the standard orientation for printing 8 1 2 by 11 screenplay pages e Click on OK to save your default settings or Cancel to exit and discard changes Document Layout Document Layout gives you control over how your document text displays onscreen and prints on the page Changing margins and line spacing can increase or decrease the white space on your pages shortening or lengthening your document s page count This practice is commonly known as cheating Cheating your text by an amount that drastically changes the look of the page is not recommended It will be obvious to experienced readers that your document doesn t conform to the standard format they expect which times out to 1 minute of screen time per page For screenplays that times out to one 1 minute of screen time per page Choices you make here apply to the currently open document You can also set them as the default for new documents Under the Format menu select Document Layout The Setup Document Layout screen dis
169. buttons found on the right side of the document window Scene Numbering sc Controls the display of scene numbers in the document Scene numbers are associated with Scene Heading elements They can appear to the left of the scene heading the right of the scene heading or on both the left and right of the scene headings X Scene Numbering Off Left Only Right Only Both Left and Right Show Format Codes 140 If checked displays the hidden format codes embedded in the text of your script Hide Names in Pop Up List Displays a menu where you can hide unhide a character name A hidden name does not appear on the Character Name pop up list which appears when you press the TAB key Use for a character who s not in many scenes and whose name you don t want to always appear on the Character List Hide Locations in Pop Up List This menu allows you to hide certain Locations so that they don t appear on the automatic pop up lists of Locations used when entering Scene Headings You would generally use this function to remove locations you aren t going to use again in the script Hide Elements on Screen Shows options which allow you to hide unhide script Elements Notes by color or type and Non Printing text Unhide Elements on Screen Turns off the hidden attribute for specific elements such as notes and non printing text Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 227 Action Character Dialogue Scene
170. cal CLOSE SHOT deposit slip desk Uncle Billy looks around for 1 CLOSE SHOT Potter watching through the door POTTER to goon Take me back The goon wheels him back to his desk He is deep in thought with a crafty expression on his face Cancel Print MED CLOSE SHOT Uncle Billy running across the street in the direction of the Building and Loan Mode Outline ei shuffle Each card represents one scene Across the top of each card are two boxes the leftmost box contains the Scene Number while the rightmost box contains the Scene Heading Beneath is the scene text comprised of Action and Character Names and Dialogue if you ve entered them in your script 34 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 7 4 2 Index Card Speedbar Cards 0 O 34 36 a 12 Add Jj Ss x Cancel x Print J Across the bottom of the screen is the Index Card Toolbar with the following options e Resize the Index Cards aa e Scroll by Row e Horizontal Index Cards aa e Vertical Index Cards 34 e Add an Index Card 3 4 1 7 4 2 1 Resize the Index Cards You can change the number and the size of the Index Cards displayed on Screen To select the resize level click on one of the buttons located on the left side of the Toolbar You can display Four Six Nine or Twelve Index Cards at a time This is for display purposes only and doesn t affect how the index car
171. ce association file vaf The voices that are assigned to this document can now be used for other documents Clear All Clicking this button removes all assigned voices to the elements OK This saves all changes and returns you to your document Cancel This removes all changes and returns you to your document Assign a voice by clicking on an element or Character Name and selecting a voice from the voice popup list _ Fred Age 30 Sex Male s C Play Sample J 136 Movie Magic Screenwriter The window has voices that are divided into two categories Female Voices and Male Voices Play Sample Clicking this button plays the voice that you selected in the Voice window The voice will say a brief introduction Select Voice Clicking this button will assign the selected voice to a particular element shown at the top of the window Speak Silently Clicking this button will mute the voice of this character even though Screenwriter will still read it This will create an appropriate pause to allow a human actor character to read that part aloud The purpose of this feature is to allow a particular actor character to read interactively with the program to help them rehearse and memorize their lines Do NOT Read Clicking this button will ignore reading the chosen element or Character Name The voice shows as do not read and does not create an appropriate pause as does Speak Silen
172. ched by selecting the Scenes Tab in the NaviDoc panel The keyboard command for showing the Scenes Panel in the NaviDoc is CTRL 2 94 Movie Magic Screenwriter ELI E eo Scene Heading p X D we EE E EEN E EE E GEORGE reading Commander Harry Bailey Mr Gower look at this the second page gives them papers Now look this is for you This is for you this is for you as he leaves See you again 3 apes Notes Bookmarks Peera ato aom oaoa oal am o vomer n EXT STREET DAY MED LONG SHOT Uncle Billy is walking along the street humming happily to himself He sees some men decorating the Court House with banners and bunting there is a huge sign reading Welcome Home Harry Bailey UNCLE BILLY calls out Be sure you spell the name right NEE cn Scenes Panel Sync Frame When you select a scene in the NaviDoc the script is scrolled to the beginning of the scene in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the scene in the NaviDoc displays always when the selection is anywhere within a scene in the document 7 EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET 8 EXT STREET DAY 9 INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AN Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 95 Scene List AELSWET DAY INT CHURCH AY The Scene List displays all items in the document designated as a Scene Heading Clicking on a scene in the scene list scrolls the docume
173. control Alternately all outline levels may be Included or Excluded by selecting the appropriate option in this control The default is to Include all outline levels in the Outline Panel e f outline and document elements are set to expand collapse together Tools gt Options gt Outline this control will affect both the NaviDoc view and document view e f outline and document elements are set to expand collapse independently Tools gt Options gt Outline this control will only affect the NaviDoc view See Outline Panel Options vo 1 10 11 4 Style View Control E This control Expands or Collapses all outline elements and notes in the NaviDoc view This control does not affect the document view Outline elements and notes may be expanded or collapsed individually by clicking on their tree view control plus box or minus box in the outline list 1 10 11 5 Outline Spacing Control This control determines if there is single spacing or double spacing between scene elements in the Outline Panel Note The effects of this control are visible only when multiple Scene Lines are visible See Outline View Controls s 1 10 11 6 Outline Options Control im Deg This control opens the Outline options window where options for the Outline Panel are found Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 101 1 10 11 7 Outline Panel Options Preferences 1 Editing Files 5martCheck Spelling Misc
174. creenwriter 6 Help 21 1 5 9 5 Typeover mode whatever you type writes over the text after the cursor position replacing it Insert mode is in common use in most word processing and screenwriting programs NOTE To enable the Insert Typeover Button Allow Typeover must be checked in the Text Entry Editing area of the Tools Options window Next to that is Line amp Position information telling you where the cursor is located onscreen To the right of that is the Page Number Button which displays Current Page Number information Click on it to pop up the Goto Page menu A box on the Goto Page menu marked Goto Scene Listings appears This displays a list of Scene Headings to go to It can also be displayed by right clicking on the Page Number Button If you re writing a script with Act and Scene Information such as a Sitcom or Stage Play this button displays a list of specific Acts Scenes to go to The View Toolbar The View toolbar is located in the lower left hand corner of the document window This toolbar controls the view of your document s contents and has six view icons The NaviDoc View Icon Shows or hides the NaviDoc 7 panel The NaviDoc view has four panels useful for navigating through the document Outline Scenes Notes and Bookmarks The Title Page Publisher Icon Opens the Title Page Publisher 2e for creating the document s title page m The Index Card View Icon Opens the Index
175. ctionary for the currently displayed script e Select Language Shows options for changing your Spell Checking to a different language Use of this feature requires the installation of an optional Foreign Language Dictionary e Edit User Dictionary Takes you to Select Language then to a menu to choose a User Dictionary to edit Add delete or edit words to be used by SpellCheck or Auto Correct e Speak Selection Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to actually read your document aloud using the Macintosh s built in text to speech engine This menu item reads the selected text aloud using the voices that are assigned to the document Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 237 e Assign Voices Clicking on this feature opens a window that allows you to assign voices to elements of the document 1 15 1 10 Production Menu Unlock the Script Multi lock Start Next Revision Set Revision Draft Color Apply Revision Mark M Remove Revision Mark lt M Fix or Flex Auto Revision Remove Override Breakdowns TV Breakdowns Animation Locking Watermark Setup e Lock The Script uer Displays the Lock the Script menu allowing you to change all script Locking options in one place Default setting is to Lock all options Uncheck the items you don t want locked Only available in a script without Locked Pages e Unlock The Script Displays the Unlocking the Script menu allowing you to ch
176. d uses words to number the scenes e SCENE ROMAN If checked uses Roman numerals to number the scenes 182 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 14 1 11 Notes z Ki Display Notes in Script vi Print Notes in Script If you check PRINT SCRIPT NOTES IN SCRIPT then the nates WILL take up space and your script will become correspondingly longer Select the Color for Script Notes to be displayed in the script E d Display Notes in Script If checked displays Notes onscreen Unchecked they are hidden Unchecking Display Notes in Script automatically unchecks Print Notes in Script Print Notes in Script If checked Notes are treated as part of the script when printing changing the Page Breaks accordingly Checking Print Notes in Script automatically checks Display Notes in Script Unchecked Notes do not print or increase the script length Select the Color for Notes Clicking this button displays a Color palette Choose a color to display Notes with or create a Custom color Click OK to accept your choice Cancel to exit without changing color di Cancel Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 183 1 13 14 1 12 Centered Title Centered Title has no element specific options 1 13 14 1 13 Page Breaks Break Action Do Not Break Action Sa Sentence Ends Only fe Sentence Ends Preferred EJ c p o Maximum Lin
177. d another Screenwriter user your Screenwriter document The recipient must have Movie Magic Screenwriter to be able to open this type of file e PDF Portable Document Format This is the file format used by Adobe Acrobat Reader a popular free document utility This format will allow others to view your document as it appears in Screenwriter with the exact same formatting and page breaks The file is read print only and cannot be edited It is recommended to select this if the other party 138 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 12 3 2 1 12 4 does not have Screenwriter or you are unsure e RTF Rich Text Format This is an editable standard word processing document that can be opened in any word processor such as Microsoft Word WordPerfect etc or imported into Final Draft However this will not retain the same page breaks as they appear in Screenwriter Compose Message In This control allows the choice of email programs in which to write and send the email message with the attachment NOTE This option requires the chosen email application to be installed properly before using it to compose and send the message Name Bank Movie Magic Screenwriter s Name Bank feature is a collection of 3 900 Male Names 4 950 Female Names and 22 000 Family Names designed to help you find interesting and unique names for your characters To Run the Name Bank e Click on Tools 2 5 Name Bank and you will see a window
178. dings Separated Only by Page Breaks Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks IT Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT match 1 13 5 1 Automatically Run SmartCheck Before Printing If checked Screenwriter checks your script for errors each time you print In the Print window the Run SmartCheck before this Print Job box is also checked you can print without running SmartCheck by unchecking the box turning it off temporarily Unchecked no script checking is performed unless you manually run SmartCheck 1 13 5 2 Beep on Found Formatting Error If checked SmartCheck beeps each time it finds an error 1 13 5 3 Delete WITHOUT prompting These four options specify which formatting errors SmartCheck should fix without prompting for your decision This applies whether SmartCheck is running in manual or automatic 156 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 5 4 1 13 5 5 1 13 5 6 1 13 5 7 mode e Single Starting Blank Space lf checked deletes a single space at the beginning of a line Unchecked this error displays a prompt e Completely Blank Elements If checked deletes a line with no text Unchecked this error displays a prompt e Character Names without Dialogue If checked deletes orphaned Character Names Unchecked this error displays a prompt e Second Character Name when he she speaks twice in a row with nothing between the two speeches lf checked deletes
179. ds 75 120 Frame 84 105 From a Script 31 From Template 270 Ful Page 27 225 228 Full Page Icon 21 FULL SHOT 62 Function Keys 253 Index 285 WR General NaviDoc Options 84 General Techniques 256 Generate 245 Generate Rundown Sheet 241 Generate Set List 243 Goldenrod 187 Goto Menu 19 Goto End of Script 66 Goto Menu 232 Goto Page 20 Goto Page Menu 66 Goto Scene Listings 20 Goto Top of Script 66 Graph Breakdown 127 208 GRAY TEXT 146 Green 187 239 Green Highlights 239 Group 6 7 mm H Pa Hard Return 55 264 Hard Dash 54 264 Hard Space 54 264 Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed 50 Header 18 116 118 119 Header and Footer Setup 116 Header and Footer 229 Header Revision Mark 163 Header Text 117 243 Headers 201 256 Heading 193 Help Menu 19 247 Hide 50 Hide Elements on Screen 225 Hide Format Codes 72 Hide Locations in Pop Up List 225 Hide Names in Pop Up List 225 Hide Show a Note 49 50 HOME 66 Horizontal 34 Horizontal Index Cards 34 HP DeskJet printers 254 HTML Publishing 262 Icon 270 Ignore 75 Ignore Blank Lines 156 Ignore Margins for Element identification 258 Import 258 259 Import in Script Format 258 Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks 258 Importing a Scriptware for Windows script 261 Importing a Windows Word Processor 261 Importing Scripts 257 In All Caps 243 Include Pg Z s in Set List 243 Increase Nav
180. ds print 1 7 4 2 2 Horizontal Index Cards Vertical To display your Index Cards horizontally reading by row from left to right click the Horizontal button on the Toolbar 1 7 4 2 3 Vertical Index Cards BI vertical To display your Index Cards vertically reading by column from top to bottom click the Vertical button on the Toolbar 1 7 4 2 4 Add an Index Card Add D a A new blank Index Card can be added by clicking on the Add button on the Bottom Status Bar e In Shuffle Mode a New card is Inserted before the index card displayed at the upper left corner of the screen Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 35 1 7 4 3 e n Outline Mode a New card is inserted before the currently selected index card or the card containing the cursor Write an Index Card To write and edit the Index Cards you need to be in Outline Mode If it s not already selected select it by clicking on the Outline button at the bottom right of the Toolbar Using the mouse click on an Index Card Click on the top right box of the card to enter Scene Heading information Type INT or EXT the Location and the Time of Day You don t have to enter the full Scene Heading text You can enter any text you find useful in outlining your story such as The big showdown scene e To enter text in the main body of the card press TAB to go there e To be recognized as elements in your script text needs t
181. duction script and tells you how to solve them Page Breaks Lists common problems encountered with Page Breaks in a production script and tells you how to solve them Headers Lists common problems encountered with Locked Headers in a production script and tells you how to solve them Manual Overrides Displays the appropriate Help screens for the Manual Override of Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 257 1 15 4 1 15 4 1 Page Breaks ocene Numbers Locked Header Text Individual Character Continued Individual Page Length Total Script Length e Temporarily Disable e Locking of Pages Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Pages are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions e Locking of Scenes Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Scenes are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions Importing Documents ocreenwriter can Directly open documents saved in these formats e ASCII e RTF Rich Text Format e Final Draft RTF with Style Sheets in Rich Text Format e MS Word 2 0 6 0 and 7 0 for Windows e WordPerfect 5 1 amp 6 x files for Windows e Scriptware Tagged e Movie Master Screenwriter also supports Cut amp Paste importing directly from other Windows programs Preparing Documents for Importing No matter which format you import your document into Screenwr
182. e Bank CEri Al 4 Word Web CEr F5 Spell Check Word Chi Spell Check Element Spell Check Page Spell Check Forwards Spell Check Entire Document Pause 4uto Correction Ctrl Alt 5 Change Dictionary Select Language Edit User Dictionary Publish To Internet Register with Writer s Guild Speak Text Calendar Character Get Options iPartner Compare Two Scripts Run Smartcheck Repaginate Now Thesaurus Count Words Name Bank Spell Check Word Spell Check Selection Spell Check Element Spell Check Page Spell Check Forwards Spell Check Entire Script Correct Current Word Pause Auto Correction Clear Ignore List Change Dictionary Select Language Edit User Dictionary Speak Selection Assign Voices e iPartner This feature allows two people to view and edit the same script over the Internet e Compare Two Scripts Compares the differences between two versions of the same script when both are open in separate windows Automatically generates a third script with everything that s been added in Red and everything that s been removed in Strikeout e Run SmartCheck au The SmartCheck feature finds and corrects any common formatting errors you may have made Useful just before printing your script e Repaginate Now Forces a complete repagination screen redraw 236 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Thesaurus 7s
183. e Screenwriter H Hide Others X a8H Show All Quit Screenwriter d e About Screenwriter Opens Screenwriter s About Screenwriter window which shows the serial number version number copyright and trademark notices and credits e Preferences Opens a new document and lets you select a pre existing document template e Services Screenwriter supports the OSX Services menu which provides a handful of features writers might find useful For example if a user selects a word in their script they can do the following via the Services menu e Look up the word in Word Menu via Screenwriter Services Find in Word Menu e L ook up the word in the OSX Dictionary via Screenwriter Services Look Up in Dictionary e Let the computer speak the selected text via Screenwriter gt Services gt Speech gt Start Speaking Text e Google the word via Screenwriter gt Services gt Search With Google See OS X help for more information on this feature e Hide Screenwriter Hides the Movie Magic Screenwriter program e Hide Others Hides all programs except Movie Magic Screenwriter e Show All Shows all active programs e Quit Screenwriter Exits Screenwriter prompting to you save any open documents 220 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 1 2 File Menu New using Default Template dN New from Template AEN Open d50 Close EW Save d amp 5 Save As r a 5 Save a Copy Save All
184. e Word e Cap amp Bold Word e owercase Word When Screenwriter changes the case of existing text it retains correct capitalization for e Sentence beginnings e The personal pronoun I e Speaking Characters with Initial Capitals 74 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 9 15 8 1 9 15 9 To change the case of selected text 1 Select the text 2 Under the Format menu select Convert Case then choose the desired capitalization To change the case of an entire Element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the appropriate Element 2 Under the Format menu select Convert Case then choose the desired capitalization Quick Format of Previous Word If after typing a word you realize you want it in a different case or text format you can quickly change certain formats e Quick Uppercase of Previous Word Position the cursor immediately following the word to be uppercased Press F12 on the keyboard e Quick Bold and Uppercase of Previous Word Position the cursor immediately following the word to be formatted Press CTRL F12 on the keyboard e Quick Lowercase of Previous Word Position the cursor immediately following the word to be lowercased Press SHIFT F12 on the keyboard Typing Foreign Characters Screenwriter uses the Character set selected in Mac OS X and can correctly deal with auto capitalization for the most common accented characters To enter Accented Characters 1 Press OPTION the accent
185. e for the Breakdown category for Costume the code CS displays around the item to give CS overcoat NOTE Tags are invisible and will not print 210 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 7 3 1 14 7 4 1 14 7 5 1 14 7 6 Untagging Items Tagged items can be untagged by e Placing the cursor directly after the ending Format Code square bracket and pressing Backspace Delete on Mac on the keyboard e Placing the cursor directly before the beginning Format Code square bracket and pressing the Delete Forward Delete on Mac key on the keyboard e f no other editing has been performed since tagging the item click Edit Undo Tag Items Globally Tagging an item globally tells Screenwriter to tag every occurrence of an item in the script instead of manually tagging it each time you find it yourself This saves you time and the possibility of missing an occurrence of an item To tag an item globally Select the item by double clicking on it Or under the Production menu select Breakdown then Tag Item Globally The Tag Item Globally menu displays If you selected an item it displays in the Item To be Tagged field If you didn t select an item type the name of the item in the field here In the Tag Item as section select the radio button of the Category to which to assign the item If you want to be prompted each time Screenwriter finds the item check the Prompt on each Tagging box Although yo
186. each new group Print Tagged Items If checked prints or exports all tagged items along with the other breakdown information Breakdown Tagging Breakdown Tagging allows you to mark or tag items in your script cast members extras makeup props stunts vehicles etc and assign them to certain Breakdown categories Screenwriter can output them to either printed Breakdown Sheets or to an export file that can be read directly into Movie Magic Scheduling or EP Scheduling Breakdown Sheets give you breakdown information for each scene categorized for transfer to individual production strips Tagging Mode To start tagging script items for breakdown you need to turn Tagging Mode on e Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Tagging Mode e A checkmark displays next to Tagging Mode indicating that it s on Selecting Tagging Mode also makes Tagging Codes visible e To exit Tagging Mode click on it again from the menu The checkmark disappears and Tagging Codes are no longer visible Tagging Items With Tagging Mode on select a text item to be tagged an overcoat for example by double clicking on it with the mouse Only text in Action Note or Outline elements can be tagged A Breakdown Category screen displays Click on a category to assign the item in which to assign the item for the overcoat Costume is the appropriate category A Format Code is placed around the item displaying an abbreviated cod
187. eaking Characters 3 Total of All Rounded Eighths em Each Group on New Page True Total of All Lines Print Tagged Items Cancel 1 14 6 1 1 Sort Breakdown Primarily by Sort Breakdown Primarily by fe Script Order Pu Interior vs Exterior Location CJ Loca _ Time of Day u 8 C Characters All Some p Movie Magic Scheduling File JL Script Breakdown Sheets Script Order Prints a breakdown of all scenes in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior Lists all the EXT scenes followed by all the INT scenes Location Lists by Location in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that take place in the same Location Time of Day Lists by Time of Day in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that have the same Time of Day Characters e All Lists every Character Name in the script in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not 206 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Some Lists selected Character Names in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Checking this radio button and pressing OK brings up a Select Names screen Click on one or more name s to select them then Double Click on the top bar of the Select Names screen to return to the Production Breakdowns menu NOTE If you select any Primary sort other than Sc
188. ectable e Script Breakdown Sheets Prints breakdown sheets that include any items you ve tagged in Breakdown Tagging Checking this radio button and clicking on the OK button displays the Production Breakdowns scene selection screen here you can enter the Production Company name and Production Title No to print on the breakdown sheets and select which scene breakdowns to print e Selected Scenes ONLY If checked only breakdowns for the scenes you select by clicking on them are printed e All Scenes If checked breakdowns for all scenes in the script are printed e All Scenes except OMITTEDs If checked breakdowns for all scenes except those deleted and marked with an OMITTED are printed e Setup Breakdown Sheet Clicking on this button displays the Breakdown Sheet Layout screen Category headings on the windows can be renamed by highlighting the name CAST STUNTS etc and typing in your preferred name Categories of tagged items Cast Members Greenery Vehicles etc can be moved between Category windows by dragging and dropping Click on OK to exit and save your changes Cancel to discard changes and exit 1 11 5 2 Secondary Sort by Example Secondary sort order allows you to specify how you want the scenes sorted within the Primary groupings of Interior VS Exterior Location Time of Day or Characters For example Interior VS Exterior as the Primary sort and Script Order as a Secondary sort would give this kind
189. ection 67 Movie Magic Scheduling 124 205 212 Movie Magic Scheduling Export 240 262 Movie Master 258 Moving Text 68 MS Word 258 Multi Lock 237 Multi Lock Dialogue Numbering 21 7 Multi Lock Pages 197 Multi Lock Scenes 196 Multi Locked 194 200 Multimedia 30 31 Multimedia Options 139 Multiple Revision Marks 214 N Name Bank 138 Name Bank 235 Names 138 NaviDoc 21 79 80 81 88 93 98 108 172 225 270 NaviDoc Keyboard Commands 81 NaviDoc Menu 19 82 233 NaviDoc Options 83 139 172 270 NaviDoc Outline Styles 105 NaviDoc panel 79 81 NaviDoc Preferences 233 NaviDoc splitter 80 NaviDoc View Icon 21 Navigation Pointer 81 New using Default Template 219 220 New Act 48 New Bookmark 233 270 New Color Category 87 New Extension 44 New File 24 221 New from Template 219 220 New Note 233 270 New Outline Style 105 New Scene 49 NEWACT 48 60 62 NEWSCENE 49 60 62 Next 119 Next A Page 232 Next character 66 Next Current Revision Mark 232 Next Element 66 Next Forced Page Break 232 Next Hidden Text 232 Next Line 66 Next Note 232 Next Row 233 270 Next Scene 66 Next Scene Heading 232 Next Screen 66 Next Script Page 66 Next Speech By 232 Next Strikeout or Colored Text 232 Next Word 66 NIGHT 62 No Page s 243 Non Editable Index Cards 36 Non Speaking Characters 208 Normal 73 195 225 227 Normal Full Width 55 Normal Order 120 Normal View
190. ective categories with a separate page for each scene If you re doing production strips by hand you ll be transferring the information on each breakdown sheet to a separate strip If you re exporting to Movie Magic Scheduling or EP Scheduling it s preferable to do the breakdown sheets there as you ll also be adding more detailed Crew information Layout Breakdown Sheets To change the page layout of Screenwriter s Breakdown Sheet Under the Production menu select Breakdowns then Layout Breakdown Sheets This window displays each category group box that appears on the breakdown sheets along with the categories that are in them Layout Breakdown Sheets iii oem m nuam cmm Emer CAST pen STUNTS ema Cast Beer BENED Etras SET DRESSING DRESSING Greenery Set Dressing SPECIAL EFFECTS IAL EFFECTS PROPS sts VEHICLES VEHICLESZANIMALS ANIM ALS Optical Fs Props Animal Hand ler Special Fa Livestock Vehicles WARDROBE MAKEUP MAKEUP HAIR SOUND FX HUSIC o Mus ic Sound SPECIAL EQUIPMENT IAL EQUIPMENT PRODUCTION NOTES NOTES Mechanical Fr Additional Labor Special Equipment Misc Motes Security Category Group Titles Click into a title area to change the title for the category group Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 213 1 14 9 that appears for that box on the breakdown sheets Title are ALL CAPS only Category Group Titles Click into a title
191. edit select Undo before selecting any other editing command Under the Edit menu select Undo Screenwriter has a multi level undo capable of undoing up to the last 99 text editing changes you made It can undo cutting amp pasting blocks search amp replace and more Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 71 1 9 13 1 9 14 ocreenwriter recognizes three basic types of editing e Adding text including Pasting e Deleting text including cutting deleting blocks e Global processing such as search replace or reformatting Screenwriter s default Undo Level is 99 To change the Undo Level 1 Under the Tools menu select Options 2 Click on the Text Entry Editing button 3 Enter a number between 0 and 99 in the Undo Levels box The Undo Level must be set to a number between 1 and 99 to enable the Undo command Setting it to O will cause Undo and Redo to not appear on the Edit menu 4 Click on OK If Screenwriter can undo the changes Undo on the Edit menu is selectable If Undo is grayed out Screenwriter cannot undo your text editing NOTE For the purposes of Undo each mouse click that you make is considered a text edit The Undo function merely un clicks it which results in no change Setting the Undo Level to a higher number gives you a greater likelihood of being able to reverse a text edit Redo To restore a text edit you ve just Undone Under the Edit menu select Redo Insert Typeover
192. el after Act Break lf checked Scene Labels is automatically put in the script directly after Act Information as in Sitcoms Unchecked Scene Labels are not added as in MOWs NOTE The Use Scene Labels in Script setting does not update existing Act Scene Info this will stay the way you entered it unless you manually change it It only changes the appearance of future Act Scene Label you create after changing the setting To change existing Act Scene Label use the Search amp Replace command Put Scene Labels in Parenthesis If checked puts Parentheses around the Scene Label text as is required in some TV Sitcom formats Center S Info lf checked all Scene Label text is centered horizontally between the Scene Label margins Unchecked Scene Label text starts at the Scene Label left margin Put in SCENE If checked displays the word SCENE along with Scene Numbers Unchecked Scene Numbers display alone Number Scenes Continuously If checked Scenes are numbered continuously from first to last Unchecked Scene Numbering restarts at 1 from each Act Break Starting Number Allows you to enter a Scene Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 Numbering Scheme Lets you choose how Scenes are numbered from one of the following schemes e SCENE A f checked uses letters to number the scenes e SCENE 1 NUMBERS If checked uses numbers to number the scenes e SCENE ONE If checke
193. elect 1 Select a word 2 Under the Spell menu select Thesaurus 3 The Get Synonyms window opens with the selected word in the Head Word window In the Synonyms window below is a scrollable list of like words Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 79 4 Click on the word you prefer and it appears in the Head Word window along with its alternative words Click on Replace to put the word in the Head Word window in your script in place of your original word eo Head Word Verb views eyes spots notices glimpses spies discerns distinguishes 1 10 The NaviDoc The NaviDoc Thesaurus DN fe kh Synonyms Cancel j 8 Ki E Verb beholds grasps observes comprehends witnesses understands perceives More gt gt The single biggest new feature in Movie Magic Screenwriter is the NaviDoc The name comes from its function NAVI gating the DOC ument Like its name implies the NaviDoc lets you move quickly around your document Outline Notes M TEM M eee cB M UM 61 EXT SIDEWALK NIGHT 65 EXT THEATER NIGHT lt i diii Seege i 3 teg Se ES a m Scene Heading Line 11 Pg ED en e 68 a Bafa SaL E EE EH m a ll Lr f Mary Mary WIPE TO EXT RESIDENTIAL STREET NIGHT CLOSE SHOT George s wrecked car is smashed against the tree He co
194. elect Next Current Revision Mark from the GoTo menu e Are the only revision marks used to select pages to print when you select Asterisked Pages under the Print menu To Lock Current Revision Marks Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Lock Current Rev Marks Once the Current Revision Marks are locked they become Locked Revision Marks Locked Revision Marks Are former Current Revision Marks which have been Locked Animation Locking does the following e Converts all Current Revision Marks into a code appropriate for the Revision Locking Level e Embeds this code in the text where the Current Revision Mark previously was located e Increases the Revision Locking Level To Display Locked Revision Marks Under the View menu select Show Format Codes Locking Level is indicated by the number of asterisks on the line that has been edited e g Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 etc To Decrease a Locking Level Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Unlock One Rev Mark Level 1 14 10 3 Assigning Numbers to Speeches Animation Scripts often have each Dialogue speech numbered for ease of identifying each speech for recording sessions editing and so on Animation dialogue numbering preferences are found under Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Anim Dialog in the program Go to Animation Dialog Preferences e for more on this topic 1 14 11 Animation Recording Scripts Many anim
195. elected bookmark This command does not affect the document text e Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled 1 10 9 3 Bookmarks Panel Options The options for the Bookmarks Panel can be displayed by clicking the NaviDoc Preferences show icon button in the Bookmarks Panel You can also click on Tools Options NaviDoc to display them Bookmarks Panel Font Font Lucida Grande 7 Size 12 L Text MEME Fill Row Lines Thin Solid Bed NN e Bookmarks Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the bookmarks list They include the font face font size font color and font background color e RowLines This option controls the appearance of the line that separates the bookmarks in the bookmarks list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid and Groove This option also has a control for the color of the Row Lines 1 10 10 Scenes Panel The NaviDoc Scenes panel replaces the Scene Pilot feature in earlier versions It is used to move through your document quickly The Scenes panel is rea
196. election e Character List lf selected prints an alphabetical list of all Character Names in the document e Scene List lf selected prints a list of numbered scene headings in script order e Production Breakdowns H selected displays the Production Breakdown Print menu when you click on the OK button See the Production Breakdown Print menu section below e Notes JH selected prints all Notes with the page numbers they appear on When you click on the OK button a Notes Print menu displays Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Prints a separate Notes report of all notes listed in sequence with the page numbers they refer to Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed document Prints each Note opposite the page it refers to on the back of the previous page Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed Only asks you to insert the page preceding a Note so it can print the note for the following page Requires you to insert pages one at a time Print without Prompting requires you to insert entire script Requires you to insert the entire script including a Title Page Screenwriter only prints on those pages that have a Note on the following page Select Which Color Notes to Print lf you have more than one color of Note in your document check the colored boxes for the notes you want to print e Revision lf checked prints pages based on your selection v Asterisked Pages WHITE
197. ellaneous SHOMCUE E 253 aVat in BEE 253 TrOUBDICS e du Te t 253 Known Hardware Sottware Oe E E 254 Common Technical Support Questions and Answers nennen nenne nennen nn nnns nnns 254 Production Problems and SOMWMONS E 256 importing Documents RES EEN EE 257 Preparing Documents for IPADOFUDQ MEET 257 DECIMO s aaraa S A E EE E A E E E E E 258 Cun and Paste IMPON EE 259 Importing a Macintosh Word Processor scnpt nennen nnne nnne nnns na nnns nan nns 261 Importing a Scriptware Tor ele Ee EE 261 Cleanirig up Wuere Rei Soc Tasted aar Nin n a0 tuc gas pau pas EAEAN sn ket AEKA Bos Stab asi usu pte lac nm EE uut RE eE SE 261 Exportirig DOCUMONS sisirin E oca EE a Ou sus rub a Dave Fue aiaa andaa 262 E deis A 262 Importing a Screenwriter EXPO E de EE 263 Cut and Paste EXPONO siraan I 263 Format e EN 264 Piles Juste Mee 264 eieencglcT 265 Sample Scripts and WR E le 266 eau ue B 269 16 New Features in Screenwriter 6 0 1 eeceeeeeieeeeeiieeeni eene ne nenne nhanh anna nuns RRE 269 Ne EEGEN UU LIT 270 Screenwriter 5 0 Men Changes geed 270 New Fi
198. emoves the last Locked Revision Marks and decreases the Revision Mark Level Lock Dialogue Numbering Locks the Dialogue Numbering so that any new speeches are added as A Numbers If Dialogue is already Locked it will Multi Lock the numbering so new speeches are added as AA Numbers e Unlock Dialogue Numbering Decreases Dialogue Locking from AA Numbering to A Numbering or from A Numbering to Unlocked Dialogue Numbering e Adjust Dialogue Numbering Adjusts overrides the numbering of the Dialogue speech that the cursor is currently in Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 247 1 15 1 11 Window Menu Minimize Zoom Bring All to Front Cascade Tile Cycle F6 xX Wonderful 6 mmsw 1 e Minimize All Minimizes shrinks to icons at the bottom of the window all open document windows e Zoom Expands the active document window to its largest standard size e Bring All to Front Brings all document windows in front of all other visible application windows e Cascade Cascades shrinks and overlays at an offset all open document windows e Tile Tiles shrinks and stacks all open document windows e Cycle Cycles through the open document windows e lt FileName gt Lists the Names of all open script windows with a checkmark by the currently displayed document Select one to make it the active open window 1 15 1 12 Help Menu Contents Fl Search For Help an Quick Help Alt F1 what s
199. en if one or the other is not hooked up to that printer and then they will match Q I want to move my scenes around in a locked production script is there an easy way to do it A Switch to Index Card View mode and shuffle your scenes as desired Q Our locked production script was broken into two parts how do we merge it back together without creating unnecessary A scenes and A pages A Open the first part of your script place your cursor at the place where you want to add the second part select Paste From under Edit menu and the file that contains the second part of your script Q have made some changes in the Top Toolbar Editor and than restored my Screenwriter for Windows from the Windows 95 Taskbar but the changes were not there what did do wrong A You have to close and restart your Screenwriter for Windows for the changes to take effect Q have cut some of my text and than continued working on something else when I wanted to check that cut text in my Clipboard Viewer and got the message Cannot display Data in clipboard in an unknown format why A You have to check Share Clipboard with Other Windows programs under Misc In Tools gt Options menu Q Yellow background in my Notes makes the text in them hard to read can change the background color 256 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 3 3 A Go to Format menu select Element Styles and than Notes change color as desired
200. ent 92 Movie Magic Screenwriter H Cousin Eustace ENTRANCE NEEDS DIALOG WORK The sync frame disappears if you move the text cursor out of the paragraph in the document pointed to by the bookmark Cousin Eustace ENTRANCE NEEDS DIALOG WORK i 1 10 9 1 Bookmarks List Cousin Eustace ENTRANCE NEEDS DIALOG WORK The Bookmarks list shows a list of bookmarks you have added to your document Clicking on a bookmark moves you to that point in your document Double click on a bookmark in the list to edit its description 1 10 9 2 Bookmarks Controls Outline Scenes Notes f Bookmarks 1 d Add Bookmark Edit d Remove 5 There are several controls in the NaviDoc Bookmarks Panel e Add Bookmark Adds a new bookmark to the list in the Bookmarks Panel When created the bookmark grabs the first twenty five characters of the element where the cursor is located in the document and allows the bookmark description to be edited If desired change the bookmark description by typing the new text over the old Otherwise hit Return or click somewhere else to confirm the bookmark The keyboard command for adding a new bookmark is CTRL ALT B e Edit Highlights the description text of the selected bookmark to allow it to be modified or completely changed Double clicking a bookmark also allows it to be editied Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 93 e Remove Permanently deletes the s
201. entered followed by the appropriate End of Act info If you would like to change End of Act Text to say something different you can change this Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 49 1 8 16 5 1 8 17 1 8 17 1 line by selecting Format gt User Lists to open the Edit User Lists window Then click on the End Of Act Text button and follow the on screen instructions to change the text You can also use this same window to change the way Screenwriter ends the document Instead of End of Show you can insert a different word for Show in the B field NOTE Screenwriter inserts End of Show in your document only if you have specified the last act You set the last act by selecting Format gt Element Styles to open the Element Styles window then click on the Act Breaks button At the center of this window towards the bottom is a field called End of Show Follows Act Enter the number of the last Act in this field New Scene To start a New Scene Type NEWSCENE at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter centers it and changes it to SCENE where is the new Scene Number A forced page break will not be entered Or at the Scene Heading Initial Text Pop up List select Start New Scene A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate New Scene info Or press RETURN while in an Act Info Line and Screenwriter puts in the appropriate New Scene Info for you To use this feature Use Scene
202. enu it lists all the open documents Simply click on your scrap file and the document will display If you would like to keep the scrap file simply go to the File menu and click Save Cut to Cuts the selected text removing it from your script and saving it in a new file e New File Removes selected information from the original document creates a new file puts the selected information within it and allows you to name the file before the program saves it Screenwriter keeps the original document open To retrieve the new file you must go to File Open Existing File Removes the selected information from the original document and copies it to a script that already exists Choosing this option brings up a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the file that you would like this text to be pasted to Select the file and click open Screenwriter pastes the text to the end of the document and closes the file Your current script will remain open Scrap File Creates a new file with the same name as your current document but at the end will have scrap The file that it creates will have the same name of your current document but at the end will have scrap You can find this document by going into the Window menu At the bottom of this menu it lists all the open documents Simply click on your scrap file and the document will display If you would like to keep the scrap file simply go to the File menu and click Save 3 Give the n
203. er s Cheat an Element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the element to be cheated 2 Under the Format menu select Cheat then Element Or press CMD 3 Make the desired changes to e Left and Right Margins e Lines Before the element 58 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 27 2 1 8 27 3 1 8 27 4 e nterline Spacing spacing between lines of text in an element e Text Formatting bold italic underline etc e Font Type and Size e Character Continueds Cheat Page Breaks To keep text together instead of splitting it over a Page Break you can cheat the Page Break Put the cursor anywhere in the element to be cheated on the first page of the two pages that it appears on Under the Format menu select Cheat then select one of the options e keen Element Together prevents the Element that the cursor is in from being broken e Keep Group Together keeps all elements in the current Group for example Dialogue Character Name or Scene Heading Action together over a page break e Keep With Following Keeps all elements in the current Group for example Dialogue Character Name or Scene Heading Action along with the Element that follows them together over a page break A checkmark displays next to the selected cheat option To allow Screenwriter to break an element which you ve previously told it not to uncheck the cheat option by selecting it again Cheat a Page 1
204. er s Guild 235 Reloading Default User Lists 64 Remove 245 Remove Forced Page 221 Remove Forced Page Break 54 Remove 237 239 Reopen 2 0 Reopen 219 220 Repaginate Now 235 Replace 75 Reset Cheated 229 Resize 34 Resize the Index Cards 34 Restore Last Workspace 23 Retrieve Last Script you worked on 23 Rev Color 117 290 Movie Magic Screenwriter Reverse order 120 Revised Pages 190 Revision 164 190 Revision Draft Color 187 203 Revision Mark 163 164 191 197 Revision Mark Right Margin 197 Revision Mark Text 197 Revision Marks 163 192 214 Revisions 162 Revisions Options 139 Rich Text Format 258 262 Right 28 178 RIGHT ARROW 66 Right Click 67 Right Column 55 Right Demotes row 101 Right Speed bar 14 Right SpeedBar 19 20 Right Toolbar 49 right vertical slider 90 Roman Numerals Il Ill lll 118 Rounded Eighths 208 Row Height 84 Row Lines Option 89 93 97 101 RTF 137 258 Ruler 140 225 Run SmartCheck 120 235 Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 14 Running Movie Magic Screenwriter6 14 Running Shot Lists 149 S oalmon 187 SAMEACT 48 62 Sample Scripts and Templates 266 Save 24 219 220 250 Save a Copy 2 0 Save A Copy 219 220 Save All Open Scripts 24 219 220 Save As 37 Save as Template 270 Save As Template 39 Save As Template 219 220 Save as the Default Layout 37 Save As 250 Save As 24 25 219 220 Saving a Document 14
205. ere dE EEN 84 Notes GC 7 RE 85 NOROS CIST Rc 86 NOLES CONTOS EE 86 Notes Command Ei e 86 NOES Category CONN Ol E 87 Note Category Drop Down List Control 87 Show Hide Category View in Navifoc nnne nnn nennen nnn nnns nna nnn n rris en arr n nnns nnne nnn ris 88 Show Hide Note Categories in Document 88 le A ez ONIO M TR 89 Notes Opions CONN M 89 Notes Eolo T CI rm 89 Wae CONTO ON OT c 90 een tre c 90 Bookmarks Panel getest 91 ses rca de 92 eegen El Ce ee E 92 elei CA Panel ion 93 Scenes Panel 93 GSTS L ONO ee EE EE EE 95 ENEE s pire eege UU m 95 SCENE Element opac ng En e TEE 96 Scene Header VIEW Ae n 96 ovne Contool J0 OM T 96 wel Panel OPUN EET m ttem 97 Scene LISE e nde MC 97 eiim A 98 SIGI qM
206. ere the dialogue numbering has been Multi Locked Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable Override this Speech s Numbering Specifies which Normal number this speech should be given Accepts a number between 1 and 4096 Only available when the cursor is in a Normally numbered speech or in a script that has Locked or Multi Locked Dialogue Numbering Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable NOTE If you change the Normal Dialogue Numbering order either by switching a Normally numbered speech to an A or AA speech or vice versa you ll be given the option to adjust all following speeches so that two speeches aren t assigned the same number Appendices e Screenwriter 6 Menus 218 e Key Assignments e Troubleshooting 253 e Importing Scripts 257 Exporting Scripts 262 Format Codes ze Files Installed 264 Utility Programs Screenwriter 6 Menus File Edit View Format Goto PMaviDac Tools Production Window Help The main menu bar has ten menu topics in it Click on the menu topic in the bulleted list below to see more about that topic e File Menu 219 e Edit Menu 221 e View Menu 225 e Format Menu 229 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 219 e Goto Menu 232 e NaviDoc Menu zap e Tools Menu 235 e Production Menu 237 e Window Menu z7 e Help Menu a 1 15 1 1 Screenwriter Menu About Screenwriter Preferences Services Hid
207. ertain unique needs that Screenwriter addresses with the following unique features Movie Magic Screenwriter has some great features designed specifically for Animation Production Assigning Each Speech a Unique Number Locking the Speech Numbering Multiple or Locked Revision Marks 2 4 Printing Just Dialogue 1 14 10 1 Multiple Revision Marks With much animation being produced overseas production companies are having to fax revised script pages to their production studios As fax machines transmit in black and white the usual means of identifying sets of revisions by printing them on different colored pages doesn t work To solve this problem a multi revision mark standard has been introduced The first day s revisions have a single asterisk the second day s revisions have two asterisks and SO On Screenwriter handles this with a Revision Locking Count which you increase by locking the Current Revision Marks 1 14 10 2 Locking Current Revision Marks Screenwriter produces two types of Revision Marks Current Revision Marks and Locked Revision Marks Current Revision Marks e Are either entered automatically by the Auto Revision function Apply Revision Mark Ctrl M or by pressing the Asterisk key e Are the only revision marks removed by selecting Remove Current Revision Marks Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 215 under the Format menu e Are the only revision marks found when you s
208. es the paste text before copying or cutting text from the script the program will try and paste whatever is in the Masters clipboard from a previous application into the script with 132 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 12 1 5 1 12 1 6 unpredictable results IMPORTANT While all of the keys listed below will work in slave mode some of them may cause popup list s to appear on the Master s computer if the Master has QuickType text entry turned on In order for the Slave to use the Quick Key s to change elements efficiently the Master must go into the Tools menu and change the Options Clicking the QuickType button allows the master to turn off all Auto Pop up and Running List options This enables the Slave to use the Quick Keys Editing Keys in iPartner e Tab Key Puts in Character Names regardless of where the cursor is in the document e Enter Key Takes you from one element type to another i e pressing ENTER while in Character Name will take you to dialogue while in Transition will take you to Scene Heading etc e Left Parenthesis Key Puts you in a Parenthetical when pressed while in Dialogue This key adds a Character Extension if pressed while in a Character Name e CTRL B Turns Bold on off e CTRL E Puts you into a Scene Heading with EXT and a space already typed in for yOu e CTRL I Puts you into a Scene Heading with INT and a space already typed in for you e CTRL O If you aren
209. es on Page Minimum Action Lines on a Page 3 Break Dialogue a Do Not Break Dialogue ZS Sentence Ends Only Sentence Ends Preferred a a Maximum Lines on Page Minimum Dialogue Lines ona Page 3 Break After a Single Sentence Break two One line Sentences f Allow Transition as 1st line on Page fe Allow Transition on CONTINUED line Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line Count More Line in Page Breaking Starting Page Number 1 4 l a v Start 1st Forced Page on Line 1 13 14 1 13 1 Break Action Break Action O 5 E ZS Do Not Break Action Sentence Ends Only Gei Sentence Ends Preferred gU S o Maximum Lines on Page Minimum Action Lines on a Page 93 S Do Not Break Action lf checked an Action element is never split by a page break Unchecked Action may be broken over the two pages Sentence Ends Only lf checked Action is broken at the end of a sentence only Sentence Ends Preferred lf checked Action is broken at the end of a sentence if one exists in the 3 lines before the end of where the page break falls If no sentence end is 184 Movie Magic Screenwriter found in the last 3 lines Action may be broken in the middle of a sentence Maximum Lines on Page If checked Action may be broken in the middle of a sentence in order to fit the maximum number of lines on a page Minimum Action Lines on a Page
210. eters 1 15 1 4 View Menu x Normal Full Page v NaviDoc Title Page Publisher Index Cards Toolbar Icons v Ruler v Right Element Buttons Scene Numbering Show Format Codes Hide Names in Pop Up List Hide Locations in Pop Up List Hide Elements On Screen Running Lists Zoom Screen Text The View menu controls the display of various windows and controls e Normal zz Displays the document as a continuous flow of text Page breaks are indicated by a dashed line Example 227 e Full Page 228 Displays the document as it will appear on the printed page Page breaks appear as separate pages with headers and footers displayed Example 228 226 Movie Magic Screenwriter e NaviDoc 7 Displays a panel to the left of the document Like its name implies the NaviDoc lets you navigate quie around your document The NaviDoc has four panel tabs Outline oe Scenes s Notes s and Bookmarks o Title Page Publisher 2 Displays the Title Page Publisher for WYSIWYG Drag n Drop creation of Title Pages Index Cards 33 Switches to View as Index Card Mode Toolbar Icons 45 Control the display of the Toolbar and Toolbar icons that appear at the top of the document window Ruler an H checked displays the horizontal page Ruler showing Element margins Right Element Buttons Jr checked displays the insert element
211. etically C3 Script Order AS Speaking Characters First C User List Order rA List Non Speaking Characters Each Group on New Page Gd Print Tagged Items List Characters in Each Scene lf checked lists all the characters whether they have dialogue or not directly underneath each Scene Heading in the breakdown Listing options are e Sorted Alphabetically lIf checked lists characters in each scene alphabetically e Script Order If checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they appear e Speaking Characters First lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they speak in that scene followed by character with no dialogue Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 209 1 14 7 1 14 7 1 1 14 7 2 e User List Order lIf checked lists characters in each scene with those from User Lists first then all others alphabetically List Non Speaking Characters If checked gathers the names of non speaking characters from the Action element and uses them in Breakdowns and Movie Magic Scheduling export files NOTE The Breakdown may pick up the name of a Non Speaking Character as being in the Scene even when he s not though the name appears in the Action element Override this error by tagging the name to be ignored Put the cursor immediately before the first letter of the name and press CTRL Control hyphen Each Group on New Page lf checked starts a new page for
212. ew file a different name Click on OK to save it If you selected Copy To clicking on Cancel discards the new file and leaves your text intact in your original script If you selected Cut To clicking on Cancel discards the new file and leaves your text on the Clipboard but removed from your original script You still need to Save it to another file or Paste it back into your script otherwise you have deleted the text Merging Documents There may be occasions when you want to combine two scripts into one file such as when two writing partners are writing different scenes of the same script To merge the scripts 1 Open the first script the one you want to merge into 2 Place the cursor at the position you want the second script to be added The new Pasted From text will appear after the Element the cursor is in 3 Under the Edit menu select Paste Special and then select Paste from 4 At the menu of scripts displayed select the script to merge from Click Open to combine the two scripts 26 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 6 Screenwriter prompts you about how you d like to format the incoming text The two scripts are merged To Cancel the merge close the merged file without saving it To keep a copy of the first file unchanged save your merged file under a different name using Save As under the File menu NOTE f you merge a document that is tagged it will have squares on either side of the
213. ewable the minimum number of lines allowed Moving the slider down increases the number of viewable lines NOTE The maximum number of lines viewable is determined by the scene content Set number of Outline item lines middle vertical slider This men sets the number of viewable lines of each outline element in the outline list The default position of the slider is all the way up and corresponds to one line viewable the minimum number of lines allowed Moving the slider down increases the number of viewable lines default size HE Scale font size right vertical slider This control sets the font size for the text in the outline list The default position is the middle of the slider and corresponds to the default font size set in the Outline Panel options Moving the slider up reduces the font size to a minimum of 10 points smaller than the default font size Moving the slider down increases the font size to a maximum of 10 points greater than the default font size The keyboard commands for decreasing and increasing the NaviDoc font size are CTRL and CTRL 104 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 10 11 1 Current Element Drop Down List Act Break Sequence Scene Label Scena Scene Heading Beat Script Notes Create Edit Outline Styles This control located in the toolbar at the top of the document window sets the outline style of the current paragraph in the document view It is an easy way to assign
214. export from Screenwriter to another Mac OS X program on the same computer using Cut and Paste 1 Open the Mac OS X program you want to export to Open a file to export to or open a new file 2 Open Screenwriter and open the script you want to export from 3 Using the mouse select the text to export 4 Under the Edit menu select Copy 5 Go to the other Mac OS X program 6 Under the Edit menu select Paste All of Screenwriter s formatting may not transfer but you should at least be able to export all the text Be warned that not all Mac OS X programs can handle Cut and Paste correctly NOTE For this method to work the option Share Clipboard with Other Mac OS X Programs must be checked To check uncheck it go to the Misc page of Options under the Tools menu 264 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 6 Format Codes The following Format Codes are embedded in the text of your script by Screenwriter To display them e Under the View menu select Show Format Codes If your script is going into Production and you perform Breakdown Tagging on it Tagging Codes are placed around each word you tag See the Production Features chapter for more details m o 8 f Single Codes ace EE 1 15 7 Files Installed The following files are installed with Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 e Installed Contents 265 e Sample Scripts and Templates 266 e Start Menu Folder 269 Movie
215. f all available outline styles This is the same as selecting the Format Element Styles command and selecting Outline Styles Top Goes to the beginning of the list in the NaviDoc panel Bottom Goes to the end of the item list in the NaviDoc panel Page Up Goes up one sceen s worth of items in the item list of the NaviDoc panel Page Down Goes down one sceen s worth of items in the item list of the NaviDoc panel Previous Row Goes up one item in the item list in the NaviDoc panel Next Row Goes down one item in the item list in the NaviDoc panel Decrease NaviDoc Font Size When the NaviDoc is open this command decreases the font size of the items in the visible panel The font change does not effect hidden NaviDoc panels The keyboard command for this is CTRL Ctr Left Bracket Increase NaviDoc Font Size When the NaviDoc is open this command increases the font size of the items in the visible panel The font change does not effect hidden NaviDoc panels The keyboard command for this is CTRL Ctri Right Bracket NaviDoc Preferences ss Opens the NaviDoc tab of the program Options window This is the same as choosing the Tools Options command and selecting the NaviDoc tab Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 235 1 15 1 9 Tools Menu iParkner Compare Two Documents Document Analysis Run SmarbCheck Repaginate Mow Ctrl F Thesaurus F5 Count Words Check Hamonwvms Mam
216. f the pre defined templates Screenplay Sitcom etc to accept the settings you prefer Or you can create a new template with your preferred settings naming it Screenplay II for example 1 Open the script with your preferred settings and format 2 Under the File menu select Save As Template 3 Enter a new filename if necessary Click on OK to save the format NOTE Re defining an existing format replaces it by overwriting it Restoring an Overwritten Template There are two ways to restore a previously defined format you ve overwritten e Uninstall and then reinstall Screenwriter This restores all the pre set template formats to their Screenwriter defaults e Open the appropriate Example script file and save its format under the format name you overwrote If you mistakenly re define Stage Play format for example here s how to restore it 1 Under the File menu select Open 2 Select the file Stage Play mmsw an Example of a stage play and click on OK to open it 3 Under the File menu select Save As Template 4 Select the template def file you wish to restore 5 Click on Save 6 Screenwriter asks you if you want to replace it with the one you are saving An item named Stage Play def already exists in this location Do you want to replace it with the one you are saving ncel Replace 40 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8
217. for tagging breakdown items to be printed on Breakdown Sheets or exported to Movie Magic Scheduling e TV Breakdowns 2 Shows options for TV sitcom production breakdowns including generate rundown sheet generate set list and scene character lists e Animation Locking 24 Shows you options for Animation Production Features 1 15 1 10 1 Fix or Flex Advanced control of locked pages Fix All A Pages Flex All A Pages Fix Lock All Headers Flex All Headers Unlock Headers e Fix All A Pages 21 Locks all A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Flex All A Pages Unlocks all fixed A Pages Combines any short A Pages that were locked and may combine any Double Locked Pages in the script Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Fix Lock All Headers Locks the Headers of all pages except Flexible A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Flex All Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages converting them to the Current Header Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Unlock Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages and turns Header Locking off for this script Only available in a script with Locked Pages Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 239 1 15 1 10 2 Auto Revision Controls automatic revision annotation and revision page colors e Marks e Toggles cu
218. formats The scw file format is compatible with Screenwriter versions 4 0 and SCW later However saving your file to the scw format may cause loss of NaviDoc information in the file such as outline styles Undo Levels The Undo levels have been changed from a maximum of 20 to a maximum of 99 276 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 16 5 Shortcut Key Changes in 6 0 Changes to Command Key Assignments for Movie Magic Screenwriter Macintosh Command Name Old Shortcut New Shortcut Delete to end of line Ctrl End CMD Option Delete Forward Delete Previous Word Previous Word Cth Delete Delete CMD Delete Delete Delete Next Word Ctrl Delete Forward CMD Delete Forward Bottom of document End CMD End Ctrl Page Up Go To Previous Page CMD Page Up CMD Page Up Ctrl Page Down Go To Next Page CMD Page Down CMD Page Down Go To Previous Element Ctrl Up Arrow CMD Up Arrow Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help Go To Next Element Normal full width L eft Column Ctrl Down Arrow Ctrl O Ctrl 1 277 CMD Down Arrow New Shortcut Ctrl F Ctrl L EES ra New Script Note Ctrl F1 Ctrl N Element Styles CMD E New Shortcut Meum RRE Bottom of NaviDoc Page Up NaviDoc Page Down NaviDoc Option CMD End Option CMD Page Up Option CMD Page Down Ctrl End Ctrl Page Up Ctrl Page Down
219. g Copying Pasting with the Keyboard Use CMD X to cut CMD C to copy and CMD V to paste You can change these editing keys if you want Go to the Screenwriter menu select Preferences then the Keyboard button Check the appropriate radio button under Cut and Paste Quick Keys Dragging and Dropping 1 Move the cursor to the start of the text you want to move 2 Highlight the text to move using your preferred selection method 3 Using the Mouse move the cursor anywhere over the selected text and press the Left Mouse Button down Hold it down The cursor changes from the normal text I Bar to a Flashing Arrow with a page icon at its base the Drag and Drop cursor 4 While holding the Left Mouse Button down drag this block across the page to its new position With the arrow cursor at the place you want the text inserted release the Left Mouse Button The text block moves to the new position 70 Movie Magic Screenwriter Breaking Elements Screenwriter can handle Drag and Drop text placed in the middle of an Element in two different ways Choose your preference under the Tools menu by selecting Options then clicking on the Mouse button Checking the option Drag n drop should break Elements in middle tells Screenwriter to let Drag and Drop text Break Elements If the cursor is in the middle of an Element when you release the button Screenwriter breaks that Element at the cursor position Dropped text is inserted
220. g elements including outline items is F4 Scenes Notes Bookmarks LE LI Sequence Scene Label Scene Scene Heading Beat Script Notes Create Edit Outline Styles 108 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 10 11 1 Outline Styles Format Options The upper part of the Outline Styles format options controls how the styles appear in the document Margins in Inches D D 1 mfa Lines Before up Interline 10 an lALLCAPS Bold italicized Underlined Font Courier Lei d size TA Courier 12pts e Margins in Inches These controls adjust the left and right margin indent measured in decimal inches and whether the text is Justified e Line Spacing in Lines These controls adjust the line spacing before the outline element and the space between lines within the element The measurements are in decimal inches e Text Format Options These controls set the outline style s font font size and font styles all capitalized letters bold italics and underline The font name is displayed using the settings chosen 1 10 11 1 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Move Outline Elements in the Document The NaviDoc Outline Panel scene list may be used to move outline elements in the list via Drag and Drop When you move an outline element in the NaviDoc Outline Panel outline list the corresponding material is moved in the document The following example moves a Note outline element
221. gination e Pagination Sound This option controls the sound Screenwriter makes every time it runs the real time pagination The default for this option is None Revisions Preferences Options on this page allow you to change certain Production Features Revision Marks mentioned in the following section refer to Current Revision Marks not Locked Revision Marks See the Production Features chapter for more details Screenwriter Preferences Revisions Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 163 Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Revisions Outline Revision Marks 8 MI After 15 Revision Marks on the Page print a Revision Mark on the Header Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Mark Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to the right of it Don t print Revision marks on each line for pages which have reached or exceeded the threshhold number of Revision Marks as defined above f Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on them Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED pages Vi Mark Element following Complete Deletion wi Auto Update Locked Headers on Revision 1 13 8 1 After Revision Marks on the Page put a Revision Mark on the Header Lets you specify how many Current Revision Marks on a page are acceptable before putting a Revision Mark on the Header also to indicate a revised page
222. gue as a sentence end in order to format the next sentence correctly Foreign Language Spell Check With the installation of an optional Foreign Language dictionary Spell Check can check the spelling of words in another language 78 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 9 16 3 User Dictionaries The User Dictionary Editor allows you to add remove or change words in any of your User Dictionaries It can be selected under Screenwriter s Spell menu as Edit User Dictionary or run as a stand alone program by clicking on it in the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window The Spell Check Language Selection screen appears asking you to select the language of the dictionary you re going to edit American English is selected as the default Select a language and click on OK Next you re asked to Select User Dictionary User Dictionary files end with the extension xa User us lxa is selected as the default Select a dictionary and click on OK The User Dictionary Editor screen displays If opening a User Dictionary for the first time the file is empty and ready for you to add words Tab to the Word Editing window on the right of the screen Buttons below it show your options Add Word Type the word the way you want it spelled Note if you enter an incorrect spelling here Spell Check uses it In effect you re telling Spell Check that this is the correct spelling Click on Add Word and the word you entered appears in the Dicti
223. gue or text 1 Type the Left column text as you would normally For example create a Character Name element then type the Character Name 56 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 26 3 2 With the cursor in that element press CTRL L The element is formatted as Character Name L as displayed in the Change Element window 3 Press RETURN to go to the next element In the example it is a Dialogue element already formatted as Dialogue L 4 Type the Dialogue Press CTRL L 5 Press RETURN to go to the next element It is a normal Action element To enter Left column action type the Action text Press CTRL L Press RETURN to go to the next element It is a normal Action element 6 Type the Right column text as you would normally For example create a Character Name element then type the Character Name 7 With the cursor in that element press CTRL R The element is formatted as Character Name R 8 Press RETURN to go to the next element It is a normal Dialogue element 9 Type the Dialogue Press CTRL R to move it to the right column 10 Press RETURN to go to the next element It is a normal Action element To enter Right column action type the Action text Press CTRL R Press RETURN to go to the next element It is a normal Action element 11 Repeat these Steps until all your Dual Column Dialogue is entered To change an element from a Dual Column element back to a normal element 1 Put the cursor anywhere
224. h Screenwriter is always available online under the Help menu e Contents Opens the Table of Contents for the help file e Search for Help on Opens the help file s searchable Index e Quick Help Displays a sample script page Get help information about any Element or item by clicking on it 16 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 5 4 1 5 4 1 r Forwards Mouse IE Print title pane Multimedia ber of Copies Cancel Help 3 Cancel wl If you make a selection under the Main Menu Bar context sensitive help is available When the menu screen displays click on the Help button It displays helpful information explaining what each selection on that menu does Menus Main Menu Bar 2zs Screenwriter s Pull Down menus are accessed from the Main Menu Bar 218 at the top of the screen Individual menus may be selected with the mouse Screenwriter File Edit View Format Goto NaviDoc Tools Production Window There are three types of menus e Pull Down Menu we e List Menu 17 e Options Menu 171 Pull Down Menu ELLE File Edie i About Screenwriter Preferences a6 Li Taro Gen Services E Hide Screenwriter dH Hide Others X 38H Show All Quit Screenwriter 0 Pull down menus pull down from the Main Menu Bar With the menu displayed use the mouse to click on an option NOTE If there is a Mac OS X Quick key equivalent for a menu option
225. has the full Act Scene information NOTE The Put in ONLY on 1st Scene of Act setting does not update existing Act Scene Info this will stay the way you entered it unless you manually change it It only changes the appearance of future Act Scene Info you create after changing the setting To change existing Act Scene Info use the Search amp Replace command Starting Number Allows you to enter an Act Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 End of Show is Act Number Lets you specify how many acts are in the current script Screenwriter enters END OF SHOW at the end of the Act Number you specify here instead of END OF ACT Numbering Scheme Lets you choose how Acts are numbered from one of the following schemes e ACT A If checked uses letters to number the acts e ACT 1 NUMBERS If checked uses numbers to number the acts e ACT ONE If checked uses words to number the acts e ACT I ROMAN If checked uses Roman numerals to number the acts Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 181 1 13 14 1 10 Scene Labels Automatically put E C in Scene Label Starting Number after Act Break Number Scenes Continuously Put in SCENE vi Center 5cene Label Text F4 Put Scene Label Information in Parentheses Numbering scheme C SCENE A SCENE 1 NUMBER el Gei SCENE ONE SCENE I ROMAN Sr L al Automatically put in Scene Lab
226. he lines from Scenes 5 amp 7 is 89 And 89 divided by 6 is 14 83 8ths or 1 6 83 8ths which rounded upwards comes out to 1 7 8ths Miscellaneous Production Breakdown Print Options e List Characters in Each Scene lf checked lists all the characters whether they have dialogue or not directly underneath each Scene Heading in the breakdown Listing options are e Sorted Alphabetically lIf checked lists characters in each scene alphabetically e Script Order lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they appear e Speaking Characters First lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they speak in that scene followed by character with no dialogue e User List Order lIf checked lists characters in each scene with those from User Lists first then all others alphabetically e List Non Speaking Characters If checked lists characters who are mentioned in Action or Dialogue but who have no dialogue of their own Unchecked only characters with dialogue are listed e Each Group on New Page lf checked starts a new page for each new group e Print Tagged Items If checked prints or exports all tagged items along with the other breakdown information Other Screenwriter Features Screenwriter has tow specialized features for working with your script They are e iPartner 125 e Speak Text 1341 e Send As Email Attachment 137 e Document Analysis e Name
227. he note category names text color and background color The top part of the notes category control lists the available note categories The note category commands appear at the bottom of the control e Note Category Name and Color Each category name appears on the left with the text color and background color to the right Double click the name of the note category to edit the category name Single click on the text and background color controls to change their colors e Note Category Commands o The Add Category command inserts a new note category at the end of the list of note categories The new category begins with the style settings of the default category and becomes the new default note category style o The Delete Category command permanently removes the selected note category This command is only available when a note category is selected 1 10 8 5 Note Category Drop Down List Control v E ScriptNote Category 1 88 Movie Magic Screenwriter Lj Default ScriptNote ScriptNote Category 1 EZ 5criptNote Category 2 New Color Category This control sets the default note category style for adding and modifying notes e Default Note Category Selecting a note category in the Note Category drop down list places a check mark to the left of the category and makes it the note category default The default note category style is used when new notes are added e New Color Category
228. he same margins page breaks or even number of pages as it does in Screenwriter Neither will it have MOREs or CONTINUEDs However it will retain all of the text in your script and will be in general script format Export To export open Screenwriter and open the script you want to export 1 Under the File menu select Export To 2 Select a file type from the menu Screenwriter 4 x and 2000 scw Adobe Acrobat PDF pdf Rich Text Format rtf Plain Text txt HTML Publishing html Movie Magic Scheduling Export sex Avid Editor Format txt Scriptware Tagged tag There are the export file types formats currently available Screenwriter 4 x and 2000 scw Normally used for saving for pre 6 0 Screenwriter scripts Adobe Acrobat PDF pdf Used to export to Adobe Acrobat This is a widely used format that can be opened and printed by a wide variety of software programs on both Windows and Macintosh Rich Text Format rtf Compatible with most Microsoft programs such as Microsoft Word Plain Text txt Used to export to programs which cannot handle any of the other format A plain text format with all the text of the script indented correctly using spaces HTML Publishing html This feature saves your script as an HTML file and allows you to upload it to an FTP site In order to upload your script you will need to know the URL user name and password Movie Magic Scheduling Export
229. here in a Character Name and a Character Extension Pop up List displays o 0 5 WO No Extension Add as Text Never Mind 2 Type in the underlined QuickLetter of your selection and it s entered for you For example type v for V O and V O is entered New Extension Displays the Character Extension User List where you can enter text and create a new extension Add as Text Enters whatever you type as a Character Extension without adding it to the User List 3 The cursor moves to a new Dialogue element If you pressed RETURN and the cursor s already gone to a blank Dialogue element press BACKSPACE to return the cursor to the Character Name element Then press left parenthesis 1 8 10 1 Delete a Character Extension With the cursor at the end of a Character Name element press DELETE to delete the Character Extension Or with the cursor anywhere in a Character Name element press left parenthesis A Character Extension Pop up List displays Type e for No Extension The cursor moves to the Dialogue element following the Character Name 1 8 11 Dialogue A Dialogue element can only be created immediately following a Character Name or its Parenthetical element 1 With the cursor in a Character Name or Parenthetical element press RETURN The cursor moves to a new Dialogue element BERT 2 Type your character s dialogue 46 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 12
230. iDoc Font 2 0 Increase NaviDoc Font Size 233 Increases Right Margin 249 Index Card 21 36 Index Card SpeedBar 34 Index Card View 33 Index Card View Ilcon 21 Index Cards 32 34 35 37 Index Cards 225 Initial Capitals 73 Initial Scene Text 59 Input Fields 18 INS 71 Insert 71 Insert Action Element 249 Insert Character Element 249 Insert Character Name into text 249 Insert Element 40 221 270 Insert Scene 249 Insert Typeover Button 20 Inserts a New Note 249 Inserts a new Shot 249 Inserts a Scene Heading starting with EXT 249 Inserts a Scene Heading starting with INT 249 Inserts a Transition 249 Inserts Character Extension 249 Inserts Left Parenthesis 249 Inserts Parenthetical 249 Installed Contents 265 INT 52 62 124 int 40 Interactive 30 206 Movie Magic Screenwriter Interior 124 Interior VS Exterior 124 126 205 iPartner 132 133 235 IP Address 128 Italicized 175 Italics 72 264 J Justified 175 K Keep Element Together 58 249 264 Keep Group Together 249 Key Assignments 15 248 Keyboard 166 Keyboard Options 139 Keyboard Selection 67 Keyboard Shortcuts 15 LU Last Position 232 last saved position 154 Last Workspace 151 LATER 62 Layout Breakdown Sheets 240 Learn 75 Leave You ina Blank Script 23 Left 28 178 LEFT ARROW 66 Left Column 55 Left Promotes row 101 Leftto Right 28 left vertical slider 90 Left Click 67 Letters A
231. ierarchy Moving an outline item to the right in the NaviDoc demotes the item to an outline element style lower down in the outline hierarchy e Allow Sounds for Outline Drag amp Drop These options control sounds associated with various actions made within the NaviDoc Outline panel 1 10 11 8 Scene Heading Field View Control Y Scene Number d Int Ext Y Time of Day This control shows or hides parts of the Scene Heading elements Scene Numbers Interior and Exterior or Time of Day in the outline list of the Outline Panel 1 10 11 9 Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally zu ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 103 OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled 1 10 11 1 Outline View Controls tit These controls determine the font size and lines of visible text for the outline styles in the outline list of the Outline Panel 3 lines e K Set number of Scene lines left vertical slider This control sets the number of viewable lines of each Scene Heading in the outlines list The default position of the slider is all the way up and corresponds to one line vi
232. ign Vertical DR dg ME Bar ia sois T T inch binding margin when horizontally centering on page Print Title Page S Import Export r ch 1 8 etin ton tonus lee ttv otv Site Bots Bots Rote Bot Bots Rot Bots Bote Rot Bots Bet Ret Bots Bt Bet Bots et Ret Betts Bet Ret Betts Ret Ret Ret Ret Rote Bote Bou Reel Bout Bou Bout oet Bou Bote Bout Bot Rott Bett Bot Rott Be Bt Rte Bets otv otv ona ona ri ui i ance 1 6 1 Opening a Title Page Under the File menu select Title Page Publisher and you ll see a screen like the one in the example below You can enlarge or reduce the size of the title page displayed onscreen with the Full Page and Zoomed buttons at top right 28 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 6 2 1 6 3 Title Page Publisher Display Size fei Full Page Zoomed x v Mi show Grid fei Inches Centimeters To add or edit text double k on existing text or a clic t the location on the page where yo want new text to go Or use the butt low Add Text Align H tal Align Vertical Use See inch binding margin when horizontally t n page Print Title Page Import Export EE Cancel Creating Text Elements Double click anywhere on the title page to create a text element The Edit Text window pops up DR TE Show Me The Magic b y Screenwriter Ke BEE Press return to break lines CZ zf Font Courier e
233. in of Page E On Left Margin of Page Speech Numbering e On Right Margin of Page Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s right margin e On Left Margin of Page Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s left margin 1 13 11 2 Character Name Position Character Name Position fe Above Dialogue C To Left of Dialogue Character Name Position e Above Dialogue Prints the Character Name above the dialogue speech normal 170 Movie Magic Screenwriter position e To Left of Dialogue Prints the Character Name at the left of the dialogue speech 1 13 11 3 Dialogue Spacing Dialogue Spacing Use Spacing in Script ro 1 Use Double Spacing Dialogue Spacing e Use Spacing in Script Prints the dialogue using the same spacing as in the original script e Use Double Spacing Prints with the dialogue double spaced 1 13 11 4 Dialogue Capitalization fe Use Capitalization in Script Always Capitalize Dialogue Dialogue Capitalization e Use Capitalization in Script Prints the dialogue using the same Capitalization as in the original script e Always Capitalize Dialogue Prints Dialogue speeches in ALL CAPS 1 13 11 5 Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches Gei Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before AS Set Blank Lines Before To 1 L Blank Lines before Printed Speeches e Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before Prints the dia
234. in the element 2 Under the Format menu select Dual Columns then Normal Full Width Or press CTRL F Dual Column Margins Dual Column margins can be customized to your preference 1 Under the Format menu select Dual Columns then Set Column Margins 2 Change the settings as desired Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 57 1 8 27 1 8 27 1 Column Margins Character Names Parentheticals Dialogue Other Elements Cancel Cheating Cheating involves over riding the default settings as defined in Script Formats under the Format menu Cheating only affects the single element page or script that you apply it to Cheating is used to change the look of a script One reason for doing this is to try to fool the professional script reader who expects a screenplay to time out to one minute of screen time per script page As an example if your script is a long 130 pages you can cheat the line spacing margins etc to have it print out in the standard length of 120 pages Another use of cheating would be to stretch the text on a page to fill up the extra blank white space left by a long Dialogue element you don t want broken by a page break e Cheat an Element sr e Cheat Right Margins e Cheat Page Breaks o e Cheat a Page ss e Cheat the Whole Script se e Cheat the Page s Head
235. ing 72 Underlining and Boldfacing of 241 Underlining Text 72 Undo 70 221 248 Undo Alignment 28 Undo Levels 146 Unhide Elements on Screen 225 Unique Locations List 120 Unknown Words 158 Unlock Dialogue Numbering 217 246 Unlock Headers 201 238 Unlock One Rev Mark Level 246 Unlock The Script 237 Untag All Items 210 240 Untagging Items 210 UP ARROW 66 Up Down moves rows 101 Uppercase 73 74 Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text 258 Use Style Sheets 258 User Defined 31 User Defined Color 239 User Defined Color Highlights 239 User Dictionaries 75 User Dictionary 78 User List Order 127 208 User Lists 48 59 61 64 User Lists 229 Using Default Template 270 Using Microsoft Windows 14 VO 44 62 Variable 84 Vertical Index Cards 34 View Menu 19 20 33 225 270 Viewable Notes Lines Control 90 Viewable Outline Items Lines Control 103 Viewable Scene Lines Control 97 103 Vocal Characteristics 134 Voice Association File 134 W Web Resources 24 7 What s This 247 White 187 Window Menu 19 247 Word 67 75 Word Processor 31 Word Web 235 WordPerfect 258 Words One Two Three 118 Workspace 151 Write Brothers 13 WYSIWYG 26 Y Yellow 187 Zoom In 119 Zoom Out 119 Zoom Screen Text 21 141 225 Zoom Screen Text Icon 21 Zoomed 27 294 Movie Magic Screenwriter Endnotes 2 after index Back Cover
236. ing on any of the menu items or by pressing ALT the underlined letter in the menu item NOTE To use Alt keys to access Main Menu Bar you must have Enable Alt keys for Character Name Entry box unchecked in the Program Options Top Toolbar 0 the optional Top Toolbar has several Push buttons that allow quick access to frequently used program functions for editing and file management the Current Element Window with Change Element drop down menu and the Right Left Scroll Bar The Top Toolbar when visible is located just under the Main Menu Bar Right Toolbar 20 has an Up Down Scroll bar and Push buttons for Page Up Down and optionally has Element Buttons for element entry with the mouse The Right Toolbar is displayed at the right side of your screen The Status Bar contains a Hint Line Insert Typeover PushButton the current Line and Position of your cursor and the current Page Number followed by the Total Number of Pages Tutorials 10 Minute Tutorial Enter topic text here Basic Information e Mac OS X ss e Selecting Screenwriter Commands 15 e On Line Help e e Menus 16 e Push Buttons 18 e Checkboxes 18 Radio Buttons 18 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 15 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 e Text or Numerical Input Fields 18 e The Editing Screen 19 e Opening a Document 22 e Saving a Document 2 e Merging Documents 2s Using OS X Using M
237. ing them Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 271 We believe this makes the program easier to use and learn There is a new NaviDoc menu renamed commands and rearrangement of the commands The Search and Spell menus have been removed The Production and Window menus remain unchanged For current Screenwriter users the table below should help your transition to the new arrangement The table lists the menu items that have changed and identifies their new locations After the table are screenshots of the new menus In the table below new menu items are in BOLD ITALICS OLD MENU NEW MENU MENU ITEM LOCATION LOCATION NAME Hide Elements Hide Elements On Screen Screen Screenwriter We ee SEE Les LOCATION LOCATION NAME LLL RENE NENNEN Eed EE EE EE EE E EE E EE E EE E 272 Movie Magic Screenwriter Register with Writer s Guild Backup to Backup to Floppy Pe Tools REMOVED ee Lee Les LOCATION LOCATION NAME XX LLL LT E 00 dL Be Change Text Color Text Color Format Font Format Font Color Procesor Mode Change Text Style Text Style Format Font Format FontStyle View Menu OLD MENU re MENU LOCATION LOCATION NAME Scene Numbering Toolbars Normal Toolbars Display Options gt Toolbars gt Scene Pilot Button Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 273 Hide Names in Pop Up List Hide Location in
238. ist displays v 0 No Extension Add as Text Mever Mind NOTE To alternate between the Last Two Character Names used preceding the cursor position press SHIFT TAB For example Paul had a speech then Maya Pressing SHIFT TAB enters the character name Paul again and creates a dialogue element for him After writing his speech pressing SHIFT TAB again would enter the character name Maya and create a dialogue element for her Inserting Character Names Character Names can be entered while in any element in the document 1 Press Control C A Pop Up List of Character Names displays 2 Select the name you want using the up and down arrows 3 Press Return The name is inserted into the document Character Extension An Extension is a modification to the Character Name appearing directly after it in parentheses or on the next line if you prefer It is commonly used to indicate that the Character speaking cannot be seen speaking onscreen The two most common Extensions are e V O Stands for Voice Over which tells the reader that the character is commenting on the onscreen action but is not part of it or is narrating over the scene Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 45 e O S Stands for Off Screen which tells the reader that the character is not visible on screen but is nearby somewhere in the scene To enter a Character Extension 1 Press left parenthesis while the cursor is anyw
239. itcom Version IL A general sitcom format for use on taped shows Similar to Sitcom Version except Action is in parenthesis Parentheticals are capitalized and outdented to the same left margin as Action NOTE There is no one standard format for Television shows It s recommended that you get at least two scripts from the show you re writing for and match the format before submitting your spec Reading a show s scripts also gives you a better feel for the characters and the kinds of stories that get made Try to get scripts from the current season Templates for certain TV shows are supplied with Screenwriter See Television Templates below TV Template Movie Magic Screenwriter includes more than 50 preset formats for most of the major TV shows If you are writing spec TV scripts you can pre load the format of the show you are writing for and have access to all of its settings including major characters and sets You access these TV templates by going to the Format menu choosing Load Script Format then TV Template Stage Play A format based on the professional published formats used by Samuel French Narrow Action margins with Parenthesis wide Dialogue margins and Act amp Scene Information Radio Play A script in Radio Play format has Character Names to the left of dialogue This format is often seen as the published format for plays but is NOT used as the play format within the professional play writing world Novel A f
240. iter from there are two simple rules which must be followed e n the original file each script element i e Character Name Dialogue Action etc must start on its own line e he document must be in a general script format i e Character Names before Dialogue and so on NOTE The following instructions assume that your Screenwriter document subdirectory is set to C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts If not type in the correct subdirectory where appropriate 258 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 4 2 Direct Import To open an MS Word WordPerfect ASCII RTF Final Draft RTF Movie Master or Scriptware Tagged file 1 Open the Screenwriter program 2 Under the File menu select Open 3 Select the File Type for the type of file you re opening v Screenwriter mmsw scw Previous Saved Versions bk Timed Backups tmb Text RTF Rich Text Format Dramatica Macintosh Dramatica StoryView Exchange dsw Windows Scriptware Tagged tag All Files If the file you want to import doesn t have the appropriate File Extension i e RTF for Rich Text Format TAG for Scriptware Tagged etc selecting All Files as the file type shows files with any extension 4 Select the file you want to import to Screenwriter If necessary change the subdirectory Click on OK The Text Interpretation window appears How Should Interpret This Text fu Import Text in Script Format C
241. iting or Cancel to discard changes 7 Save the changes to the script s User Lists by saving the script file 8 Now you can load the items you ve added to this script s User List into another script See Loading User Lists e above Saving Lists as the Default Lists for all New Scripts To save User Lists you ve made changes to as the default User Lists for new scripts 1 Under the Format menu select User Lists 2 Make changes to your User Lists as described in the sections above 3 Click the Save as Defaults For all New Scripts checkbox vi Save as Default tor all New Scripts The new defaults do not affect any existing scripts To apply the new defaults to User Lists of existing scripts load them from a new script that contains them See Loading User Lists ei above Default User Lists When you install Screenwriter all User Lists except for Character Names Scene Body Text and Substitution Text have default items which are used for all new and imported scripts Character Names Empty Extensions O S VO Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 63 Scene Heading Text INT EXT P O V FULL SHOT Scene Body Text Empty Locations Shot Text Time of Day The ampersand amp tells Screenwriter which letter to underline when it displays the Time of Day menu but is not put into the script Transitions Act Scene Info Prologue Text Tag Text End of Act
242. kes its capitalization as defined by the Element it belongs in Substitution Text For capitalization purposes the Alias Auto Recognition Text window for Substitution Text has three additional options 1 pM 7 Am oe AARMEN we COA MC Council on Aaina Alias A EC Text a a a i a a Ex Uam o gg x dL r Te fe Lc A Auto E As Entered Ce ALL CAPS A E C D E F G H m OF Sr A A Auto Capitalization matches the way you type the Alias Text e f you type coa it expands to council on aging e f you type in Coa it expands to Council On Aging e f you type in COA it expands to COUNCIL ON AGING E As Entered Capitalization matches the Substitution Text exactly as it appears in the User List unless you re in an element defined as all caps in which case it is put in all caps 66 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 9 1 9 1 C ALL CAPS Capitalization is ALL CAPS Character Name Capitalization for Character Name Alias Text uses the Auto capitalization method Auto Capitalization matches the way you type the Alias Text e f you type coa it expands to council on aging e f you type in Coa it expands to Council On Aging e f you type in COA it expands to COUNCIL ON AGING Text Edi
243. ks Applies revision mark to any currently selected line of text that does not have one applied If any lines already have revision marks this will not affect those lines e Remove Revision Marks Removes revision mark from any currently selected line of text that has one applied If any lines already have revision marks those will also be removed 192 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 3 2 1 14 3 3 1 14 3 4 1 14 4 Auto Revision Marks Auto Revision Marks are revision marks which are automatically entered for you as you edit your Locked script When you change a line Screenwriter gives it a revision mark in the right margin If you Undo the change it will remove the mark If you change it back the way it originally was manually that is still considered a change so the revision mark will remain Enabling Auto Revision Marks To enable Auto Revision marks This feature can be turned on or off under Production gt Auto Revision gt Marks A checkmark displays next to Marks on the menu to indicate that Auto Revision Marks are enabled Removing All Current Revision Marks To remove all Current Revision Marks e Click on Production Remove Current Revision Marks NOTE There are additional Revision Mark settings on both the Locked Scripts page of the Format Element Styles window and on the Revisions section of the Tools Options window Locked Scripts Options You can customize Screenwriter
244. l NOT selected is printed with a large X across it Unchecked all material is printed normally When printing to PDF prompt user with COPY Ask User for PDF Options With this option enabled when you create a PDF Adobe Acrobat file it will ask you whether it should automatically display the Scene Heading Bookmarks and which if any non printing Notes should it include With this option NOT enabled it will automatically use the last PDF Printing Options that you had chosen Print Using Fractional Widths f Print Using Fractional Widths When checked Screenwriter prints using fractional width calculations Most fonts look better when printed using fractional widths but some fonts don t Unchecked Screenwriter prints without using fractional width calculations 1 13 10 Keyboard Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Keyboard This page allows you to change Screenwriter s special editing keys From the scrollable lists choose your key preferences Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 167 Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline Y Menu Commands About Screenwriter File New using Default Template New from Template Open Close Save Save AS Save a Copy Save All Open Documents Export to Screenwriter 4x and 2000 sew Adobe Acrobat POF pdt Rich Text Format rt
245. le Format NENNEN 275 Opening EXisting Documents E 275 Saving Documents in 6 0 MMSW FOEtTIal iiic oi nno reo rut eonun exon Ehre ecu RRRERIMRERERRIERRVE DE XR XRRER CR RORUEYS VRFYR raya 275 Saving D c ments as SCW Files TOME UU Umm 275 UDO LEVES pain E sume comammaumuteacede doaeanmeaee 275 Shortcut Key Changes Ifi 6 0 neuion a ai 276 Index 280 Top Level Intro This page is printed before a new top level chapter starts 12 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help Movie Magic Screenwriter Software for Writing Screenplays Teleplays Stage Plays Novels Multimedia Scripts amp more User s Manual for Mac OS X Write Brothers Inc 138 N Brand Blvd Suite 201 Glendale CA 91203 818 843 6557 24 hour Web Technical Support www screenplay com E Mail Technical Support support screenplay com Fax Technical Support 818 843 8364 Phone Technical Support 818 843 7819 8 30 am 5 00 pm PST 1 1 Contents Copyright Notice za Things Every Movie Magic Screenwriter User Should Know Basic Information a Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 4 Choosing a Script Format 30 Typing the Document Editing a Document 19 saving a Document 2 Opening a Document 22 Printing the Script 113 Importing Scripts ze The Main Menu Bar 2 8 The NaviDoc Panel ze Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 13 1 2
246. lect the printing font of the listed characters e Size Let s you select the printing font size of the listed characters e Always Print Set List with Rundown Sheets If checked prints a list of Sets after printing the Rundown Sheets e Put in Clipboard Rather than Print Sends the report to the clipboard You may then open another program e g a word processor and paste the report into a document from the clipboard e Header This tab displays the text that appears at top of the page Footer Replacement Codes L Header on Every Page Preview Text with Replacements _ Print Now Cancel S entre e d Use the buttons to insert variable text in the Header Press the Preview Text with Replacements to preview the substitution text Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 245 First 1 23 07 SETS e Footer Text This tab displays the text that appears at the bottom of the page Options Header Footer Replacement Codes _ Footer on Every Page Preview Text with Replacements Print Now Cancel Use the buttons to insert variable text in the Footer Press the Preview Text with Replacements to preview the substitution text 1 15 1 10 6 3 Scene Character Lists Selecting this option will generate lists of all the characters in each scene and puts that list immediately under each scene heading a format used frequently in sitcom production The
247. ll other cards shuffle accordingly The shuffled cards are inserted in the same order they were selected For example if you select card 5 then card 12 then card 8 and insert them before card 3 the new shuffled order will be cards 1 2 5 12 8 and then 3 4 etc Printing Index Cards To print your Index Cards click the Print button on the bottom Toolbar You ll be taken to the following window 38 Movie Magic Screenwriter Setup Index Card Printing 3 75 x 2 5 SS D 5 x 3 75 Landscape L Font SaveAs Open C Save as the default layout Print All Cards Select Range of Cards to Print Cancel The three large page icons across the top of the screen are pre defined layouts designed to be used with pre cut card stock Index Cards Select one by clicking on its icon or radio button The layout at the top right of the screen 3 3 4 x 2 1 2 is the default layout and the one that prints the perforated index cards supplied with Screenwriter Create a new layout by clicking on the Define Your Own button Choose Portrait or Landscape and enter the number of cards Across and Down for your page Several other settings are available e Draw Boxes Prints a box around each Index Card Recommended if you are not printing onto pre cut card stock for example if printing onto plain copy paper Bold Headlines Prints the Scene Heading Line of each c
248. ll Scenes except OMITTEDs Cancel The Export window displays with a list of all your script s scene headings Choose which scenes to export using these options e Selected Scenes Only Clicking on individual scenes to select them for export will select this radio button automatically Only the scenes you select will have breakdown information exported e All Scenes Exports breakdown information for all scenes in the script This is the default and the radio button is automatically checked unless you select a scene heading by clicking on it e All Scenes except OMITTEDS Exports all scenes except those which have been 214 Movie Magic Screenwriter deleted and designated OMITTED in the script There is no breakdown information apart from the scene number to be exported for OMITTED scenes If the script contains no OMITTED scenes this option is grayed out and unselectable Click OK to export Cancel to exit the menu without exporting If you click OK to start exporting Screenwriter begins gathering breakdown data from each scene in the script When it s finished you re prompted to enter a filename for the Export file The default is your script s filename with the extension SEX added instead of MMSW Click on the Save button to create the export file A message box tells you that the export file was saved and under what filename 1 14 10 Animation Production Animation Production scripts have c
249. logue using the same of Blank Lines Before the Character Name as in the original script e Set Blank Lines Before to Allows you to set the number of Blank Lines Before the Character Name from 1 to 5 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 171 1 13 11 6 Print Script Notes Print Script Notes Only Notes Before Selected Dialogue Print Notes Directly Above Speeches Print Boxes Around Notes Print Notes If checked prints Notes in the Animation Recording Script with the following options e Only Notes before selected Dialogue Prints Notes only if they appear directly before a dialogue speech e Print Notes directly above Speeches If checked prints Notes on the line immediately above the Character Name Unchecked prints according to the line spacing set in Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches e Print Boxes around Notes If checked prints Notes as they appear in the original script with boxes around them Unchecked no boxes are printed 1 13 11 7 Misc Animation Dialog Preferences Print lt gt Around Numbering Print lt gt around Numbering lf checked displays and prints angle brackets around the dialogue numbers to differentiate between them and page numbers scene numbers etc Substitute Font 5tone Serif Substitute Font Lets you print the Animation Recording Script using a different font than in the original script 172 Movie Magic Screenwriter
250. lowing the Forced Page Break Press the BACKSPACE key 3 Or put the cursor at the end of the element immediately before the Forced Page Break Press the DELETE key Soft Hyphen A Soft Hyphen can be used to break a word at the end of a line to give the right margin a smoother look If the text is subsequently edited so that the word is no longer broken the soft hyphen is ignored e Put the cursor in the word where you want the Soft Hyphen to be inserted e Press CTRL Ctrl Dash Hard Dash A Hard Dash is similar to a regular dash except that it keeps the two words either side of it together For example inserting a hard dash between set and up in the word set up ensures that the word won t be broken by the end of a line word wrap feature e Put the cursor in the word where you want the Hard Dash to be inserted e Press CTRL SHIFT Ctrl Shift Dash Hard Space A Hard Space is similar to a regular space except that it keeps the two words either side of it together For example inserting a Hard Space between Production and Studio in the phrase Production Studio ensures that the word won t be broken by the end of a line word wrap feature e Put the cursor in the phrase where you want the Hard Space to be inserted Or select the regular space between the two words Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 55 1 8 25 1 8 26 1 8 26 1 1 8 26 2 e Press SHIFT CMD SPACE H
251. ly selects entire words when you drag the cursor over them This ensures that you dont accidentally select fragments of words Unchecked Screenwriter selects text one character at a time Keyboard Selection Place the cursor on the word sentence element to be selected Press the SHIFT key and hold it down Press other movement keys such as an arrow or page down key to highlight the text Release both keys when the desired text s selected Adjusting the Block Selection If you ve selected some text and then realized that you need to block less or more text you don t have to start over Instead 1 Press the SHIFT key and hold it down 2 Use the Up and Down and Side to Side Arrow keys This will allow you to extend or reduce the selection 3 Release the SHIFT key De Selecting Text To de select a selected block of text e Left Click the mouse anywhere on the page e Or press a movement key alone without the SHIFT key Moving Text Screenwriter offers these methods of moving text around in your script e Cut and Paste A two step method Text is removed from one location and placed on the Clipboard then Pasted into a new location e Copy and Paste A two step method Text is left in its original location and placed on the Clipboard then Pasted into a new location e Drag and Drop A one step method Direct movement of text without cutting or copying Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 69 1 9 6 1 9 7 1
252. ly displayed script e Select Special Shows options for selecting by word sentence element group page scene Word Alt F5 Sentence Alt F Element Alt F amp Group At LEI Page Alt FF11 Scene At EI Scene Range Extend Selection e Scene Range Lets you select a scene range from a list of scene headings Select Range of Scenes for Blocking EAT STREET NIGHT EAT HOUSE NIGHT EAT DUMP DAT INT CHURCH DAY EAT STREET DAY EST CHURCH ANOTHER ANGLE DAY EAT BEDFORD FALLS STREET WINTER DAY EAT STREET DAY INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAT e Extend Selection Lets you extend the selection beyond the current cursor position 224 Movie Magic Screenwriter Select how to extend Block Extend Black Selection From Current Cursor Position to O End of the current Page Start of the Current Page C3 End of the current Scene C3 Start of the Current Scene C3 To next Act Scene Break CO Tn Previous Act Scene Break O Tn End of Document O Ta Beginning of Document C2 Tn Specific Page C3 To Specific Scene S e Insert Element Inserts a new element at the current cursor position based on your choice from the element list Act Break Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Label Mote Shot Title Transition Sequence Scene Beat e Cut Element Cuts the entire current element in the docume
253. m wants to talk to Uncle a un ps d kk zs 1 ad AEB ao bes Pasar 0773 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 229 1 15 1 5 Format Menu Element Styles Load Styles From Make Default for All New Documents User Lists Load User Lists From Document Layout Header and Footer Font Style Font Color Change Case Change Element Type Mark One Character s Dialogue Dual Columns Normal Word Processor Mode Cheat Reset Cheated e Element Styles Displays a menu where you can change the way elements are formatted in the currently displayed script and set the default formats for New scripts e Load Styles From Allows you to reformat your existing document by loading a format from either a template or an existing Screenwriter document Template Screenwriter Document e Make Default for All New Documents Saves the format of the currently displayed document as the default template default def for one of these available script formats File New using Default Template will now use this format e User Lists 59 Displays a menu where you can edit the User Lists and Text Aliases for the currently displayed script and set the defaults for New scripts e Load User Lists from e Allows you to retrieve User Lists from other Screenwriter scripts ASCII files Collaborator files or Screenwriter s Original Defaults Screenwriter Document Original Defaults
254. ment CMD T CMD T Any element CTRL N Any element Add a Parenthetical element Add a Transition element Blank Transition element Display a List Menu of Transitions CUT TO etc Add a Note If Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Text Entry Editing page of Program Options under the File menu Tab creates a Parenthetical element when in a Dialogue element 1 8 20 Character Name in Dialog Action To put an existing Character Name into Dialogue or Action without typing it in again press SHIFT CMD C A Pull Down menu displays with all the existing Character Names Select one and it is entered as text at the cursor position 54 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 21 1 8 21 1 1 8 22 1 8 23 1 8 24 Or if you ve assigned that name an Alias type in the alias text and press the space bar It is expanded to the full Character Name at the cursor position See Aliases e later in this chapter for details Forced Page Break To end a page short and start a new page enter a Forced Page Break at the cursor position e Under the Edit menu select Add Forced Page Break e Or press SHIFT RETURN Remove a Forced Page Break Remove a Forced Page Break using one of these methods 1 Put the cursor either before or after the forced page break Under the Edit menu select Remove Forced Page Break 2 Or put the cursor at the beginning of the element immediately fol
255. mes running into shot sees the car lets out a triumphant yell pats the car and dashes on EXT MAIN STREET BEDFORD FALLS NIGHT GEORGE Hello Bedford Falls The NaviDoc has four primary panels e Outline Panel o 80 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Scenes Panel s e Notes Panel ss e Bookmarks Panel o Each NaviDoc panel is comprised of two parts The top part of each panel holds the Controls The remainder of the panel is the Item List The items in the Item List change with each NaviDoc panel For example there is a scene list in the Scenes Panel a bookmark list in the Bookmarks Panel a notes list in the Notes Panel and an outline list in the Outline Panel 1 10 1 Opening and Closing the NaviDoc There are several ways to show and hide the NaviDoc e Select the NaviDoc command from the View menu e Press CMD ZERO e Click on the NaviDoc icon located in the View toolbar located at the bottom left of the document window e Double click or Click and Drag the NaviDoc Splitter 16 INT OUTER OFFICE y BUILDING AND She reaches up and kisses tf DE INT GEORGE S OFFICE DAY George opens the door for I INT OUTER OFFICE DAY 13 INT DOORWAY TO UNCLE BILLY 3 9 20INT OUTER OFFICE DAY they are being watched by CLOSE SHOT As George and the bank examiner who is s pr EXT MAIN STREET BEDFORD FALLS books Double click or drag the NaviDoc splitter to the right
256. move past the word then resume Auto Correct by clicking on Pause Autocorrection again All Caps Makes Character Names ALL CAPS wherever they appear Correct Double Capitals e g PRoblem If checked when Spell Check is run from the Spell menu it auto corrects Sentence spacing and capitalization without prompting you first This way sentence spacing and capitalization will be corrected even if Auto Correct is off Treat as a Sentence End in dialogue for the purposes of auto capitalization amp spacing lf checked treats a right parenthesis in Dialogue as a sentence end in order to format the next sentence correctly Correct Capitalization Spacing when Run Manually lf checked when Spell Check is run from the Spell menu it auto corrects Sentence spacing and capitalization without prompting you first This way sentence spacing and capitalization will be corrected even if Auto Correct is off Ignore Capitalization when Checking Words If checked allows unusual Capitalization of words and sentences when Spell Checking a script Unchecked Spell Check expects correct Capitalization of sentences proper names etc 160 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 7 Misc Preferences Screenwriter Preferences Misc Preferences d Editing Files 5martCheck Spelling pa cl Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline bos Miscellaneous Options ru Display Headers F
257. ne 119 Except Following Shots 76 Existing File 24 221 Exit 24 219 220 Exits Screenwriter 250 Expanding 101 Expanding amp Collapsing Outline Elements 101 Export to Movie Magic Scheduling 213 Export to 219 220 270 Exporting 262 263 EXT 42 52 62 124 ext 40 Extend Selection 67 Extend Selection 221 Extension 1 6 Extensions 59 62 Exterior 124 F F12 74 F3 57 72 F4 51 107 F6 72 FADE IN 20 41 52 62 FADE IN Text 59 62 fade in 40 FADE OUT 62 Family Names 138 Fax 120 Female Names 138 File 22 File Menu 19 24 39 219 220 Files Installed 264 Filmed Sitcom 30 Final Act 180 Final Draft 262 Final Draft RTF 258 Final Text 243 Final Text formatting check boxes 243 Firewall 133 Fit Width 142 Fix Lock All Headers 201 238 Fix All A Pages 201 238 Fix or Flex 201 Fix or Flex 237 238 Fixed 84 Fixed Text Size 142 Flash Pointer 84 Flashing 84 Flex All A Pages 201 238 Flex All Headers 201 238 Flipped 195 Flipped Locked 200 Flush Left at Margin 119 Flush Right 117 Flush Right at Margin 119 Font Button 37 Font Color 229 Font managers 254 Font Options 89 93 97 Font Size 103 Font Size Control 90 97 Font Style 229 Footer 18 116 118 119 Footer Text 117 243 Forced Page Break 35 54 Foreign Characters 74 Foreign Language Spell Check 76 Foreign Languages 75 Format Menu 19 Format Codes 264 Format Menu 31 229 Format Options 108 Formatting Text 72 Forwar
258. ne list The choices are Same color as Note in document and Single color based on Outline Style e Spaces to indent Outline Levels This option controls the indent distance 102 Movie Magic Screenwriter between outline levels The default is two spaces e Reduce Indention for Unused Levels This option controls the overall indent of the outline list based on the visibility of each outline style When checked hidden outline styles do not indent the outline list When unchecked outline styles are indented based on their placement in the outline hierarchy regardless of visibility Hiding specific outline styles does not affect the visible outline elements in the outline list of the NaviDoc Outline Panel e Allow Dragging Outline Rows These options control moving outline items around via the NaviDoc Outline Panel It has two options o Up Down moves rows This option controls whether or not moving items is allowed in the NaviDoc Outline list Dragging a selected item up in the NaviDoc moves the item above other rows earlier in the document Dragging a selected outline item down in the NaviDoc moves the item below other rows later in the document o Left Promotes row Right Demotes row This option controls whether or not reassigning outline styles by dragging is allowed in the NaviDoc Outline list Moving an outline item to the left in the NaviDoc promotes the item to an outline element style higher up in the outline h
259. necessary Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 201 1 14 5 3 Fix or Flex A Pages When Screenwriter adds an A Page or B Page etc to a script it puts it in as a flexible A Page If you later add or delete text before the flexible A Page the A Page adjusts its numbering accordingly just like a normal un locked page After pages have been issued you may want existing A Page numbering to become fixed To do so click on Production gt Fix or Flex gt Fix All A Pages Fix All A Pages Flex All A Pages Fix Lock All Headers Flex All Headers Unlock Headers All Flexible A Pages are converted into Fixed A Pages becoming locked When you add text later the new A Pages generated are Flexible A Pages These can also be locked when necessary e Fix All A Pages Locks all A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Flex All A Pages Unlocks all fixed A Pages Combines any short A Pages that were locked and may combine any Double Locked Pages in the script Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Fix Lock All Headers Locks the Headers of all pages except Flexible A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Flex All Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages converting them to the Current Header Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Unlock Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages and turns He
260. new folder by pressing the New Folder button e Click on Choose to set your default folder Cancel to keep the existing default Retain Previous Versions v Retain previous versions of documents BK files D IA D D adi 7 Retain upto 5 Previous versions of a document fe A subfolder named Previous Versions NF x i The same falder as the document Only once per editing session fe Every time a document is saved When checked these options control where previous versions of your document are automatically stored when you use the File Save command in Screenwriter This option retains versions of the file as they were BEFORE a save command is performed We recommend you do NOT consider these files backup files since they are temporary and can Movie Magic amp Screenwriter 6 Help 153 be overwritten as you continue to save your document RECOMMENDATION MAKE SEPARATE BACKUPS OF YOUR WORK Use these BK files as emergency file retrievals only e Retain up to previous version of a document This option sets the number of previous version files of a document Screenwriter keeps around The number is from 1 to 100 Each bk file is a complete copy of the document file The default number of versions retained is 5 That means Screenwriter stores up to five additional copies of each document you work on Setting the number higher can begin to take up a lot of disk space e Place previous
261. ng closing the NaviDoc Growing or shrinking the document view vertically does not change the displayed font s width e he minimum value controls how small the document text can be reduced as a percentage of the original font size e he maximum value controls how large the document text can be enlarged as a percentage of the original font size Fit Width Automatically adjusts text size to fit the document in the window staying within the specified minimum and maximum magnification percentages i Minimum 50 Maximum 120 T a a 1 13 1 3 2 Fixed Text Size This option lets you specify a fixed magnification factor for the document screen text as a percentage of the original font size Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 143 f Fixed Text Size Use the slider to specify a fixed magnification factor for screen text 1 13 2 Toolbar Icons Menu View gt Toolbar Icons Menu x Show Toolbar Customize Toolbar vx Small Icons Large Icons v Icon Only icon and Text Reset Toolbar to Defaults Remove All Icons Default Toolbar Standard Large Icons Minimal Large Icons All Toolbar Icons User Customized Toolbar The View gt Toolbar Icons menu has options that control the display of the Toolbar and Toolbar icons that appear at the top of the document window LA C DI E amp eo ES E E f Script Note He e Show Toolbar tTurns the Toolbar display on
262. nimum of 10 points smaller than the default font size Sliding down increases the font size to a maximum of 10 points greater than the default font size The keyboard commands for decreasing and increasing the NaviDoc font size are CTRL and CTRL 1 10 9 Bookmarks Panel The Bookmarks Panel in the NaviDoc replaces the Bookmark feature in earlier versions of Movie Magic Screenwriter The Bookmarks Panel is used to add remove modify and navigate to bookmarks in your document The Bookmarks Panel can be displayed by clicking on the Bookmarks tab in the NaviDoc The keyboard command for showing the Bookmarks Panel is CTRL 4 l Dialogue ch Cutlina brengt Notes Bonkma i MEMMED 0 n n 0m nn g B a 3 VoM EA TI ee j In plane Add Bookmark f Edit d Remove m Dee GEORGE BIG SCENE on phone e See ee What Uncis Billy NEEDS DIALOG TT MERE Has Uncle Billy come in yet COUSIN TILLY No he stopped at the bank first GEORGE on phone He s not here right now Harry ppt of the man waiting in the chair This is Carter the bank examiner come for his annual audit of the books of the Gees and Loan RE E EJ EJ Loss Bookmarks Panel Sync Frame When you select a bookmark in the NaviDoc the script is scrolled to the bookmark in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the bookmark in the NaviDoc displays ONLY when the selection is within the paragraph the bookmark points to in the docum
263. ns def Sliders def SmartGuy def south Park def Spin City def Star Trek Deep Space 9 def Star Trek Voyager def Style and Substance def Suddenly Susan def The Nanny def Touched By an Angel def Veronicas Closet def Walker Texas Ranger def X Files def Xena def Young and Restless def Blank Templates Generic Comic Template def Gosset amp Kayle Comic Sample def Novel Template def Radio Show Template def Screen def oitcom1 def Sitcom2 def Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 269 opec Script def otage Play def 1 15 7 3 Start Menu Folder All Programs gt Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 Weblinks Sub Folder Movie Magic Screenwriter FAQs Most Frequently Asked Questions about Movie Magic Screenwriter Online Tutorials for Movie Magic Screenwriter Tutorials on how to use Movie Magic Screenwriters Screenplay com The Main page for Write Brothers Products and Resources for Writers On Line Registration amp Copyright A list of Registration and Copyright Services StoryView For Screenwriters and all Creative Writers The Main Page for StoryView the Ultimate Outliner Dramatic The Ultimate Writing Partner Dramatica com Information on Dramatica Software and Theory Documentation Folder New Features Manual Users Manual Production Bible Movie Magic Screenwriter 2000 Multi Media Run Time Player Dictionary Editor Latest and Greatest Features readme file 1 16 New Features in Screenwriter 6 0 e New Documen
264. nt e Add Forced Page Break Starts a new page at the current cursor position e Remove Forced Page Removes a Forced Page Break immediately before or after the cursor position e Add Hard Return Goes to a new line but stays in the same element e Add Dialogue Paragraph H in the Dialogue element starts a new paragraph of dialogue Otherwise does nothing e Find Displays the Search amp Replace window with the Replace parameters grayed out Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 225 Enter the text to Search for and define the search parameters e Find Next Searches for next instance that meets the same find criteria e Replace Available only after a successful Find command Replaces the current instance found text with the replacement text e Replace amp Find Next Displays the Search amp Replace menu Enter the text to Search for the text to Replace it with and define the Search amp Replace parameters e Replace All Available only after a successful Find command Replaces ALL instances of the found text with the replacement text This command does NOT ask for confirmation while replacing the text in the document e Change Character Name Displays a Search amp Replace menu modified for Character Names only The Search for box contains a list of available Character Names to choose from Choose one enter the new Name in the Replace with box and define the Search amp Replace param
265. nt Styles this option controls the text and background colors of the item style in the NaviDoc Outline Panel only 1 10 11 1 Delete Outline Style Control This control removes the selected outline item s from the document and the outline list Bookmarks L Notes line Scenes Scene Heading n When deleting an outline element you are given two choices Deleting 5cene Headings When deleting scene headings do you want to delete the entire scene or just the scene heading Y a A Delete the entire scene Delete the scene heading only Don t ask me again Cancel Se By e Delete the entire scene or Delete entire element and it s children This option removes the outline element and everything contained within the element Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 107 e Delete the scene heading only or Delete the parent element only This option ONLY removes the selected outline item and leaves all other material untouched 1 10 11 1 Add Outline Element Control Act Break Sequence Scene Label Scene Scene Heading Beat Script Notes Create Edit Outline Styles This control inserts a new outline item into the document and the outline list The outline style selected from the list of available styles determines the type of outline item added to the document The NaviDoc menu also has commands for setting outline style assignments The keyboard command for addin
266. nt to that scene heading When the text selection is within the scene heading of the document the scene heading in the scenes list is outlined and highlighted When the text selection is anywhere else within the scene in the document the scene heading in the scene list is outlined but not highlighted 1 10 10 1 Scene Controls Notes Bookmarks e miT Outline Scenes re all The Scene Controls affect the display of the scene list in the Scenes Panel These controls do not affect the document 1 10 10 2 Sort Scenes Control Sort by Scene Number Sort by Int f Ext Sort by Set Sort by Time afF dav 96 Movie Magic Screenwriter This control changes the display of the scene order in the Scenes Panel based on the parameters chosen Scenes may be sorted by Scene Number Interior Exterior Location or Time of Day 1 10 10 3 Scene Element Spacing Control A This control determines if there is single spacing or double spacing between scene elements in the Scenes Panel Note The effects of this control are visible only when multiple scene lines are visible See Viewable Scene Lines Control e ape 1 10 10 4 Scene Header View Control d Scene Number d Int Ext Y Time of Day This control shows or hides scene heading elements in the scene list of the Scenes Panel Scenes headings may show or hide scene numbers interior and exterior designation or time of day 1 10 1
267. ntag All Items Movie Magic Scheduling Export Layout Breakdown Sheets Print Standard Breakdowns e Tagging Mode Toggles Tagging mode on or off When turned on a checkmark appears next to Tagging Mode on the menu Tagging mode allows you to tag items by double clicking on them then selecting categories from a list Edit Categories Displays a screen where you can change the names or shortcut codes of Breakdown Categories Tag Item Globally Displays a screen allowing you to tag every appearance of an item in your script Untag All Items Removes all Breakdown tagging codes from your script e Movie Magic Scheduling Export Exports your tagged items for import directly into Movie Magic Scheduling Allows you to choose from a list of scenes from your script Print Standard Breakdowns Movie Magic Screenwriter has its own powerful internal breakdown capabilities Select this item to go to a Breakdown Sheet menu where you can select what and how you want your breakdowns printed e Layout Breakdown Sheets Movie Magic Screenwriter has built in industry standard Breakdown Sheets and this menu item will let you layout which categories go where on the breakdown sheets 1 15 1 10 6 TV Breakdowns Shows options for TV sitcom production breakdowns Generate Rundown Sheet Print Set Lists Scene Character Lists e Generate Rundown Sheet 241 e Generate Set List 241 e Scene Character Lists 2
268. o be entered in Index Card mode obeying the following guidelines e o move to another Index Card press TAB Script Element Return in Index Card as Action Normal paragraph with one blank line before and after it Character Name Formatted as ALL CAPS and followed by a colon and 2 spaces Dialogue Immediately following the Character Name after the colon and two spaces and on the same line Should word wrap normally without any special indentation Parenthetical Part of the dialogue on the same line but text is enclosed in parentheses with a space before and after as appropriate Transition Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Transition text must end in TO Transition text should be surrounded by two carets like the following se UT Loo Shot Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Shot text should be surrounded by two square brackets like the following ANGLE ON SIGN 36 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 7 4 4 1 7 4 5 Centered Title Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Centered Titles should be surrounded by two equal signs like the following No Trespassing Script Note Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one bl
269. o format existing text as Underline Select the text Then e Click on the Underline Button labeled with a U on the Top Toolbar e Or press CMD U Italicizing Text To format existing text as talic Select the text Then e Click on the Italics Button labeled with an I on the Top Toolbar e Or press CMD I on the keyboard Striking OutText B U 7 N To format existing text as Strikeout Select the text Then Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 73 1 9 15 5 1 9 15 6 1 9 15 7 Press CMD K on the keyboard Removing Text Formatting Select the text to remove formatting from e Click on the Normal Button label with an N on the Top Toolbar e Or press CMD DASH on the keyboard Applying Multiple Text Formats You can apply multiple formats to existing text e g make text both Bold and Italicized without re selecting it multiple times Hold down the SHIFT key while applying any of the text formats above The text remains highlighted ready for you to apply the next format If you d prefer text to remain highlighted after you ve applied a text format without using the SHIFT key 1 Under the Tools menu select Options 2 Select the Text Entry Editing button 3 Uncheck the Selecting Bold Italics or Underline turns off Block box Changing Case You can change the case of existing text without re typing it using these options e Uppercase e Lowercase e nitial Capitals e Capitaliz
270. o if you only open one port number let the users know which one has been opened iPartner can also accept incoming connections on these same port numbers Although it is not absolutely necessary to allow incoming connections it will be more convenient for the users to allow incoming connections on these ports The optimal configuration for iPartner would be Outgoing and Incoming connections allowed on ports 2200 2136 2184 and 2245 A more secure but still fully functional configuration would be Outgoing and Incoming connections allowed on port 2200 the default port for iPartner The minimal configuration is Outgoing connections only on port 2200 134 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 12 2 Speak Text Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to actually read your script aloud using Microsoft s free Text to Speech engine e Setup Voices 134 e Read Document 1 12 2 1 Setup Voices Selecting Tools gt Assign Voices displays a window that allows the user to assign voices to elements of the document Element Types Se Clear Al Act Information Agnes Action Junior To assign a voice to a character or element type select an item from one af the lists at Character Name Junior left and then choose a voice from the pop Parenthetical do not read up menu below SH ie Ralph Script Note do not read Shot do not read Title do not read Age 30 Transition do not read
271. of breakdown EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 125 1 98 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 2 1 8 INTERIOR 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2e SUD 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 293 578 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 5 5 2 8 126 Movie Magic Screenwriter L 272 With Location as the Secondary sort the same script would breakdown with the locations grouped together alphabetically EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 152 t 178 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 2 1 8 INTERIOR 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 223 D B 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 5 5 2 8 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2952 358 1 2 8 1 11 5 3 Secondary Sort by Production Breakdown Print Options e Script Order First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then in the order they appear in the script without any sorting e Interior VS Exterior First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Exterior scenes before Interiors within each group e Location First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Locations alphabetically within each group e Time of Day First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts alphabetically by Time of Day within each group e Calculate Eighths by Specifies how Screenwriter should define an 1 8th of a page Historically an 1 8th of a page was one inch 6 lines Nowadays writers are allowing more than 48 lines on a page so Screenwriter gives you a choice between the
272. old seven kinds of a son of a gun Congratulations How s mother standing it She did What do you know to Eustace Mother had lunch with the CLOSE SHOT Uncle Billy is filling out a deposit slip at one of the desks UNCLE BILLY writing December twenty fourth He takes a thick envelope from his inside pocket and thumbs through the bills it contains It is evidently a large sum of money UNCLE BILLY writing Eight thousand MED SHOT door to street Potter is being wheeled in by his goon Various bank officials run over to greet him he is reading a newspaper Uncle Billy has finished filling out his slip and comes over to taunt Potter the envelope containing CLOSE SHOT Potter is now behind his desk He spreads the newspaper out in front of him muttering as he does so POTTER Bailey He sees the envelope looks inside at the money Then to his goon indicating the office door POTTER Take me back there Hurry up as they go Come on look sharp Potter opens the door just a little and peers through into the bank 13 INT BANK DAY 14 INT POTTER S OFFICE DAY 15 EXT STREET DAY the money envelope It is not there He looks puzzled thinks hard then a look of concern creeps into his eyes He begins thumping his pockets with increasing panic and looks in the waste paper basket on the floor He finally rushes through the door and out onto the street Verti
273. om 8596 to 11596 The initial size of text is chosen in the Format Element Styles window Changing the size will effect how many lines fit on the page Header and Footer To print the same text across the top of each page such as Page Numbers Dates Act Scene Information use Header lines 1 and 2 To print the same text across the bottom of each page use the Footer line Under the Format menu select Header and Footer The Header and Footer screen displays Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 117 Header and Footer Header 1 Header 2 Footer Codes Po Act Break Scene Scene Label Date Flush Right Put in Date As p L Month Day Year fe Manth Day Year F3 Day Month Year F3 Day Month rear Rd Put in Act Break As SN SZ MN ry SZ MN J Numbers J Letters Words fe WORDS J Roman Numerals Put in Scene Label As p a e Roman Numerals oy E SW E gt Numbers LJ Letters e Words fe WORDS Print Headers On fe Mot Page One F3 Every Page AS Every Page Except First Page of Scene Align Headers Footers Header Footer Margins Inches Flush Left Flush Right left L5 Right 1 0 B SetFont Blank Lines Following Header l Preview Cancel Comision ipii B pisi a omiiia Eeer a ki 1 11 3 1 Header and Footer Text You can have one or two lines of Header Text and one line of Footer Text Type in any text in the appropriate
274. on is used expanding it to CAROL ANN automatically NOTE To use Aliases for Character Names and Substitution Text you must have the option Spell Check as you Type amp Edit checked To do this go into the Tools menu select Options and click on the Spelling button Creating Alias Text 1 1 Under the Format menu select User Lists The User Lists screen displays User Lists Alias Text A Character Names B 2 Click on the element button of the User List you want to add to A lettered list of items displays To add a new text item type it into a blank box In this example we ll add CAROL ANNE User Lists Mias a TL A CAROL ANNE B e es E M e sna ea ms ea na oma na es em rn 3 Click in the Alias box located to the left of the Text box Type the abbreviation for selected Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 65 User List text using at least 2 characters For this example type in CA as the alias text User Lists CA n LI E 2 A RO L A N N E R p A M MM77 Us Extensions 4 Click on OK to save your changes to the script s User Lists 1 8 29 2 Capitalization of Alias Text With two exceptions expanded Alias Text ta
275. onary window on the left To allow Screenwriter to Auto Correct a word as you re typing in a script enter both incorrect and correct spellings here separated by a colon For example to Auto Correct Dramatica when it s spelled as Darmatica type in Darmatica Dramatica Note the Auto Correct feature must be turned on for this to have any effect on your typing See Auto Correct in the Spell Check section of this manual for details It s not necessary to type a space either before or after the colon The User Dictionary Editor does not distinguish between UPPERCASE and lowercase adding all words as lowercase Delete Word lIn the Dictionary window on the left highlight the word you want to Delete Click on the Delete Word button You are prompted to confirm the deletion Click on Yes to delete No to keep the word in the User Dictionary Edit Word In the Dictionary window on the left highlight the word you want to Edit Click on the Edit Word button Your word is moved from the Dictionary window to the Word Editing window Make the desired changes then click on either the Edit Word or Add Word button to save them back to the Dictionary window Exit Quits and saves the changes you made to the User Dictionaries Returns you to either Screenwriter or the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window depending where you launched it from 1 9 17 Thesaurus Screenwriter s Thesaurus finds synonyms and related words for any word you s
276. ooters On Screen WYSIWYG Chat Sound TweetTweet v Display Page Break Type on Screen This sound will play if iPartner ES receives a chat message and the Show Swear Words in Thesaurus chat window is not in front Draw Text Anti Aliased f Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses Don t put at end start of broken Action After a Search Bring Document to the Front Li Acts Like Save As F4 Leave Collapsed Search Window in Front Pagination fe Paginate When l m Idle For 1 0 Mo Real time Pagination seconds Pagination Sound None Sai Ae Cancel 3 1 13 7 1 Miscellaneious Options Miscellaneous Options Display Headers Footers On Screen WYSIWYG Display Page Break Type on Screen Show Swear Words in Thesaurus Draw Text Anti Aliased ferra Allow Fage Breaks at Ellipses Don t put at end start of broken Action Display Headers Footers On Screen WYSIWYG If checked the onscreen display represents the printed page Shows Headers Footers Page Numbers Top amp Bottom Continueds etc with less screen space for text Unchecked these items print but don t display onscreen Display Page Break Type on Screen If checked displays page break lines with Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 161 descriptive text e g FORCED PAGE as part of the line itself Unchecked the lines display but carry no onscreen description
277. or all Outline Items instead of styles Size 12 ScriptNote Colors in Outline View Same color as Note in script C Single color based on Outline Style wi Use Sounds for Outline Drag amp Drop N Up Down moves rows Start Drag Sound Gi Left Promotes row Right Demotes row Dragging Sound Promote Demote Sound Moved Row Sound 1 13 14 Script Format Options The script formats supplied with Screenwriter for Screenplay Sitcom Sitcom 2 Stage Play or Multimedia can be customized to your preference The changes affect the current script or can be saved as a default to affect all new scripts created using that format Formats for the Television Templates can also be changed to reflect the different format of a new TV show for example Change options for specific script formats by using the Element Styles screen Under the Format menu select Element Styles A screen similar to the following displays 174 Movie Magic Screenwriter Element Styles dr Lu Linez r E fa Ld alasdi asdfasdfasdif iik jihes juni Left 1 5 psurustilkh Sh ikIsiuggs ifshniners menea njksbugibk jigi ped ic guk E h Left Margin Right Margin Line Spacing in Lines Parentheticals Scene Headings Interline 1 n Shots Right 1 n LEFT amp RIGHT MARGINS are the cio NES distances measured from the left and right edges of the page ALLCAP
278. ore Cont d CONT D More Text MORE Center Character Names lf checked all Character Names are centered horizontally across the page an unconventional choice Unchecked each Character Name starts at the same left margin position Character Continueds as Allows you to choose one of these options for adding a Continued to a Character Name when dialogue is split by an Action element e No Automatic Character Continueds If checked Continued is not added to the Character Name on the second speech e Extension If checked Continued is placed in parentheses after the Character Name for example KATY CONT D on the second speech e Parenthetical lf checked Continued is placed in a Parenthetical element beneath the Character Name on the second speech e Only when Extensions Match lf checked adds a Continued to the Character Name on the second speech only if both speeches are of the same type e g V O Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 177 1 13 14 1 3 1 13 14 1 4 Unchecked adds a Continued even if the first speech was normal Dialogue and the second is V O for example Continued Separator Allows you to enter a character to use to separate a Character Name Extension from a Character Name Continued Default is the semi colon The Set Style option lets you determine how Character Name Extensions and Continueds are separated either by the Separator character or by parentheses Cont d Text
279. ormat designed for writing novels Though most every word processor can produce this format it is provided to make your writing experience more complete Multimedia A format designed for writing non linear scripts for Multimedia Interactive projects with decision branching and a graphical flowchart view Like Television Multimedia has no one standard format User Defined Displays a menu of any script formats you ve previously defined Select one and the onscreen script is reformatted to those settings From a Script Displays a menu of all available Screenwriter scripts Allows you to load the format from an existing script for example if you re writing your second Friends script you can load the format from the first one you wrote 1 7 2 Other Formats e Animation Use the Screenplay format For Screenwriter features specific to Animation 32 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 7 3 1 7 4 Production see the Production Features chapter e AudioVisual Use the Screenplay format Screenwriter currently supports limited AV script features with its Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue capacity While Left and Right Columns display onscreen sequentially in a staggered manner they print correctly side by side See Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue in the Writing the Script chapter for more details e Word Processor Used from within any other format Puts you in a mode where Tab and Return function as in normal
280. ormatting of the outline styles as they appear in the NaviDoc and the document iul Act Breaks Shots s Scene Labels ivi Notes w Scene Headings Style Name Print Frame Colors Act Break MOA Sequence Sg dotted CR F Scene Label v E i Seege Deed iG i Scene Heading d BI Beat amp Dotted WS e Include these standard styles in Outline View Makes the selected standard document styles part of the NaviDoc outline styles list e New Outline Style Button Creates a new user defined outline style e Delete Style Button Removes the selected user defined outline style from the table e Style Name The outline style label that appears in NaviDoc menu lists e Style Level The indent level of the outline style from zero 0 to nine 9 The higher the style level number is the further the style is indented to the 106 Movie Magic Screenwriter right e Print Controls the printing of the style when printing the document The choices are Yes and No The default is Yes Document styles are exempt from this control e Frame Assigns a frame to the outline style The frame choices of available include None Dotted Gray Thin Line Thick Line and Groove The default is None Document styles are exempt from this control e Colors For Outline Styles this option controls the text and background colors of the outline style in the NaviDoc Outline Panel and document For Docume
281. orrect Typos As you re writing Spell Check can correct the most commonly made typos for you For example teh is corrected to the wnat becomes want etc This saves you the time of going back and manually correcting typos and makes any Spell Check you run go faster To turn Auto Correct on 1 Under the Tools menu select Options 2 At the Options screen select the Spelling button 3 Check the Spell Check as you Type amp Edit box this must be checked for Auto Correct to work 4 Check the Auto Correct Typos box Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 77 5 Change these other Auto Correct settings if desired Max Length Sets the maximum word length of typos to auto correct If on a slower computer set this to a lower number Screenwriter uses a default word length of 25 letters Beep on Unknown Words Alerts you to any suspected typos that Auto Correct is unable to correct for you Prompt on Multiple Words Gives you a choice of words when the typo could have two or more correct spellings If unchecked Auto Correct makes the decision for you AutoCapitalize Character Names Capitalizes the first letter of all Character Names in Dialogue Action and Notes To be capitalized by Auto Correct a character name must either have been used previously in the script or exist in the Character Name User List When using names such as Mark or Art in your script Auto Correct also ca
282. ourier Old font for printing If this doesn t work then try turning off the print manager in the Main Control Panel if this still doesn t work then try a different print driver like HPII for HP4 Q I have a laptop computer with a touch pad I have noticed that my cursor jumps from one place to another by itself why does this happen A Most likely you accidentally tap on your touch pad which causes the cursor to jump Q I decided to change a name of one of the characters in my script that have just written where can I find change character name feature A Use Search amp Replace under Search menu to change character names Q Can I edit my pop up character name list so that character that rarely speak do not clutter the menu A Select Hide Names in Pop Up List under Format menu Q accidentally put in a forced page break how do get rid of it A Put your cursor under the forced page break and press Back Space key or select Remove Forced Page under Edit menu Q In a locked script have deleted several pages in a row Now Movie Magic Screenwriter prints blank pages Is there a way to consolidate all the blank pages on one with the appropriate indication in the header A First ensure that the option PRINT SEPARATE FULL PAGE OMITTED PAGES on Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 255 the revision page of the Tools Options Menu is not checked and then delete all the text including the word OMITTE
283. oves to the Dialogue element following the Parenthetical BERT What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in whispering IT knew if I were drowning you d try to save me Type a Left Parenthesis in Dialogue as Text To type in Dialogue as text instead of creating a Parenthetical element press CIR This is actually typed by pressing CTRL SHIFT 9 Transition With the cursor at the beginning of any blank element type any Transition text ending in to ocreenwriter automatically formats and spaces it correctly A new Scene Heading element is created and a Pop up List of Initial Scene Heading Text displays D Iransitions CUT TO DISSOLVE TO FADE OUT Or press RETURN in a blank Action element and type t for Make this a Transition Shot At the beginning of any blank element type any Shot Text until you customize the User Lists see User Lists later in this chapter the only Shot Text that Screenwriter initially recognizes is ANGLE ON or BACK TO SCENE It is automatically formatted as a Shot element Or press RETURN in a blank Action element and type h for Make this a Shot 48 Movie Magic Screenwriter ANGLE ON BACK TO SCENE PAN SHOT AS GEORGE RUNS BY Select a Shot type from the popup list or type the text for your Shot Press RETURN and a new Action element is created 1 8 15 Centered Title You can create a centered title that doesn t contain
284. ovie Magic Screenwriter and this manual assumes a basic familiarity with Macintosh OS X Teaching or supporting the operating system is beyond the scope of this documentation For help with OS X go to your Apple OS X manual OS X online Help or contact Apple Corporation Here is a link to some General Computer Tutorials for Mac located at Screenplay com http www screenplay com support tutorials index html Selecting Screenwriter Commands There is usually more than one way of performing a function in Screenwriter For ease of use this manual shows you how to select commands using the Mouse and the Main Menu Bar As you become more familiar with Screenwriter you many want to use Keyboard Shortcuts and Toolbar Icons F di Screenwriter File Edit View Format Goto NaviDoc Tools Production Window OO OO BE TUN 6 EE c3 A mp HIA 1o09 PB E v eem Sg Lais To see what command a Toolbar Icon represents use the mouse to move the cursor over the icon without clicking on it A box of explanatory Hint text displays directly beneath the icon and any Quick Key shortcut displays on the left of the Bottom Status Bar e For a list of Main Menu Bar commands see the Appendix chapter entitled Screenwriter 6 Menus 218 e For a list of Keyboard Shortcuts see the Appendix chapter entitled Key Assignments On Line Help When writing your script help wit
285. pitalizes the words mark and art To avoid this Pause Autocorrection under the Spell menu Type the word with your desired capitalization move past the word then resume Auto Correct by clicking on Pause Autocorrection again All Caps Makes Character Names ALL CAPS wherever they appear 6 Click on OK to return to your script The following options work both during Auto Correct and when you run a manual Spell Check Correct Double Capitals Corrects words that start with two capital letters instead of one such as SCheduling AutoCapitalize Sentences Capitalizes the first letter in all Sentences in Dialogue Action and Notes Except Following Shots Shots also known as secondary Sluglines can be used to emphasize an object or person with the following Action giving more detail To have the combined Shot and Action read as one sentence with the Action sentence not capitalized check this box Auto Space Sentences to Spaces Ensures that every sentence has a consistent number of spaces after the period Set the value from 1 to 9 If you hit the space bar once the program will automatically put the set amount of spaces To prevent auto spacing a particular sentence enter Hard Spaces after the period instead of regular spaces Enter a Hard Space by pressing SHIFT CMD SPACE Treat as a Sentence End in Dialogue for the purposes of Auto Capitalization amp spacing Treats a right parenthesis in Dialo
286. plays Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 115 Document Layout 1 All Margin Values are in units of inches Line Spacing values are in percentage points LES m ET mx i Rik Ca ARS Lnb pan m3 RN HET el Fir wh das e a urr La hLig ma hm m hela yraa biy p a a m l rd y Em cnld de r siy teas Foe tle 44h ul Fae Zi Fel mi clothes 1m gl cE Fir Je auri hi E Tap Margin zp Hh Lr ma che rem ooo a LE 8 rtl 34 Bottom Margin Binding Adjustment Text Line Spacing 35 Blank Line Spacing D 1 v Windows Compatibility Made E L E amp T DEN NE ETH LEER Cl d RIT ard cfm el rk ruci rh Sc Il bcr Lir maler ltr Farrr j Em Approximate Lines on Page Duk fe ure a gl wie d GR Du snc tc cda direc Foldsy Lt Ge Altick mi Curre nt Total Page C Ou nt Eug mir dry rerinliig parri vn tan PO om l n ba Tembe rlgs ai rlk dcan gt m kota Mach ae K ocn com Ce Kee P ba o tw chier Save as Defaults for New Scripts Fe un km canter Hw Col mg tothe nd m EemRd aum Cancel At the left of the screen is a Sample Page showing how a typical page will look with the current settings Adjustments made to the Top Margin Bottom Margin or Binding Adjustment change the Sample Page display Top Margin This is the fixed space between the top edge of the page and the first line of the Page Header Adjustable in increments of
287. ption enabled if you press ENTER after an action line that follows a Dialogue line it will automatically put in the same name for you and drop you into dialogue This is because Action in play format is the same as parentheticals but should be broken over page breaks With this option set the ONLY way to put in two lines of action in a row is to press CTRL ENTER to explicitly have it enter action NOTE This option ONLY takes effect when you are in a document that has Action in Parentheticals and has the option Cont d Dialogue shouldn t have Character Names These are typical settings for Play Format 1 13 3 3 Other Editing Preferences p Keep Insertion Caret Above Window Bottom 6 gt l Lines A LT j CH Keep Insertion Caret Above Window Bottom S Lines Controls the number of lines above the bottom of the window that the insertion caret the blinking editing marker can go before forcing the text to be scrolled vertically The higher the number the more lines of text is visible above the insertion caret Zz Tab in Dialogue goes to a Parenthetical C Drag and Drop should break Elements in Middle Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 151 Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical lf checked QuickType creates a new Parenthetical element when you press TAB in a Dialogue element To go to a Character Name element instead press TAB again Unchecked pressing TAB creates a new Character Name element Drag and Drop
288. pts Allow Words that are five or more letters long to extend 1 or 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin lf checked allows a right margin slop for smoother looking right margins in all elements Unchecked maintains strict right margins yi Allow words that are five or more letters long to extend or 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin 176 Movie Magic Screenwriter BUTTONS Use Current Font for All Elements Revert C Cancel J Use Current Font for All Elements Applies the font type and size but not formatting such as bold italic etc in the current element to all other elements Reset The Reset button works as an Undo button for the changes you ve made to an individual Element It restores the settings to the way they were before you made changes Use the Reset button before clicking OK to exit the menu and save changes to Script Formats or it will have no effect Save as Defaults for all New Scripts If checked applies any changes you ve made to a script s elements to all new scripts OK Exits and applies Script Format changes you ve just made to the script Cancel Exits and discards Script Format changes you ve just made to the script 1 13 14 1 2 Character Names 3 Center Character Names fe Extension Only when Extensions Match y Parenthetical Style S GEH Continued Separator FP ias 93 bod 60 Contd Text CONT D M
289. r 1 11 3 ensures that you cannot use cheating functions that are not compatible across the two platforms Approximate of Lines on Page As you make changes to the Margins and Line Spacing items above this number recalculates the number of lines that can fit on your page It assumes you re using Courier 12 point font and will be inaccurate if you mix fonts or sizes Current Total Page Count As you make changes to the Margins and Line Spacing items above this number recalculates the number of pages in your document It assumes you re using Courier 12 point font and will be inaccurate if you mix fonts or sizes Stretch Short Pages to Fill Screenwriter s rules for page breaking as set on the Page Break screen of Format Element Styles can result in pages with more white space at the bottom known as short pages Check this box to have Screenwriter stretch the text on short pages to make them look more like regular pages e Short by a min of lines Enter the minimum number of lines a page must be short before it will be stretched Accepts values between 1 and 10 with a default of 3 e Stretch by a max of lines Enter the maximum number of lines to stretch a page by Accepts values between 1 and 10 with a default of 3 Save as Defaults for New Documents If checked all new documents will have these Document Layout settings as the default Document Font Size You can adjust the size of the printed text fr
290. r Act Scene Information Unchecked that information prints as the first line of each box e Print Separate Page Number Column lf checked Page Numbers print in a separate column Unchecked they print in the upper right corner of the main box e Print Separate Day Night Count Column If checked prints a separate right hand column for Day 1 type information at the end of each Scene Heading Prints D or N followed by the number e Underlining and Boldfacing of Act Scene Info Scene Headings e Print total boxes at end of pg lf checked prints 3 Totals boxes at the foot of each page e Print Scene Description Text if any If checked prints the scene description text Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 243 e Specify Set List Settings 5 Brings up the Generate Set List window 1 15 1 10 6 2 Generate Set List COPY Prints the Set List on its own without the need to also print Rundown Sheets GEES Header Footer Page Numbers Prefix for Page Numbers Act Break None Pg f Bold am E 1 Starting Page n e Underline scene Headings Final Text M Bold END OF SHOW L List Characters in Each Scene f Underline Bold Al Caps Font Palatino ES Size f Always Print Set List with Rundown Sheets D Put in Cliphoard Rather Than Print f Underline Print Now Cancel Options This tab controls on which pages the header and footer te
291. r Screenwriter script click the Load Button then change the List files of type from Title Page to Screenwriter Scripts Select a file ending in SCW and click OK Printing a Title Page From within Title Page Publisher print the Title Page by clicking the Print The Title Page Button To print from outside Title Page Publisher under the File menu select Print On the Print menu select page or scenes to print and check Print Title Page Selecting Entire Script automatically checks the Print Title Page box Script Formats Screenwriter has pre set format files for e Screenplay e Filmed Sitcom e Taped Sitcom e TV Templates e Stage Play e Radio Play e Novel e Multimedia Interactive As a default Screenwriter loads the screenplay format each time you open a blank script file However you can easily switch to one of the other formats Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 31 1 7 1 Loading a Script Format Under the Format menu select Load Script Format and click on the format you want If you already have a script open and displayed onscreen loading a different format applies the new settings to your existing script Screenplay The standard feature film format also used for most MOW s including Miniseries Episodic Dramas including Soaps and Animation Sitcom Version L A general sitcom format for use on filmed shows Action is capitalized Dialogue is double spaced and Parentheticals are indented S
292. re are two sub options under the Scene Character Lists menu item e Generate Displays the Scene Character List Generation menu e Remove Removes any previously generated Scene Character Lists 246 Movie Magic Screenwriter NOTE When you have generated lists each time you go to the Print menu it will normally ask you if you want to regenerate your lists Select YES when you ve added removed characters from any scenes otherwise you can select NO If you don t want it to prompt you in this manner then uncheck the option Prompt to Regenerate Lists before Printing which is found on the Scene Character List Generation menu 1 15 1 10 7 Animation Locking Shows you options for Animation Production Features X Print Dialogue Numbering in Script Setup Numbering Layout Lock Current Rev Marks Unlock One Rev Mark Level Lock Dialogue Numbering Unlock Dialogue Numbering Adjust Dialogue Numbering e Print Numbering in Script 2 5 If checked Displays and Prints the dialogue speech numbering in the script as well as in the Animation Recording Script report A checkmark displays next to Print Numbering in Script To turn the display of Numbering off click on it again e Setup Numbering Layout This setup window allows you to control the way Animation Dialogue is printed e Lock Current Rev Marks Locks the Current Revision Marks and increases the Revision Mark Level e Unlock One Rev Mark Level R
293. read many plays printed in this format it is not the one used in the professional play writing world NOTE When you are in the Radio Script format Quick TypeTM functions a little differently to accommodate the text flow in this format Typing in a known Character Name on a blank action line and then pressing the colon automatically takes you to Dialogue In addition pressing he TAB key following a colon in an action line automatically takes you to Dialogue Parentheticals Outdent Parentheticals If checked wraps parenthetical text so that the second line text lines up under the first line text and not the parenthesis Pushes wrapped text over by one character space 178 Movie Magic Screenwriter Parentheticals are Separate Element lIf checked puts Parenthetical text on its own line above the Dialogue and below the Character Name Unchecked puts Parenthetical text on the same line as Dialogue rd Outdent Parentheticals wal Parentheticals are Separate Elements OUTDENTING is when the left parenthesis f is one character to the left of the text of the PARENTHETICAL with the text word wrapping under the first letter rather than under the parenthesis If you do not have PARENTHETICALS AS SEPARATE ELEMENTS checked then parentheticals will be part of the dialogue 1 13 14 1 5 Scene Headings Time af Day Dashes 2 Spaces 1l I Number of 5paces after INT EXT P scene Numbers
294. ript Order Time of Day Normalization is performed any scene that ends with CONTINUOUS LATER or SAME TIME is automatically given the previous Scene Heading s Time of Day Movie Magic Scheduling File Prints a breakdown to disk saving it as a Movie Magic Scheduling import file with a file extension of SEX It contains the Scene Number Scene Heading Starting Page Number and page count in Eighths of a page and all items Tagged with Breakdown Tagging Options under Secondary Sort and Miscellaneous are grayed out and unselectable Script Breakdown Sheets Prints breakdown sheets that include any items you ve tagged in Breakdown Tagging 1 14 6 1 2 Secondary Sort by Secondary sort order allows you to specify how you want the scenes sorted within the Primary groupings of Interior VS Exterior Location Time of Day or Characters For example Interior VS Exterior as the Primary sort and Script Order as a Secondary sort would give this kind of breakdown EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY es 4 Aye 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 Z 1789 INTERIOR 2 HOSPITAL DAY 255 B70 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 2 3 9 8 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 5 5 2 8 1 2 8 With Location as the Secondary sort the same script would breakdown with the locations grouped together alphabetically EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 1 2 T8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 aro Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 207
295. rrect Typos 76 158 Auto Revision Marks 192 Auto Revision 237 239 Auto Space Sentences 76 Auto Update Locked Headers 164 Avid Editor Format 262 B BACK TO SCENE 47 62 BACKSPACE 70 Backup Directory 152 Backup Icon 270 Basic Information 14 Beep on Unknown Words 76 Beginning of current line 66 Blank Elements 155 BlankLines 119 Blank Script 151 Block Selection 68 Blocked Text 120 Blue 187 239 Blue Highlights 239 Bold 72 74 117 175 264 Bold Headlines 37 Bolding Text 72 Bookmark 91 Bookmarks 233 270 Bookmarks Controls 92 Bookmarks List 92 Bookmarks Panel 79 91 Bookmarks Panel Options 93 Bottom 232 233 270 Bottoms 28 Box Min Height 241 Box Width 241 Break Action 183 Break Dialogue 184 Breakdown Categories 211 Breakdown Sheets 205 212 Breakdown Tagging 209 211 Breakdown 237 240 Breakdowns 123 Breaking Elements 69 Buff 187 BUTTONS 175 C Calculate Eighths 207 Calculate Eighths by 126 Calendar 235 Cap amp Bold Word 73 Capitalization 65 Capitalize Word 73 Capitals 175 Cascade 22 247 Case 73 Cedila 74 Center Act Info 180 Center on page 28 Centered 48 Centered Title 35 48 183 Centers 28 Change Character Name 221 Change Dictionary 235 Change Element Type 51 229 Changing Case 73 Character Continueds 176 Character Extension 43 44 45 Character Extensions 149 Character Format 108 Character List 120 Character Name 35 40 43 45 52 53 65 Charac
296. rrent Auto Revision Marks on or off for the currently displayed script A checkmark appears next to Auto Revision Marks when they are on e Auto Revision Colors Shows options for Auto Revision Colors Any new text you add is automatically highlighted in the color you select Useful when you have different people working on the script and you want to show who s made what changes e Blue Highlights new text in blue e Red Highlights new text in red e Green Highlights new text in green e User Defined Color Highlights new text in a color of your choice Requires Screenwriter to convert certain characters which may be in your script to codes first e Turn Revision Color Off Turns your color selection off displaying any new text you add as normal Red Blue Green User Defined v Turn Revision Color Off 1 15 1 10 3 Remove Controls removal of various items in the document Current Revision Marks Strikeout Style or Text Text Color p Scene Heading w o OMITTED e Current Revision Marks Removes all current revision marks from the document e Strikeout Style or Text Removes all Strikeout Text or just the Strikeout Codes leaving the text intact e Text Color 240 Movie Magic Screenwriter Red Highlights Blue Highlights Green Highlights User Defined Color Highlights e Red Style Removes red highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e Blue Style
297. rt then Scriptware Tagged 3 In the file name field Enter C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts lt File Name gt TAG Click on the Export button to save the Export file 4 Exit Scriptware Now follow the Direct Import instructions above 1 15 4 6 Cleaning up Imported Scripts Screenwriter may require you to do some cleaning up after importing a script To correct a mis recognized Element place the cursor anywhere in the element Click on the Current Element Window in the center of the Top Toolbar and select the desired Element If the imported script was in TV format you may have to reset the script s formats See Choosing a Script Format for more details You ll also need to put back in the forced Page Breaks between scenes and re enter the Act and Scene Information Unfortunately due to a lack of standardization in TV formats the import function is unable to recognize all possible permutations NOTE Although the Import function is highly accurate we recommend you check all imported scripts for errors before printing multiple copies Running SmartCheck helps though even it can t catch all errors 262 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 15 5 Exporting Documents 1 15 5 1 Exporting to other scriptwriting or word processing programs is a matter of saving a script in a different format A script exported from Screenwriter is designed to be an editable copy not an exact duplicate It will not have exactly t
298. s New File Existing File Scrap File e New File Copies the selected text and saves it as a New file with the name you enter in the Save As menu e Existing File Copies the selected text and places it at the end of the existing file you select in the Open menu e Scrap File Copies the selected text and places it at the end of an automatically generated Scrap File which has the same name as your script but which ends with Scrap This file is a great place to put text and scenes you want to remove from your script but might want to go back to later e Cut to 25 This menu item will only be available if you have selected i e blocked text in your script If this is the case Screenwriter takes you to a sub menu with the following options Cub En Mew File Existing File Scrap File Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 223 e New File Cuts the selected text and saves it as a New file with the name you enter in the Save As menu e Existing File Cuts the selected text and places it at the end of the existing file you select in the Open menu e Scrap File Cuts the selected text and places it at the end of an automatically generated Scrap File which has the same name as your script but which ends with Scrap This file is a great place to put text and scenes you want to remove from your script but might want to go back to later e Select All Selects the entire contents of the current
299. s Locked Script Options to work the way you work Under the Format menu select Element Styles The Editing Script Formats screen displays Click on the Locked Scripts button You ll see the following window Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 193 Unlocked C Locked Multilock ed Scene Omitted Text OMITTED Omitted Thru Text THRU Omitted And Text AND Page Numbers Acscene Numbering scheme Normal IA Flipped Al 8 Use the Following Scenes Number Multilock After A Scene ei 2C1 J 2CA Multilock AfterNormalSceme ey rai mu 2 A J 2AA fe A2 Use Alternate Scene Numbering J Revision Mark Text Revision Mark Right Margin pg 4 LONGO CM _ Locked Letter Skip List 1 14 4 1 Locked Scene Headings To use Scene Heading Locking you need to click on its tab Unlocked C Locked Multilocked e Unlocked Normal Adding or deleting Scene Headings causes scenes to renumber automatically in sequential order This does not affect page breaks e Locked Adding or deleting Scene Headings does not affect existing scene numbers generating A Scenes and OMITTED scenes instead If you add scenes between Scenes 23 and 24 for example the first added scene becomes 234A the second 23B etc This does not affect page breaks For example if you add a new scene before the first scene in the script the new first scene is numbered OA Multi Locked
300. s found in 6 0 on both Macintosh and Windows NOTE mmsw files are NOT compatible with pre 6 0 scw versions of Movie Magic Screenwriter but the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 software is compatible with most all earlier document formats To create pre 6 0 compatible documents see Saving Documents as SCW files below Opening Existing Documents Opening existing documents is done in the normal ways e Double click on the document icon e Use the File gt Open command in Screenwriter e Drag the document onto the Movie Magic Screenwriter icon Saving Documents in 6 0 MMSW Format For new documents created in 6 0 or later the File gt Save File gt Save As or File gt Save A Copy commands save the document with the mmsw extension pay When saving a document created in a pre 6 0 scw version of Screenwriter for the first time Screenwriter creates a new copy of the document with the mmsw extension This prevents the overwriting of original pre 6 0 versions of your documents After you have saved a document once it remains a mmsw file and does not create new copies when you save it again Saving Documents as SCW Files At times it is necessary to share documents with other Movie Magic Screenwriter owners using pre 6 0 versions of the software To save your file in the pre 6 0 format SCW use the Export to submenu located in the File menu and choose Screenwriter 4 x and 2000 scw from the list of file
301. sed through the Print Window Under the File menu select Print You ll see the following window Check one of the print selection radio buttons on the top half of the screen Screenwriter s default is to select Current Page Current Page Forwards Entire Script Selected Text Selected Pages 4 Selected Scenes List C Revision Asterisked Pages 3 Production Breakdowns Dialogue Character List eg KE gem Scene Heading List Script Notes KN F3 Outline Report vi Run SmartCheck before this print Job Print in Reverse Order Preview Print Title Page Cancel e Current Page If selected prints the page that the cursor is currently on e Forwards lf selected prints from the current page through to the end of the document e Entire Document If selected prints the entire document If you ve created a title page in the Title Page Publisher it is also printed e Selected Text lf checked prints the text block you ve selected in your document If no text is selected this option is grayed out and unselectable Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 121 e Selected Pages H selected prints the Pages you select Enter the page numbers in the same order they appear in the document i e lower numbers first Enter individual page numbers separated by commas 1 3 32 Enter a section of consecutive pages using a dash between the first and last page 45 78 or 89 end
302. separates the notes in the notes list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick oolid and Groove This option also controls the color of the Row Lines 1 10 8 11 Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally oynch ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row synch OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled 1 10 8 12 Note Display Controls A b These controls determine the font size and lines of visible text T for the notes in the notes list of the NaviDoc Notes Panel e Viewable Notes Lines Control left vertical slider This control sets the number of viewable lines of each note in the notes list The default position of the slider is all the way down and corresponds to view all lines the maximum number of lines allowed Moving the slider up decreases the number of viewable lines The minimum number is one line e Font Size Control right vertical slider This control sets the font size for the text in the notes list The default position is the middle of the slider and Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 91 corresponds to the font size set in the Notes Panel options Sliding up reduces the font size to a mi
303. sex Screenwriter can export all your tagged breakdown items for every scene to a Screenwriter Export file with the file Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 263 1 15 5 2 1 15 5 3 extension SEX This file can be imported directly into Movie Magic Scheduling where breakdown information is automatically transferred to Breakdown Sheets and Production Strips enabling you to easily organize a production schedule and print strips for the Production Board e Avid Editor Format txt Used to export to the video editing software by Avid e Final Draft Not Available on Mac e Scriptware Tagged Used to export to Scriptware a Windows script formatting program 3 Enter a new File Name for the exported file Screenwriter automatically adds the correct export file extension according to your chosen export format 4 Click on OK to save the export file Importing a Screenwriter Export script To import a Screenwriter export file into another program check that program s manual for Importing instructions If that doesn t help call the program s Technical Support number and ask how best to do it The script must have been exported from Screenwriter in a format readable by the other program Write Brothers is only able to provide technical support on the export side of this procedure Unfortunately we have no control over how another company s programs deal with importing Cut and Paste Exporting You can
304. should break elements in the Middle If checked dragging and dropping items into the middle of text splits the text element and inserts the dropped material with it s original element designation Unchecked it inserts the item after the current element 1 13 4 Files Preferences Screenwriter Preferences Files Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline When Screenwriter starts it should Leave you in a Blank Document Automatically check for updates Monthly Display Open File Dialog E Retrieve Last Document you worked on F3 Restore Last Workspace Opening and Saving Documents Default Document Folder Users Chris Documents Movie Magic Screenwriter Beta 4 Password Protect Scripts When creating new documents PM MEAM MM NG Retain previous versions of documents BK files Show NaviDoc Panel From Template 4 fi Retain upto 5 7 previous versions of a document Place previous version files in A subfolder named Previous Versions ZS The same folder as the document Create a new previous version file ES SE EE Keen DIEI Timed Backup Frequency 5 Minutes Only once per editing session Timed Backup Sound None Every time a document is sawed Cancel i 1 13 4 1 When Screenwriter starts it should When Screenwriter starts it should Leave you in a Blank Document
305. side of the screen You can change these options Edit Revision Draft Colors WHITE BLUE PINK YELLOW GREEN GOLDENROD SALMON CHERRY BUFF TAN d Drag and drop to change the NewColor j _ Delete Color j order of the colors Current color WHITE KS Display Page Colors On Screen After the last color is used it should fed Save as Defaults for All New Scripts l fei BLUE Loop to Double P CJ WHITE Cancel Color Window The Color Window has the name of the color and the actual color in the background A color that is selected will have a black dot to the left of its name and will set the current revision draft color Add New Color Allows you to add a New color for Revisions for example when all the existing Revision colors have been used Clicking this button will bring up a prompt to type the new color s Name Assign a color from the Color Palette that displays or design a Custom color The New Color displays after the currently selected color Delete Color Allows you to remove a Color from the Color list Click on the Color then on this button When prompted click Yes to remove the color No to cancel Edit Color Name Click this button to change the name of the currently selected revision color Edit How Color Displays This changes the way a particular draft color will appear on 204 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 6 1 14 6 1 screen Click on a color in the left
306. similar to the one below The Mame Bank X Favorites Male Names Female Names Family Names Sal e Personal Favorites Saleem E Salem Salim Salmon Salomo Salomon Salomone Salvador Salvatore Salvidor Salm Sammie Sammy A Sampson Angelo Cooper Killian Mac Michael Quinton Highlight any name s you want to add to your favorites list and then click the move button with the gt above J K L M N A P Q R 3 u W W A Y Z Name to Insert Angelo l Bold ALL CAPS Insert Name into Script Close Name Bank Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 139 1 13 Customizing Screenwriter ocreenwriter comes with a set of program option defaults As you become more familiar with ocreenwriter s features you may want to customize these default settings to the way you work Most of Screenwriter s program settings are found on the Screenwriter gt Preferences menu Under the Screenwriter menu select Preferences At the Preferences window go to one of the following option screens by clicking on its tab Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline You can make changes to e Editing Options including QuickType e Files Options e SmartCheck Options 54 e Spelling Options 157 e Miscellaneous Options e Revisions Options Printer Options Keyboard Options e Anima
307. sing just two keys TAB and RETURN Your fingers need never leave the keyboard unlike using a Control key shortcut or using the mouse enabling you to stay in the flow of writing your script Based on which Element the cursor s in Screenwriter makes an informed guess as to what you d like to do next It places you in the logical next Element and pops up a menu of possible choices For example if the cursor s in a blank Character Name element and you press RETURN a list of all the Character Names in your script pops up for your selection For Tab amp Return to work QuickType must be enabled To turn QuickType on 1 Under the Screenwriter menu select Preferences 2 At the Preferences screen click on the Editing tab 3 Check the Enable QuickType Entry box V Enable QuickType Entry __ w Auto Pop Up Locations w Auto Pop Up Time of Day w Use SmartTab E Running Shot List Running Transition List v Auto Pop Up List of Character Names m When parsing Locations only strip known Times The following element instructions use the Tab amp Return method with QuickType enabled Fade In On the first line of a new script press RETURN Attention A pop up box displays asking you if you want it to start your script with FADE IN e Click on the Yes button to put it in e Click on the No button to start your script without it Next a Scene Heading element is automatically created
308. splays the triangle points downward Y END OF MONTAGE 000 EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET George is walkinq along the When a Note is hidden the triangle points to the right EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET George is walking along the It is a raw gusty day and the breeze Draped around c Single click on the triangle to change the Note s display status e Single clicking on Hides the note e Single clicking on Shows the note Print a Note You can print Notes as a sequential report or on the reverse sides of the script pages they re facing on a script already printed so the notes are opposite the pages they refer to To print Notes 1 Under the File Menu select Print 2 A Print menu displays Check the Notes radio button 3 Click OK A Notes Print window displays Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Prints a separate Notes report of all notes listed in sequence with the page numbers they refer to Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed script Prints each Note opposite the page it refers to on the back of the previous page Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed Only asks you to insert the page preceding a Note so it can print the note for the following page Requires you to insert pages one at a time Print without Prompting requires you to insert entire script Requires you to Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 51 inser
309. sting page numbers stay the same and generates a new short A Page If you add text to page 38 for example the text flows over to a new page This new short page becomes 38A If the page 38 text flows over to two new pages the second becomes 38B NOTE Screenwriter displays different page breaks differently Normal and A Page Breaks display as a series of dashes e g The descriptive text contained within the page break line refers to the page following it It only displays if Display Page Break Type on Screen is checked under Tools Options Miscellaneous Multi Locked Once you ve locked your script and added A Pages you may want to keep the new A Page Numbering and give any new pages a new unique number Checking this option enables you to do so Any new page added between existing A Pages has a number added after it For example a page added after page 94B would be numbered 94B1 the next one 94B2 etc Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 195 1 14 4 3 1 14 4 4 If a new page is added between a normal page and an A Page it is entered using the Multi Lock Character For example a page added after page 67 would become A67 using the default Multi Lock Character Omitted Text Scene Omitted Text OMITTED m Omitted Thru Text THRU Omitted And Text AND Scene Omitted Text JH you completely delete a Scene the text of the Scene Heading and the Action Character Names Dialog etc in a Locked or M
310. sync frame disappears if you move the text cursor out of the note in the 86 Movie Magic Screenwriter document 1 10 8 1 Notes List The Notes List displays all notes in the document Clicking on a note in the note list scrolls the selection to that note in your document 1 10 8 2 Notes Controls Outline Scenes P Notes Bookmarks E LI i Es b o RI M Sec iTe Add Note Element T v C ScriptNote Category 1 Default ScriptNote E Jr ScriptNote Category 1 EN TI ScriptNote Category 2 EN TI The Notes Controls affect the display of notes and note text in the note list of the Notes Panel These controls also affect the notes in the document view 1 10 8 3 Notes Command Buttons These controls are used to add and remove notes as well as change the category of a note e Delete Note Permanently removes the selected notes from the document Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 87 and the notes list e Add Note Element Inserts a note in the document at the location of the cursor in the document and displays the note in the note list of the Notes Panel The popup list determines the note style CA Default ScriptNote ZA ScriptNote Category 1 uS MEE The keyboard command for adding a new note is CTRL N 1 10 8 4 Notes Category Controls 1 ScriptNote Category 2 EN TI These controls add and remove note categories as well as determine t
311. t tv X Qut Unselected Text Ask User for PDF Options 1 Print Using Fractional Widths 1 13 9 1 Print Bottom Continueds fe At Fixed Distance from Battom of Paper ZS Floating at Fixed Distance from Text e At Fixed Distance from Bottom of Page If selected the Bottom Scene Continueds print at the same position on each page one line below the page s Bottom Margin e Floating at Fixed Distance from Text If selected the Bottom Scene Continueds are printed two lines below the final line of text on each page This results in the Continueds appearing in different positions on each page 166 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 9 2 1 13 9 3 1 13 9 4 1 13 9 5 Print Color Text Zei In Color but grey on a black and white printer J Ignoring Color black text e In Color but grey on a black and white printer If selected prints color highlighted text in color on color printers and with a grayed background on black amp white printers e Ignoring Color black text If selected ignores color highlighted text and prints normally Production Sides v Gray Background on Unselected Text Uu x Qut Unselected Text e Gray Background on Unselected Text If checked script material NOT selected is printed over a gray background which makes the selected production sides material easier to see Unchecked all material is printed normally e X Out Unselected Text If checked script materia
312. t 1 10 8 8 Print Notes Control SS This control opens the Print Notes window where controls for printing the notes are found Print Script Notes Your notes can be printed sequentially with reference page numbers or they can be printed on the BACKS of the pages which they are facing For instance notes for page lonthe back of the title page notes for page 2 on the back of page 1 etc To do the latter vou must have first printed aut your script Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers F4 Print Notes on Facing Pages of Printed Script e Prompt You to Insert Each Page As Needed Print Without Prompting After Inserting Entire Script Select Which Color Motes to Print Uncheck All Check All 1 10 8 9 Notes Options Control E m E te This control opens the NaviDoc options window where options for the Notes Panel are found 1 10 8 10 Notes Panel Options The options for the Notes Panel can be displayed by clicking the NaviDoc Preferences show icon button in the Notes Panel You can also click on Tools Options NaviDoc to display them 90 Movie Magic Screenwriter Notes Panelfont Font Lucida Grande Size 12 a Row Lines Thick Solid re e Notes Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the notes list They include the font face and font size e RowLines This option controls the appearance of the line that
313. t many Locking options can be changed by selecting Unlock the Script under the Production menu and unchecking the appropriate checkboxes Changing the Level of Locking When the script has too many revision marks a production company may decide to send out the entire script with all the numbers reverted to normal numbering To do this with Screenwriter you need to step back undo ing one or more levels of Locking Under the Format menu select Element Styles Click on the Locked Scripts button Select the level of locking lower than currently set For example if you have Multi Locked Scene Numbers but only want Locked Scene Numbers with all the Multi Locked A Scenes 64A1 for example renumbered to be normal A Scenes uncheck Multi Locked Scene Numbers by checking Locked Scene Numbers NOTE If you unlock either a script s Page Breaks or Scene Headings all of the appropriate A Numbering is completely and permanently lost That s why it s important to make backup copies of your scripts at least daily 200 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 14 5 2 Overriding a Scene Number To manually override the number of an individual Scene Heading or Scene Info or Act Info e Put the cursor anywhere in that element e Under the Production menu select Override then Element s Numbering Override Scene Heading Number How Should Number this Scene 3 No Numbering Shot Mul
314. t mmsw otage Play mmsw Templates Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help Defualt Template Instructional Templates Generic Comic Template def GossetKayleComicTemp def Multi Media Template def Novel Template def Radio Show Template def Radio Play Templatedef Spec Script def Stage Play def Blank Templates Generic Comic Template def GossetKayleComicTemp def Multi Media Template def Novel Template def Radio Show Template def Radio Play Templatedef Spec Script def Stage Play def TV Templates TV Templates 3rd Rock from the Sun def Ally McBeal def Babylon5 def Bay Watch def Beverly Hills 91202 def Boy Meets World def BuffyTheVampireSlayer def Caroline in the City def Chicago Hope def CSI def Cybil def Dawson Creek def Days of Our Lives def Dharma and Greg def Doctor Quinn def Drew Carey Show def Early Edition def Ellen def ER def Frasier def Friends def Grace Under Fire def Hercules def Home Improvement def 267 268 Movie Magic Screenwriter Homicide def Just Shoot Me def King of the Hill def Larry Sanders def Law amp Order def Le Femme Nlikita def Living Single def Mad About You def Melrose Place def Men Behaving Badly def Millennium def Murphy Brown def My Big Fat Greek Life def Nash Bridges def New York Undercover def News Radio def NYPD Blue def Party of 5 def Promised Land def Providence def Queer as Folk def Sabrina def Scrubs def Simpso
315. t Icons 270 e New File Format zs e The View Toolbar 21 e The NaviDoc 791 o The Notes Panel o o The Bookmarks Panel 2 o The Scenes Panel a o The Outline Panel os e Outlining Features 111 o The Outline Panel es o Moving items via Drag amp Drop 108 270 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Send As Email Attachment Command 1137 e View Menu 225 e Menu Changes 218 e Modified Keyboard Commands e Shortcut Key Changes in 6 0 276 1 16 1 New Screenwriter 6 0 Icons Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 has new program document and other file icons Application Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 program Document Icon This is the icon for Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 documents Backup Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 backup files Timed Backup Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 timed backup files Template Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 template files Title Page Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 title page files 1 16 2 Screenwriter 6 0 Menu Changes The menus in Screenwriter 6 0 have under gone a major reorganization This was done for two reasons e To accommodate the NaviDoc and other new features in the menus e We felt that many of the menu items were either non intuitively named or placed and benefited from chang
316. t informs you with a dialog box When it finishes an automatic scan before printing it starts printing without any further message Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 157 1 13 6 1 13 6 1 1 13 6 2 Spelling Options Screenwriter Preferences Spelling Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline Spell Check as you Type amp Edit Required for the use of Character Name Aliases and Substitution Text Wi Been on Unknown Words Beep Sound None v Highlight Unknown Words Auto Correct Typos as you type Prompt on Multiple Words during Auto Correction Maximum 10 Auto Correct Sound f Mone Query when you Fix Auto Corrected Words Auto Capitalize wi Auto Capitalize Sentences DW Auto Capitalize Character Names Except immediately following Shots All Caps vi Correct Double Capitals e g PRoblem yv Treat as a Sentence End in dialogue for the purposes of auto capitalization amp spacing Correct Capitalization Spacing when Run Manually Ignore Capitalization when Checking Words m Auto Space Sentences to 7 7 Spaces Correct Double Capitals e g Mlstake If checked words that start with two capital letters are corrected by Auto Correct and display an error prompt in a manual Spell Check Unchecked these errors are ignored as correct The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also
317. t text box that was selected Left to Right Aligns the right most box directly against the right edge of the left most of the two boxes This option is ONLY available when you have exactly two text boxes selected Center on page Centers all selected text boxes with respect to the width of the page taking into account the binding margin if checked If more than one text box is selected then they will be centered as a group that is to say that their total width furthest left to furthest right is the value which will be used to center them rather than each one being centered individually e Undo Alignment Cancels the last alignment option selected unless the text elements in question have been otherwise dragged Align Vertically e Tops Aligns the top of all selected text boxes to the top of the first text box that was selected e Bottoms Aligns the bottom of all selected text boxes to the bottom of the first text box that was selected e Centers Vertically centers all selected text boxes with respect to the vertical center of the first text box that was selected e Top to Bottom Aligns the lower of the two boxes directly against the bottom of the upper of the two boxes This option is ONLY available when you have exactly two text boxes selected e Center on page Centers all selected text boxes with respect to the height of the page If more than one text box is selected then they will be centered as a group that is to
318. t the entire script including a Title Page Screenwriter only prints on those pages that have a Note on the following page Select Which Color Notes to Print lf you have more than one color of Note in your script check the colored boxes for the notes you want to print 1 8 17 5 Note Options 1 8 18 Formatting options for Notes can be set on the Notes page of the Element Styles command 1 Under the Format menu select Element Styles 2 Click on the Script Notes button on the right hand side Display Notes in Script If checked displays Notes onscreen as you have set their hide show status individually Unchecked all Notes are collapsed to their hidden status Print Notes in Script lIf checked Notes are treated as part of the script when printing changing the Page Breaks accordingly Unchecked they do not print or increase the script length Click Here to Set Note Color Click this button to display a Color palette Choose a color to display Notes with or create a Custom color Click OK to accept your choice Cancel to exit without changing color You are prompted to convert all Notes to the new color Click on Yes to change all the notes No to change only one Note vi Display Notes in Script Ei Print Notes in Script If you check PRINT SCRIPT NOTES IN SCRIPT then the notes WILL take up space and your script will become correspondingly longer Select the Color for Script Notes to ES be displayed in the script
319. ted between scenes 12A and 12B would be 12A1 the next one would be 12A2 and so on Multi Lk 1 AA This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Scene Headings and fall between two existing A Scenes Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Letter For example a scene inserted between scenes 12A and 12B would be 12AA the next one would be 12AB and so on Multi Lock Scene between 1 amp 1A is Determines how a Multi Lock Scene inserted between a Normal Scene and an A Scene is numbered e 1 A Adds a Dash plus the A Letter after the scene number e 1AA Adds the A Letter plus the Multi Lock Letter after the scene number e A1 Flips the normal A Scene numbering order Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 197 1 14 4 7 1 14 4 8 Multi Lock Pages To use Multi Lock Pages you need to click on its tab Multilock After A Page ore o oO o f 2C1 Ee Multilock Af E ET fe A2 Multilock After A Page This option only affects the numbering of Page Breaks that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Page Breaks and fall between two existing A Pages e 2C1 Choose this option if you want a new Page Break added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Number For example a Page inserted between Page 12A and 12B would be 12A1 the next one would
320. tem D and edit it as desired If you delete an item the list is updated when you exit the window Loading User Lists User Lists can be loaded from other Screenwriter scripts or reset to the original defaults Open the script you want to load the User Lists into Under the Format menu select Load User Lists from then one of the following formats e Screenwriter Document Loads all User Lists from another Screenwriter document e Original Defaults Reloads Screenwriter s originally installed default User Lists Loading Locations Character Names or Transitions from Screenwriter scripts Frequently a script s Locations Scene Body Text and Character Names are not actually in the User Lists but are accessed from within the script itself To make these items available to another script s User Lists you must first copy them into a User List in their original script 1 Open the script containing the User List items you want to load 2 Under the Format menu select User Lists 62 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 8 28 5 1 8 28 6 3 Click on the button of the items to copy e Character Names e Scene Body Text e Transitions 4 At the bottom left of the screen a Copy from Script button displays Click on it and a menu of the unique text items for that element displays 5 Double click on an item to copy it to the User List Click on the Close button when finished 6 Click OK to save the User List and exit ed
321. ter 6 Help 113 See Element Styles 104 1 Scene Heading egen 1 10 11 20 4 Promoting and Demoting Outline Elements 1 11 1 11 1 These icons change the outline style of selected outline items based on the style s position in the Outline Styles table e Click on the Promote button Left Arrow to promote move to a greater level in the hierarchy the outline element by assigning the style above the current style in the Outline Styles table The keyboard command for promoting an outline element is ALT LEFT ARROW e Click on the Demote button Right Arrow to demote move to a lesser level in the hierarchy the outline element by assigning the style below the current style in the Outline Styles table The keyboard command for demoting an outline element is ALT RIGHT ARROW Printing the Document Before printing a document there needs to be at least one printer specified in the Mac OS X control panel With only one printer connected Mac OS X automatically selects it as the default Page Setup ocreenwriter uses Mac OS X s Page Setup screen to let you choose default settings for all your printing in Screenwriter Under the File menu select Page Setup The Print Setup screen displays with the name of your currently selected printer in the Format for popup list 114 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 11 2 Settings Page Attri
322. ter Names 59 61 62 76 176 Character Names Box on Character Name Entry 147 Character Names without Dialogue 155 Character Set 235 Characters 124 205 Chat Window 129 Cheat 5 7 58 229 Cheat a Page 5 7 58 282 Movie Magic Screenwriter Cheat an Element 5 7 Cheat Element 72 249 Cheat Page Breaks 57 58 Cheat Right Margins 57 Cheat the Page s Header 57 59 Cheat the Whole Script 57 Cheating 57 114 Check For Update 247 Check Homonyms 235 CheckBox 18 CheckBoxes 14 18 Cherry 187 Circumflex 74 Cleaning up Imported Scripts 261 Clear 221 270 Clear File History List 219 220 Clear Ignore List 235 Clear Out List First 61 Click and Drag 80 Close 24 119 219 220 250 Close All 219 220 COLD OPENING 48 62 Collapsing 101 Color 84 203 Colors 105 239 Combine OMITTEDs 156 Compare Two Scripts 235 Completely Blank Elements 155 Compose Message In 138 Cont d Text 176 Contents 12 247 Continued 119 Continueds 176 Continues Last Search 248 CONTINUOUS 62 Convert Case 229 Converting A Pages 201 Copy 69 221 248 Copy and Paste 68 Copy to 24 221 copying outline styles 110 Copyright Notice 13 Correct Double Capitals 75 76 Count Words 235 Create Edit Outline Styles 270 Create Edit Outline Styles 233 Create PDF 120 Create PrintThing File 120 Creating Alias Text 64 Creating Text Elements 28 CTRL 74 CTRL ALT K 58 CTRL 74 CTRL 74 CTRL 74 CTRL 74 CTRL
323. the most accurate import However it may cause Shots to be misinterpreted as Character Names and vice versa e Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification Some word processors lose Capitalization Information when exporting files Checking this box tells Screenwriter to ignore Capitalization when identifying Elements Ignore Margins for Element identification Some script files have their script elements defined by their margins others by codes or Hard Returns If a script file is being imported incorrectly due to its margins not being what Screenwriter expects checking this feature may allow a more accurate import Action is in Parentheticals Check this if your import file has the Action Element in parentheses such as certain TV or Stage Play scripts Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Check this if the import file has Page Breaks and you want to keep them exactly the same in the resulting Screenwriter script 5 Click on OK to import the file 6 Under Screenwriter s File menu Save your imported file under a new name If your script doesn t import successfully try again with different options checked You may have to experiment with these options to get the best results 1 15 4 3 Cut and Paste Import Use this method if none of the other methods imports your document successfully To import a document from another Mac OS X program on the same computer as Screenwriter 1 Open the
324. the Spelling button Read on for more details e Add Words to This field allows you to change the User Dictionary The standard generic dictionary is USER US LXA All Learned and Auto Corrected words will be added to the dictionary that is displayed in this field Note If the spell check is set to use a language other than American English then the default User Dictionary will be changed appropriately e Setup Options Click this button to go to the Spelling window of the Options menu SO you can setup how the Spell Check functions e Select Language Click this button to select among the available language dictionaries e Help Clicking on this button takes you to a graphical representation of this window and an explanation of each feature 1 9 16 1 Start Spell Check As Spell Check begins checking relative to the cursor position it s not necessary to select the text to check 1 Position the cursor in the word or Element you d like to check or directly before the word 76 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 9 16 2 to start spell checking at 2 Under the Spell menu select the checking method to use e Word Spell checks the Word that the cursor is currently in e Element Spell checks the Element that the cursor is currently in e Page Spell checks the current Page e Forwards Spell checks from the cursor position to the end of the script e Entire Script Spell checks all text in the script When
325. the second Character Name element and joins the two Dialogue elements when it finds two speeches in a row by the same character without an intervening Action or other Element Unchecked this error displays a prompt Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks If checked SmartCheck accepts blank lines with Revision Marks as correct Unchecked it treats such blank lines as Completely Blank Elements Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT match If checked treats the same Character Name speaking twice in a row as correct when their Extensions differ such as V O and O S Unchecked it flags this as an error Combine OMITTEDs that are Widowed on page If checked SmartCheck finds any page that contains only an OMITTED scene and prompts you to combine that OMITTED with any OMITTEDs that precede or follow it Unchecked the page prints with only an OMITTED scene on it SmartCheck Prompts If you select Yes to fix an error SmartCheck has prompted you about it fixes the error and continue to check your script If you select No it asks you whether YOU want to fix it If you reply Yes it pauses at the format error to allow you to fix it If you reply No it ignores the error and continues checking If you select Cancel it stops the SmartCheck scan If SmartCheck was run automatically before a print job printing begins Otherwise you ll be returned to your script When SmartCheck completes a manual scan i
326. ti Locked A7 Locked Numbering 8 i Flipped Multi Locked A A Numbering 7A Flipped A Numbering A F3 User Defined nf 2 EXT STREET DAY Cancel A window displays showing your options for renumbering that element Check the radio button of the numbering you d like the scene to have e No Numbering If checked converts a Scene Heading to a Shot element Scene numbers are removed e Locked lf checked converts a Scene Heading to normal numbering without any A numbering scheme e A Numbering If checked converts a Scene Heading to A Scene numbering e Flipped A Numbering If checked converts a Scene Heading to A Scene numbering with the number and A letter reversed e Multi Locked lf checked converts a Scene Heading to a Multi Locked Scene Heading taking its numbering scheme from the scenes before and after it e Flipped Multi Locked lf checked converts a Scene Heading to a Multi Locked ocene Heading taking its numbering scheme from the scenes before and after it but with the number and A letter reversed e User Defined If checked displays a box in which to enter the specific number you want the Scene Heading to have Based on the number you enter Screenwriter assigns the appropriate numbering scheme to the Scene Heading NOTE Overriding a Scene Number may change all subsequent Scene Numbering Check the scene numbers of scenes following the one you ve overridden and renumber them if
327. ting There is usually more than one way of performing any text selecting or editing command in Screenwriter For ease of use the method using the Mouse and the Main Menu Bar is emphasized As you become more familiar with Screenwriter you many want to use Keyboard Shortcuts and Toolbar Icons To see what command a Toolbar Icon represents use the mouse to move the cursor over the icon without clicking on it A box of explanatory Hint text displays directly beneath the icon and any Quick Key shortcut displays on the left of the Bottom Status Bar e For a list of Main Menu Bar commands see the Appendix chapter entitled Screenwriter 6 Menus 218 e Fora list of Keyboard Shortcuts see the Appendix chapter entitled Key Assignments Moving the Cursor Use the following keys to move the cursor around the script quickly CMD UP ARROW essaie ictu ere Previous Element CMD DOWN ARROW Next Element CTRL UP ARROW ees Previous Scene or Outline Element CTRL DOWN ARROW Next Scene or Outline Element MID FP OUD een Previous Script Page S4 B e RTE Next Script Page CMD tTHOME ainciivictsasviomudencecsavetsauessen Goto Top of Script CMDFEND ee Goto End of Script Oa 5C eee ne eee eet ae enn eee Goto Page menu RIGHT ARROW cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees Next character LEFT ARROW aeg estet eeee tieren EEee Previous character CTRL RIGHT ARROW Next Word
328. tion Dialog e NaviDoc Options e Outline Options 140 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 13 1 View Menu Full Page x NaviDoc Title Page Publisher Index Cards Toolbar Icons v Ruler v Right Element Buttons Scene Numbering Show Format Codes Hide Names in Pop Up List Hide Locations in Pop Up List Hide Elements On Screen Running Lists Zoom Screen Text The View menu holds the display controls For a description of each of these commands see Screenwriter 6 Menus 225 in the Appendices 1 13 1 1 Ruler View gt Ruler If checked displays the horizontal page Ruler showing margin markers for the Element in which the cursor is located Element margins can be cheated by moving the right and left ruler markers Unchecked the Ruler does not display A UE EEN ene MEME een 5 6 7 H CLOSE SHOT Wheelbarrow full of junk being dumped onto pile JOSEPH S VOICE SCFr ap drives 1 13 1 2 Show Format Codes If checked displays the hidden format codes embedded in the text of your document by Screenwriter for such things as text styles Bold Italic etc text color and other formatting codes In normal use you won t need to be aware of these codes Unchecked the format codes are hidden and do not display onscreen Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 141 1 13 1 3 T CLOSE SHOT WHEELBARROW FULL OF JUNK BEING DUMPED ONTO d PILE Format Codes e
329. tly Setup Available Voices Clicking this button changes the configuration of the window by showing options to add or modify existing voices Edit Vocal Characteristics Clicking this button displays a window that allows control of the Pitch and Speed of the voice the user selected from the Voice window Edit Pronunciation Clicking this button displays a window that allows alteration of the pronunciation of the voice that was chosen from the Voice window Based on the word entered in the blank field the Edit Pronunciation window gives four choices Add this word to the dictionary Change the pronunciation of this word Remove this word from the dictionary and Change capitalization or spelling Once a choice is made clicking Next goes to the next stage of modification The Change the Pronunciation of this word feature is more extensive and allows modification of the way a voice says the word To modify the way a word is pronounced type in a spelling that sounds more like the word or the phonetic symbols e Add New Voice Clicking this button allows the user to add a new voice based on an existing voice The gender of the new voice can be male or female Whichever is chosen male or female determines the voice on which this new voice is based For example the voice will defaults to Mary if you choose female You can change the default voice by clicking on the Edit Vocal Characteristics button e Delete Voice Clicking this bu
330. to open Above ch INT OUTER OFFICE DAY CLOSE SHOT As George and Violet come through the door the bank examiner who is still walLins to qo to work on t Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 81 Double click or drag the NaviDoc splitter to the left to close Above 1 10 2 Resizing the NaviDoc Panel Click and drag the NaviDoc splitter to change the width of the NaviDoc panel The NaviDoc has a minimum size but no maximum Dragging the NaviDoc splitter to the left beyond the minimum closes the NaviDoc panel F WS LOGALE ICE DAY George oper d G 7 Gel UNCLE BILLS E CLOSE SHOT Wa wir i Tle nm Je bmi Fa La a NOTE The yellow arrow is in the screenshot to point out the splitter and the splitter mouse icon The yellow arrow is not part of Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 10 3 Navigation Pointer and the NaviDoc Panel When you click on any item in the NaviDoc the document scrolls to the position of that item and shows an arrow pointing to the beginning of the item SCrap TL JZEXT HOUSE NIGHT S K FED OOOCEHTDZUE oa 000000000 CLOSE SHOT man be 1 10 4 NaviDoc Keyboard Commands Here are the six basic keyboard commands for moving around in the NaviDoc Top of the list CTRL HOME Bottom of the list CTRL END Page Up CTRL PAGE UP Page Down CTRL PAGE DOWN Previous Row CTRL UP ARROW Next Row
331. ts Using a separate card for each scene they jot down what happens in the scene where it takes place etc Numbering each card shows the flow of the story from scene to scene Adding a scene is as easy as inserting a new card between two others Moving scenes is equally simple though having to renumber the scenes each time is a chore When satisfied with the outline created with the index cards the writer can expand on that information to write the individual scenes that form the story Now Screenwriter brings you an easier way to work with index cards on your computer Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 33 1 7 4 1 screen with Electronic Index Cards The information you write on each card transfers directly to a scene in your script The top line on the card becomes a Scene Heading and the description becomes Action Moving an index card is performed using the familiar Drag and Drop method and Screenwriter automatically moves the scenes in your script and renumbers them for you When you re satisfied with your index card outline switch from Index Card View to normal Script view All the work you did on the index cards is there an outline ready for you to expand into a script Index Card View To use the Electronic Index Cards you need to enter Index Card View Under the View menu select Index Cards Your script now looks something like the following depending on the number of cards or scenes you
332. ts the right Scene Number on the first line of Scene Heading even when the Scene Heading text wraps to a second line Unchecked the right Scene Number may appear on the second wrapped line Scene Continued Text Allows you to choose whether Scene Continued text is displayed and what text to use e Top of Pg If checked puts the default text CONTINUED above a Scene that s continued from the previous page Enter your preferred text including any parentheses to replace the default text with e Btm of Pg If checked puts the default text CONTINUED below a Scene that continues to another page Enter your preferred text including any parentheses to replace the default text with e Left Margin of Bottom Cont d Lets you choose how far in 1 10 of an inch increments to indent the Bottom Continued from the left edge of the page 1 13 14 1 6 Shots Shots has no element specific options 1 13 14 1 7 Action Put Action in Parentheses If checked puts Parentheses around the Action text as is required in some Stage Play and TV Sitcom formats Action Indentation This option allows you to change the starting indent of Action The setting of 1 is only available when you have the option Put Action in Parenthesis selected and setting it to 1 will automatically select that option for you if it is not already This setting will cause the left parenthesis to be outdented one position so that the first line of action will line up
333. tton deletes any user defined voice selected on the list Voices that come with the program cannot be deleted e Edit Voice Name Clicking this button allows the user to change the name of any user defined voice e Return to Voice Assign Clicking this button will return the window to its original configuration by showing all original buttons e Cancel Clicking this button removes any changes and returns you to the Setup Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 137 Voices window 1 12 2 2 Speak Selection 1 12 3 1 12 3 1 Tools Speak Selection This command uses the Mac s build in speech tools to read the selected text aloud You ll know it is running when you see the following window E ait Now Speaking Cancel Send As Email Attachment Command The File gt Send As Email Attachment menu command transmits the open document to a recipient via email Use this feature to send MMSW files to other Screenwriter users or PDF and RIF files to non Screenwriter users Send As Email Attachment Attach Script As PDF Portable Document Format RTF Rich Text Format v MMSW Screenwriter Document SCW Pre Screenwriter 6 0 Format There are three choices of file formats when sending the document as an email attachment from Movie Magic Screenwriter e MMSW Screenwriter Document default This is the file format Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 uses for saving documents Select this to sen
334. tton in any given group may be checked at any one time Text or Numerical Input Fields Headerl 8 E Header 2 Footer Header Footer Margins Inches Left 1 5 6 Right 1 0 E Text or Numerical Input Fields such as Header and Footer text or Header Footer Margins in the examples above allow you to enter text or numbers as appropriate Depending on the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 19 1 5 9 1 5 9 1 particular field spaces may be allowed and text may be automatically capitalized for you Editing Screen The default editing screen has several menu bars on screen e Main Menu Bar we e Top Toolbar 20 e Right Toolbar 20 e Bottom Status Bar 20 Ga CH amp e Wonderful 6 mmsw E DEE D Ge EE EE DEER EXT CHURCH ANOTHER ANGLE DAY C MED CLOSE SHOT people entering church JOSEPH S VOICE Al On V J Day he wept and prayed again T FRANKLIN S VOICE Se Joseph now show him what happened EN F JOSEPH S VOICE ol Yes sir E MORE IT E CONTINUED E qmm R3 E ia el E x Dialogue Line 56 Pg 1 of 68 E Main Menu Bar The top most bar is the Main Menu Bar 218 which gives you access to all of the Pull Down menus Screenwriter File Edit View Format Goto NaviDoc Tools Production Window e Screenwriter Menu 2 9 e File Menu 220 e Edit Menu 21 e View Menu zs 20 Movie Magic Screenwriter
335. u can tag an item more than once in a scene as Global Tagging does it s not necessary an item only shows up once per scene in the breakdowns or in Movie Magic Scheduling or EP Scheduling Click OK to tag the item globally Cancel to exit without tagging Ignore Selection for Breakdowns If your breakdown is recognizing an item in a scene as being tagged when you don t want it to you can mark the text so it is ignored by breakdowns While in Tagging Mode select the item by double clicking on it A list of Breakdown Categories displays Click on Ignore Selection for Breakdowns Untag All Items To remove breakdown tagging codes from all items in your entire script select Untag All ltems Under the Production menu select Production gt Breakdown gt Untag All Items Click the YES button CONTINUE button on Mac to Untag all items No Cancel button on Mac to exit without making changes Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 211 1 14 7 7 Edit Breakdown Categories If you use different Breakdown Categories than the ones Screenwriter supplies or would like to add ones of your own design use the Edit Categories feature Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Edit Categories Edit Tagging Categories Double click on any Category to edit its name or display code Grayed Categories will not display on the pop up list Additional Labor Animal Handler Cast Members Costumes Extras Greenery
336. uld change the page numbers of the pages following it and everyone would no longer have the same text on the same pages Subsequent pages are added as A Pages Deleted pages become Omitted pages Similarly Scene Headings and numbers can be locked so that everyone s referring to the same scene New scenes become A Scenes Deleted scenes become Omitted scenes NOTE If you place the mouse on Page Panel in a locked script it displays a pop up window with the total number of page how many pages were revised and the applicable percentage The Production Cycle The Production Cycle involves the following steps e Issue the Shooting Script awer then e Lock the Script ae e Perform Revisions 190 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 187 e Issue Revised Pages mon e Start Next Revision 190 Lock the script again e Perform Next Revisions e Issue Next Revised Pages and so on Here s how 1 14 2 1 Shooting Script Before issuing the shooting script for the first time turn on and or customize all the Production Features you d like to use especially Top and Bottom Continueds Each of these options is described in detail elsewhere in the manual and in this Online Help 1 Save the screenwriter s final draft using File gt Save As Give it a different name to reflect the date and its status as the White shooting draft you re about to create e g MyScript WHITE Now you can save your
337. ulti Locked script Screenwriter enters the text specified here into the blank Scene Heading Default text is OMITTED Omitted Thru Text lIf you delete a series of adjacent Scenes in a script with Locked or Multi Locked scenes Screenwriter produces a Run of Omitted Scenes Onscreen it looks something like B OMITIRDSOS S THRU T ERU 5 5 The 5 in Omitted 5 is provided for manual override control and does not print It allows you to change the ending number of the run if you ever need to Default Omitted Thru text is THRU Omitted And Text Used for a Run of only 2 Omitted Scenes Default Omitted And text is AND A Scene Numbering Scheme A scene Numbering scheme f Normal LA Flipped Al ge Use the Following Scenes Number Specifies how A Scenes and A Pages are numbered Normal 1A Places the A Letter After the scene page number Flipped A1 Places the A Letter Before the scene page number Use the following Scene s Number This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings inserted into a script with Locked Scene Headings Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading that s inserted between two existing Scene Headings to be numbered with the following scene s number rather than the preceding scene s number With this option selected when you insert a new scene between scenes 1 and 2 it would be scene 2A The next scene would be scene 2B and so on
338. urrent Cursor Position Turn off Block De selects the currently selected block of text Mouse Selection Screenwriter has a variety of options for selecting text with the mouse Left Click Using the mouse Left Click directly in front of the text to be selected While holding the Left Button down drag the mouse cursor across the text Release the button when all the desired text is highlighted To continue selecting text that s offscreen move the mouse cursor onto the top or bottom menu bar while still holding the button down it continues scrolling and selecting in that direction Double Click Place the cursor on the word to be selected 68 Movie Magic Screenwriter 1 9 3 1 9 4 1 9 5 Double Click the Left mouse button to select the Word e Double Click again to select the entire Sentence e Double Click again to select the entire Element e Double Click again to select the entire Group if any e Double Click again to select the entire Scene Right Click Place the cursor on the word sentence element to be selected Right Click the mouse to bring up a Selection menu If you re using the Mac OS X popup lists choose the appropriate item Mouse Blocking Screenwriter can select text in increments of text characters or of whole words Choose your preference under the Tools menu by selecting Options then the Mouse button If you check Mouse Selects Text by Whole Words Screenwriter automatical
339. ve created r Index Card View Horizontal Layout 7 EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET WINTER DAY 8 EXT STREET DAY 9 INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAY is a raw gusty day and his overcoat and muffler flap in the breeze Draped around one arm is a large Christmas wreath Under his other arm are several more copies of the paper JOSEPH S VOICE This morning day before Christmas about ten a m Bedford Falls time George comes to where Ernie the taxi driver is standing on the sidewalk lt lt gt gt GEORGE holding out paper Hi Ernie look at that George is walking along the sidewalk reading a newspaper It MED LONG SHOT Uncle Billy is walking along the street humming happily to himself He sees some men decorating the Court House with banners and bunting there is a huge sign reading Welcome Home Harry Bailey UNCLE BILLY calls out Be sure you spell the name right lt lt THINGS LOOKING BETTER gt gt 10 FULL SHOT THE OFFICES ARE UNCHANGED STILL 11 INT BANK DAY 12 INT POTTER S OFFICE DAY GEORGE Extra Extra Read all about it Cousin Tilly and Cousin Eustace are talking on the phone COUSIN EUSTACE George George It s Harry now on long distance from Washington GEORGE Harry What do you know about that COUSIN EUSTACE He reversed the charges It s okay isn t it GEORGE What do you mean it s okay For a hero takes the phone Harry Oh you
340. version files in This option controls where the previous versions of your document are saved e A subfolder named Previous Versions Screenwriter places the bk files for all documents in a folder called Previous Versions e The same folder as the document Screenwriter places the bk files for the document being edited in the same folder as the document e Create a new previous version file This option controls when the previous version files are created e Only once per editing session A bk file is created the first time the document is saved during a single editing session If the document is closed and reopened ocreenwriter considers it a new editing session and another bk file is created if the document is saved while in the new editing session e Every time a document is saved Screenwriter creates a bk file every time a document is saved 1 13 4 4 Automatic Timed Backups Timed Backup Frequency 5 Minutes Timed Backup Sound b None ped Screenwriter has a data security function that makes a temporary Timed Backup of your script at regular intervals In an emergency situation such as a power outage you can retrieve the timed backup and use the data The timed backup is a separate process from regular file saving It automatically backs up the file you re working on when its timer activates Always save your scripts separately before you exit Screenwriter Make Backups of your scripts to another drive
341. window and then this button to change the look After the last color is used it should There are two drop down menus The first allows you to choose the method the script will loop once it has been through all the Revision colors e Don t Loop Colors lf you select this option and then try to increment the revision color beyond the last color it will tell you that it cannot The next three options are all used in combination with the First Loop Color Selection to the right of this option in this menu the color BLUE e Loop To DOUBLE f you select this option and then increment the revision color beyond the last color it will call this new color DOUBLE BLUE or whatever color is selected on the First Loop Color Selection and will then start through the list again adding the word DOUBLE before each color in turn then TRIPLE etc e Loop To SECOND This will function exactly the same as Loop to DOUBLE but will use the words SECOND THIRD FOURTH etc e Loop To 2ND This will function exactly the same as Loop to DOUBLE but will use the words 2ND 3RD 4TH etc The second drop down menu allows you to select which color the program should start with when it loops to a DOUBLE or SECOND 2ND color You have the choice between the first and second colors on the Revision Color List Display Page Colors On Screen If checked displays the Revision Colors in a Sample Text Box to the right of the Colors window Unchecked clicking on a
342. with all subsequent lines When you change this Action Indentation setting you will see a sample action line which will display how action will look with the current parenthetical and indentation settings Put Action in Parenthesis This is a sample Action paragraph with the current indentation settings 1 13 14 1 8 Transitions Transitions are FLUSH RIGHT If checked Transition text is aligned flush with the right margin Unchecked Transition text is aligned flush with the left margin 180 Movie Magic Screenwriter v Transitions are FLUSH RIGHT 1 13 14 1 9 Act Breaks Put Act Break text in Parenthesis WI Center Act Break B Don t Use for New Scene Same Act Starting Number 2 End of Show Follows Act D Numbering scheme C ACT A C 3 ACT 1 NUMBERS fs ACT ONE o ACT ROMAN Put Act Info in Parenthesis If checked puts Parentheses around the Act Information text as is required in some TV Sitcom formats Center Act Info lf checked all Act Information text is centered horizontally between the Act Information margins Unchecked Act Information text starts at the Act Information left margin Don t use Act Break for a New Scene in the Same Act e g Put in ONLY on first Scene of an Act lf checked puts Act Scene at the beginning of the first scene in an Act only Subsequent scenes have the Scene information only Unchecked each scene in an Act
343. with the suffix BK allows it to be overwritten next time you save which is not what you want Opening a Script automatically at Startup If you don t want to go to a New file each time Screenwriter opens there are several other Startup options To choose one 1 Under the File menu select Program Options 2 Click on the Startup Files button Select an option Leave You in a Blank Script opens a New blank script file Display Screen Sized Retrieve List displays a large Open File menu showing Screenwriter SCW suffix files in your default Script subdirectory Display Open File Menu displays the standard Open File menu Retrieve Last Script you worked on opens the last script you saved Restore Last Workspace opens all files that were open when you last exited Screenwriter displayed in the same way Opening a Timed Backup Screenwriter makes an emergency backup of the currently displayed script at timed intervals This is in addition to the automatic BK backup file created when you save a script and is saved separately To open a Timed Backup file 1 Under the File menu select Open 2 Change the File Type from Screenwriter Scripts to Timed Backup 3 Select from the list of available TMB files 4 Click on OK to open the file To keep a copy of the TMB version save it under a different name for example if the filename is SAVE2 TMB save it as lt FILENAME gt SCW 24 Movie Magic Screenwriter
344. word processing programs Effectively switches off ocreenwriter s script formatting features though you can still insert script Elements To switch to WP mode Under the Edit menu select Normal WP mode Allow Normal Word Processor Mode must be checked on the Misc page of Program Options under the File menu before you can use WP mode A checkmark appears next to it and the left of the Bottom Panel displays a message in Red to remind you that you re in WP mode To exit WP mode repeat this command sequence or press CMD W Television Templates These templates have the pre set formats for certain Sitcoms and Episodic Dramas Loading a Television Template is as easy as opening one of your script files 1 Under the File menu select Open You ll be in the default subdirectory which is C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts unless you changed it 2 Open the Template folder it should be in C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts if you installed it as recommended If you didn t install the templates uninstall Screenwriter and re install it Answer Yes when asked if you want to install the TV Templates See the Installation chapter for more information 3 Select a Template file Click on OK to open it For a list of Television Templates and the shows they correspond to see the Appendix chapter entitled Files Installed Index Cards Many writers use index cards or 3 by 5 cards as an organizing tool before writing their scrip
345. work at regular intervals using the Save command NOTE To customize the Production Features for the way you or your production company work continue with Steps 2 and 3 To accept Screenwriter s default settings skip directly to Step 4 2 Under the Format menu select Element Styles e Click on the Scene Headings button and set the Scene Numbers and Scene Continued Text to your preference e Click on the Locked Scripts button and set the Scene Omitted Text A Scene Numbering Scheme Revision Mark Text and Locked Letter Skip List to your preferences Do not Lock Scene Headings and Page Breaks here You ll do all Locking from the Production menu e Once you have the settings customized to the way your production company works click on Make Default for All New Documents if you want all new files to have this format e Click on the OK button to accept your changes 3 Under the Tools menu select Options e Click on the Revisions tab and set the Revision Marks options to your preference e Click on the Printing tab and set the Print Bottom Continueds and Print MORE options to your preference Click on the OK button to accept your changes 4 Under the Production Menu select Lock the Script Click OK to confirm your decision A Lock the Script window displays 188 Movie Magic Screenwriter Lock the Script TURN ON the following LOCK the following Top Scene Continueds Left amp Right Scene Numbers
346. ws all open scripts with reduced windows overlapping each other The most recently opened script is at the front becoming the currently displayed file Switching between Windows If all the windows are visible on screen switch between them by clicking anywhere on a script s window If the windows are Maximized i e at full screen size then e Select the script to display by clicking on its name at the bottom of the Window menu e Or press CMD where is the number between 1 and 9 that corresponds to the document window to cycle between the open windows Opening a Previously Saved Version When you tell Screenwriter to save a script it makes a backup copy of any previously saved version with the same name The suffix MMSW is changed to BK for the previous version Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 23 1 5 10 5 1 5 10 6 If you need to go back to that previous version load the BK file 1 Under the File menu select Open 2 Change the File Type from Screenwriter Scripts to Prev Saved Script 3 Select from the list of available BK files changing the subdirectory drive or file type if necessary 4 Click on OK to open the file Now both versions of the file the old BK and the latest SCW are open Switch between them under the Window menu To keep a copy of the BK version save it under a different name for example if the filename is OSCAR BK save it as OSCAR1 SCW Leaving its name
347. xt and Act continued text appear e Page Numbers This option controls which page numbers appear in the Set Lists e None lIf selected No page numbers are printed e Starting Page If selected prints the Page Numbers that each Set is used on e Starting amp End lf selected prints the Page Numbers of the start and end of the set use no page numbers starting page number or starting and end page numbers e Prefix for Page Numbers This option controls text that appears in front of the page numbers e g Pg displays page six as Pg 6 e Text Between Each Act This is the text inserted after the end of one act and before the next act e Act Break The act break text has a check box for Bold and a check box for Underlining Checked is ON Unchecked is OFF e Scene Headings The scene heading text has a check box for Bold and a check box for Underlining Checked is ON Unchecked is OFF 244 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Final Text This is the text inserted at the end of the Set List report e Final Text formatting check boxes The final text has a check box for Bold and a check box for Underlining Checked is ON Unchecked is OFF e List Characters in Each Scene When checked the characters are listed with each scene within parentheses Example 10 INT BANK DAY Potter Teller Uncle Billy e In All Caps When checked the character names listed in each scene are capitalized e Font Let s you se
348. your e mail provider Enter Partner s IP or Let Partner do it This allows you and your partner to enter each other s IP address for iPartner to make a connection Click Enter Partner s IP if you wish to enter your Partner s IP address to connect or if Let Partner do it if you wish to have your partner enter your IP address Whichever one you choose your partner will need to choose the other one in order for a connection to be made Who ever initiates the connection does not affect how iPartner performs both people will have the same privileges and capabilities Trouble Shooting This button will bring up a text screen with known issues helpful tips as well information on problems with connecting and using iPartner Cancel This will close the iPartner window and return you to your document Connect on port number This is the TCP port that iPartner uses to connect with By default it should be 2200 For more info see Trouble shooting iPartner make this a link to Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help gt Other Screenwriter Features gt iPartner gt iPartner Trouble Shooting Known Issues The Chat Window Once you and your partner are connected you both will see a Chat Window which generally looks like the following though of course the exact text will vary 130 Movie Magic Screenwriter Scriptwriting Chat H

Movie Magic Screenwriter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents